Wenger Corporation | INTERIORS BINDER by Wenger Corporation

OVERVIEW INTERIORS BINDER

OVERVIEW

OVER 70 YEARS OF SERVICE IN NEW CONSTRUCTION AND RENOVATION PROJECTS. Wenger is your trusted resource for equipment, furniture and services to help you create the most effective facilities for music, theatre and athletics. We have an enormous library of resources and hundreds of professionals ready to put their expertise to work for you.

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

OVERVIEW

MUSIC EDUCATION A day doesn't go by without Wenger visiting with a band or orchestra director or talking with a choral director or meeting with a school administrator, architect or acoustician. These relationships have been going on for over 70 years and you can imagine what kind of insights we've gained into what music facilities need to succeed.

PERFORMING ARTS Whatever the facility, from small black box theatres to large performing arts centers, Wenger provides innovative products designed specifically for the needs of rehearsal and performance – durable, versatile products that save time and labor.

ATHLETICS GearBoss® by Wenger is a complete, state-of-the-art system designed to help with all aspects of your athletic program. From lockers, to storage, to equipment transport and fund-raising solutions, GearBoss products save you time, space and effort. They're flexible and customizable so your system can change as your needs change. Plus, we'll work with you every step of the way to make sure you get exactly the right system – nothing more, nothing less.

OVERVIEW Table of Contents 1. Overview 2. Music Rehearsal and Practice Rooms a. Chairs b. Music Stands c. Conductorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Equipment d. Elementary Products e. Workstations f.

Storage

g. OnBoard h. Acoustical Shells i.

Standing Choral Risers

Staging and Seated Risers

3. Performance Spaces 4. Athletic Equipment Storage

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 1

OVERVIEW Introduction

WENGER CATALOGS AVAILABLE IN eBOOK FORMAT.

QR CODE - Snap the code for direct access to the Wenger Catalogs.

https://www.wengercorp.com/catalog.php WENGER CATALOGS AVAILABLE IN eBOOK FORMAT. https://www.wengercorp.com/catalog.php MUSIC EDUCATION

PERFORMING ARTS

ATHLETICS

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

中文

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 2

OVERVIEW Introduction

W enger

ma k e s

i t

e a si e r

Environmental Initiatives

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 3

t o

OVERVIEW Introduction

Let Us Help You Reach Your T

oday we’re more committed than ever to searching out new ways to lessen our impact on the environment while we help our customers do the same. Here are just some of our environmental initiatives.

Conserving resources in our buildings • Use recycled paper wherever possible. • Correspond and deliver information electronically. • Regulate use and conserve energy throughout the facility.

Recycling everywhere we can • Collect and recycle throughout our facility. • Donate sawdust-for-animal-bedding to local farming operations. • Routinely collect steel and aluminum dropoff, as well as all oils used in manufacturing. • Allow and encourage employees to bring in difficult-to-recycle items. • Re-use manufacturing waste materials in new products and new packaging.

Creating environmentally friendly products

Implementing the philosophy of the USGBC

The U.S. Green Building Council is a 501(c)(3) non-profit community of leaders working to make green buildings available to everyone within a generation. As a member of the U.S. Green Building Council since 2009, Wenger is committed to fulfilling USGBC’s mission to promote green building practices.

LEED Certification

LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) is an internationally recognized green building certification system, • Environmentally sensitive core material available in Instrument providing third-party verification that a building or community Storage Cabinets was designed and built using strategies aimed at improving • High-efficiency electronic ballasts in Sound-Isolation Practice performance across all the metrics that matter most: energy Rooms savings, water efficiency, CO2 emissions reduction, improved • Wax coating on Student Chair Tablet Arm Desks eliminates indoor environmental quality, and stewardship of resources and emissions sensitivity to their impacts. • Powder paint finishing reduces waste by 65% • Super-insulated drying and curing ovens minimize heat loss and GREENGUARD Certification reduce consumption The GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI) is an industry-independent, not-for-profit • Green cleaning agents and a non-metallic conversion coating organization that: are used to pretreat products before finishing • Oversees the GREENGUARD Certification programs. • Manufacturing cooling and rinse water is reused multiple times • Establishes acceptable product standards for building materials, before discharge interior furnishings, cleaners, electronics and children’s products. FSC 100% FSC Mix FSC Recycled • Residual material in aerosol cans is burned or captured and • Recognized by LEED – IEQ Credit 4.5 carefully disposed • Securing properly sized raw materials eliminates waste Forest Stewardship Council® (FSC®) • Computer-optimized cutting processes improve yield and reduce 100%Chain of Custody (COC) Certificate MIX RECYCLED C103872 waste FSC is an independent, non-governmental,C000000 C000000 C000000 • ISO quality-improvement tools reduce scrap not-for-profit organization established to promote the responsible management of the world’s forests. FSC provides • Wenger delivery trucks are built with the latest clean-burning internationally recognized standard-setting, trademark assurance diesel emission-control technologies and accreditation services to companies, organizations, and communities interested in responsible forestry. Using environmentally friendly packaging • Stretch-wrapping eliminates corrugated waste The FSC label provides a credible link between • Post-installation packaging is returned and reused or recycled responsible production and consumption of forest products, • Pallets are reused or remanufactured enabling consumers and businesses to make purchasing decisions • Instant foam packaging — free of CFCs and HCFCs — is used that benefit people and the environment as well as providing wherever possible ongoing business value. 100%

From well‑ managed forests

From responsible sources

Made from recycled material

• Recognized by USGBC / LEED • MR Credit 7: Certified Wood

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 4

The mark of responsible forest management

OVERVIEW Introduction

h Your Environmental Goals GREENGUARD certifi cation Wenger is committed to caring for the environment and to supporting all GREENGUARD goals. It is our aspiration to GREENGUARD certify all Wenger products with both GREENGUARD Air Quality and GREENGUARD Children & Schools certifications. On October 2, 2009, the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI) announced that Wenger achieved GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality and GREENGUARD Children & SchoolsSM certifications for its musical instrument and equipment storage solutions. This certification is among the most stringent in the world and takes into account the special sensitivities of children.

SoundLok™ Sound-Isolating Practice Rooms

FSC ® CoC certification Wenger is FSC CoC certified, completing the process in December of 2010, and now offers products with FSC-certified wood. There are two parts of the FSC system; Forest Management certification ensures that forests are managed to high standards covering social, environmental and economic issues, and Chain of Custody certification which traces the wood from those forests through all stages of processing and distribution. The FSC Chain of Custody (CoC) standard ensures FSC certified wood is accounted for as it passes along the supply chain; ensures that when FSC certified wood is mixed with other wood, the non FSC certified wood does not come from controversial sources and provides for use of recycled/reclaimed materials. With our CoC certification, Wenger can confidently manufacture and label product with the FSC brand consistent with FSC policies and provide assurance to our customers. Wenger products with FSC-certified wood as an option include:

GearBoss® High-Density Storage Systems

Our complete GREENGUARD-certified product list is online with easy access to product certificates for LEED documentation. Or visit www.greenguard.org.

Music Library

Conductor’s Equipment

Miscellaneous Cabinets Music Posture Chairs & Music Stands Instrument & Garment Storage

Instrument & Garment Storage

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 5

OVERVIEW Introduction ‘LEED’, ‘USGBC’ and related logos are a trademark owned by the U.S. Green Building Council and are used by permission.

Printed on paper containing 50% recycled and 30% post-consumer materials.

GREENGUARD Certified Products • Instrument Storage Cabinets • Garment Storage Cabinets • AcoustiCabinets™ • Attic Storage • Percussion Workstation • Tuba/Sousaphone Mobile Storage Rack • Stringed Instrument Racks • Rack-n-Roll® Garment Racks • Music Library Storage Systems • Music Sorting Racks • Folio Cabinets • Rehearsal Resource Center • Stereo Workstation • Stereo Cabinet • Workstations • Bookcases • Wardrobe Cabinet • Poster/Teaching Storage Cabinet • Small Instrument Storage Cabinet

• OrffGarage® • GearBoss® High-Density Storage Team Carts • GearBoss® High-Density Storage X-Carts™ • GearBoss® SportCart • GearBoss® High-Density Storage Cart Accessories • GearBoss® II HighDensity Storage Carts and Accessories • GearBoss® Shelving • Mobile Kiosk • AirPro™ Metal Grid Lockers • Bravo™ Music Stand • RoughNeck® Music Stand • Classic 50® Music Stand • Preface™ Music Stand • Preface™ Conductor’s Stand • Gig® Stand Music Stand • Portastand™ Folding Music Stand • Acoustic Shield • Move and Store Carts

• Conductor’s Stand • Flex™ Conductor’s Stand • Flex™ TechBridge • Tuba Tamer • Cymbal Stand • TeacherTAXI® • Nota® Standard Chairs • Nota® Premium Chairs • Ensemble Stools • Sousaphone Chairs • Workstation Chairs • High Density Portable Audience Chairs • Symphony Chairs • Musician Chairs • Student Chairs • Playright Chairs • SoundLok™ Sound-Isolating Practice Room • SoundLok™ Sound-Isolating Practice Room with VAE Technology

More than 60 Years of Experience Guarantees Years of Satisfaction. Wenger Corporation was founded in 1946 to provide innovative, high-quality products and solutions for music and theatre education, performance and athletic equipment storage and transport. We have spent more than 60 years listening to what our customers need and then designing and developing durable, functional products to meet those needs — products that enhance any program and deliver what they promise year after year. FSC Recycled 100%

RECYCLED Made from recycled material

C000000

C103872 The mark of responsible forest management

US/3-2011/2M/LT0213D

555 Park Drive, PO Box 448 Owatonna, MN 55060-0448 Phone 800.4WENGER (493-6437) Fax 507.455.4258 Parts & Service 800.887.7145

Phone 800.268.0148

Phone 1.507.455.4100 Fax 1.507.774.8576

www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 01.a. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS INTERIORS BINDER

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

Music Posture Chairs

Music Stands

Conductor’s Equipment

Elementary Products

Teaching Tools

Storage

OnBoard® Transport Carts

Acoustical Shells

Standing Choral Risers

Staging and Seated Risers

Chairs

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Chairs

INTERIORS BINDER

Chairs

NOTA® Standard Music Posture Chair

NOTA® Premier Music Posture Chair

NOTA® conBrio Standard Chair

NOTA® conBrio Premier Chair

Student Music Posture Chair

Musician Music Posture Chair

Symphony Music Posture Chair

Cellist Chair

Sousaphone Chair

String Bassist/ Percussionist Chair

Chair Move & Store Cart

Tablet Arms and Storage Racks

High Density Portable Audience Chairs by Clarin®

Portable Audience Chairs Standard

Portable Audience Chairs Premier

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Inspired by Musicians. Innovative by Design.

800-4WENGER

www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Interiors Binder | 02.a. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Musical inspiration meets leading edge innovation Musicians themselves are the inspiration for the innovative design of the revolutionary Nota® music posture chairs. Every detail has been carefully crafted with the performance, comfort and well-being of the musician in mind. The unique music posture design provides optimal support and flexibility to promote easier breathing and freedom of movement. No other chairs accommodate such a wide variety of seating positions, body types and musical styles. The quality construction and long life of the Nota® chairs deliver unmatched value for your investment. Discover for yourself how Wenger combined musical inspiration and leading edge innovation to create the Nota® music posture chairs.

Nota® Chair

Wenger Music Posture Chair design redefined what a music chair should be by providing the seated musician with the same strong, natural posture as if they were standing. Nota takes that concept to the next level, providing rear and forward seating positions that allow musicians to sit in the manner that best suits their style and instrument. Both the Premier and Standard models feature a narrow convex back that provides lumbar support while still allowing freedom along with range of movement, and a rounded waterfall front that provides better circulation and comfort for a wider range of body sizes. Nota is built to work and look great for the long run.

800-4WENGER

Nota® conBRIO™ Chair

The Nota design enhanced. A cantilever frame provides a stable yet fluid foundation. Add the unique design of the Nota seat and back and you have the first dynamic seating solution specifically designed for music practice and performance. Never before have musicians had the opportunity to fully engage the entire body in their performance like they can in the Nota conBRIO chair. Try one today.

www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

NOTA® MUSIC POSTURE CHAIR NARROW CONVEX BACK

Helps open the rib cage for better diaphragmatic breathing. Provides additional lumbar support, putting the spine in its most stable, natural position. Allows for greater freedom of movement – won’t get in the way of arms or elbows.

POSITION-TRANSITION SEAT

Makes it easy to move from a rear to a forward position. Also allows for a variety of seating positions including forward, back and angled. Enables each musician to play in the position that best suits their style and their particular instrument.

Forward

Back

Angled

ROUNDED WATERFALL FRONT

Promotes better circulation which helps reduce the “fidget factor.” Encourages a natural lumbar curve, even in the forward position, to help reduce fatigue and discomfort. Allows one height of chair to accommodate a wider range of body sizes.

Uniquely designed for optimal performance & com

800-4WENGER Interiors Binder | 02.a. 3 www.wengercorp.com

For complete details, contact your Wenger representative at 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com or visit us at

Inspired per

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

e & comfort

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com red performance from an economic Interiors perspective Binder | 02.a. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

NOTA® conBRIO™ MUSIC POSTURE CHAIR NARROW CONVEX BACK

POSITION-TRANSITION SEAT

Forward

Back

Angled

ROUNDED WATERFALL FRONT

FLEXIBLE FRAME

Promotes a more natural freedom of movement and motion within the hips, trunk and spine which reduces rigid posture and improves circulation eliminating static posture pain. The open front allows the musician to shift, moving their legs into more positions to promote motion and reduce rigidity.

TESTED FOR LONG LIFE Life cycle testing proves the Nota® chairs will provide at least 15-years of reliable, high performance service.

DURABLE FLOOR GLIDES Specially designed Nylon-Zytel floor glides enhance stability and ease of movement.

STANDARD: WEAR-RESISTANT POLYPROPYLENE PREMIER: BREATHABLE HIGH-QUALITY FABRIC High impact material provides extreme durability and attractive appearance for the life of the chair.

DEDICATED SERVICE/FULL WARRANTY Wenger professionals are here to help you make smart, cost effective decisions. Our industry-leading warranty guarantees you either a full refund or replacement without charge.

STURDY WELDED STEELE FRAME NOTA: 14 GAUGE / conBRIO: 12 GAUGE Chairs meets ANSI-BIFMA X5.1-2002 in all applicable tests for structural integrity. STACKABLE DESIGN For compact storage and ease of movement from performance to storage space. Both models can be interstacked on the same cart.

PROPER BODY SUPPORT Music posture design helps the musician mimic the standing posture when seated (the strongest, most natural body position). By promoting a mechanically efficient position, any risk of pain and lasting injury is greatly reduced.

Proper support reduces risk of injury

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information “A chair like the Nota® chair, that allows a musician to sit comfortably and play efficiently and easily, can certainly help musicians maintain their good health.” — Dr. William J. Dawson/President of the Performing Arts Medicine Association; Associate Professor Emeritus of Orthopaedic Surgery/Northwestern University’s Feinberg School of Medicine/Chicago, Illinois “I was very impressed with the Nota® conBRIO™ chair because it gives the flexibility for a musician to move, but also gives the necessary support. I teach a musician’s wellness class where we discuss ergonomics and posture. This chair has everything you want in a performance chair.” — Dr. Chisato Eda Marling/Lecturer in Saxophone/Nazareth College, Rochester, NY/Houghton College/Houghton, NY “I think the Nota® chair is aesthetically pleasing… it is a nice sleek, streamlined chair that gives students a better chance at succeeding than a regular chair. Every time you can give them a tool to develop good habits, the better chance you have for success.” — Thomas V. Fraschillo/Director of Bands/University of Southern Mississippi/Hattiesburg, Mississippi “I loved the Nota® conBRIO™ chair from the first moment I sat in it. With other chairs I have to adapt to fit the chair, but this chair fit me. It definitely provided flexibility and support without any cumbersome limitations to body movement. Your legs can move, your upper body can swivel or sway. I felt more connected to my feet and core muscle groups, which supports proper breathing and better music-making. The cantilever design also gives a lot more room for my legs.” — Dr. Dylan Chmura-Moore/Professor of Music/University of Wisconsin-Oshkosh/Oshkosh, Wisconsin “Good posture is absolutely critical and it is critical not just for wind players but also for string players and for vocalists… for all musicians… the Nota® music posture chair allows for wonderful alignment. It keeps the musician very centered and keeps the spine properly aligned.” — Robert W. Rumbelow/Director of Wind Ensemble Activities/Columbus State University Schwob School of Music/Columbus, Georgia “Once you sit in the Nota® chair, it seems like magic. It seems to naturally align your hips – especially for violin. Even when you are sitting back or forward it puts the body in the right alignment. And it’s just the right height. I love it. I really do!” — Susan Waterbury/Associate Professor, Violin/Ithaca College/Ithaca, New York “The Nota® conBRIO™ chair gives you a sense of buoyancy that a four-legged chair just doesn’t have. I found it very comfortable and think it would be a really good chair for choristers. I like my choral singers to have a sense of dance and lift to their voices because it helps keep the group keep in tune.” — Dr. Kerry Walters/Associate Professor of Music/Bradley University/Peoria, Illinois “It is critical to have postural alignment for musical performance. This chair supports the ability to sit up in a better alignment – better position. With the contoured seat and the back support it offers, you can sit longer with less fatigue and therefore, less ability to slouch.” — Nicholas F. Quarrier, MHS, PT, OCS/Clinical Associate Professor, Department of Physical Therapy/Ithaca College/Ithaca, New York

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Nota® Standard Chair • 0330000 Black finish frame, 11 lbs (5 kg). 0330001 Chrome finish frame, 11 lbs (5 kg). • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available. • Patented design provides two seating zones: "Engaged" (rear) and "Perched" (forward). - The engaged position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle of 97°. - The perched position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle in the range of 96-106°. - A transition area allows users to move seamlessly between zones. Each zone enhances performance by promoting a naturally balanced skeletal shape, reducing muscle strain and enabling increased circulation, freedom of movement, and diaphragmatic breathing. • Narrow convex back provides lumbar support while still allowing for freedom and range of movement. • Wear resistant polypropylene seat and back promote even weight distribution, greater comfort and a lasting appearance. • Seat and back available in three colors: Black, Plum and Blue. • Back is 1/8" (3 mm) thick. • Seat is 9/64" (3.6 mm) thick. • 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) welded round tube frame. • Available in heights of 14.5" (368 mm), 16" (406 mm), 17.5" (445 mm), 19" (483 mm), 20.5" (521 mm). • Rounded waterfall front allows one height of chair to accommodate a wider range of body sizes. • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs. • Chairs stack for compact storage, up to eighteen chairs on a cart; eight without a cart. If chairs are equipped with the Ganging Clamp Accessory, they can be stacked no more than six high. • Specially designed stacking bumpers provide maximum stability and protection when chairs are stacked. • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002. • California Technical Bulletin 133 compliant. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. A*

Transition Area

97°

96-106°

Engaged Seating Zone

D 29-1/8" (740 mm) 30-3/4" (781 mm) 32-1/4" (819 mm) 33-7/8" (860 mm) 35-3/8" (899 mm)

Perched Seating Zone

34¼" (870 mm)

41¼" (1048 mm)

14-1/2" (368 mm) 14-1/2" (368 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19-3/8" (492 mm) 16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm) 19" (483 mm) 20-1/8" (511 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 19" (483 mm) 21" (533 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 21-5/8" (549 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm) 19" (483 mm) 22-1/4" (565 mm) *Dimension "A" measures frame height, not seat height.

Perched Zone

62½" (1589 mm) with 18 chairs

Chair Height

Engaged Zone

¼"

(97

½" 24 mm) 2 2 (6

Move 'N Store Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Accessories Include: Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lbs (13.6 kg). • Stack, move and store up to eighteen Nota Standard Chairs. • 16-gauge steel construction with easy roll casters.

-3/

(45

Universal Folding Tablet Arm m)

Universal Folding Tablet Arm • 0331010 5 lbs (2.3 kg). • Can be set up for either right or left hand configuration. • Choice of laminated surface colors: Graphite, Cherry, Fusion Maple and Solar Oak. • 14" x 11-1/2" (356 x 292 mm) desk surface. • Black polycarbonate desk tray. • 14-gauge support assembly. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached. Book & Music Storage Rack • 190A066 2 lbs (1 kg). • Mounts under chair. • Black powder-coat paint finish for maximum durability. • 3/16" diameter solid steel rod construction. • Can be added at any time. • Maximum storage weight: 30 lbs. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

)

-1/

(29

(3 4"

" (7

)

Tuba Rest • 190A187 3 lbs (1.4 kg). • Thru-bolted frame 16-gauge steel construction supports the full weight of the tuba. • Height and depth adjustable. • Vinyl protective coating. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached. Sousaphone Holder • 190A184 11 lbs (5 kg). • 14-gauge steel support frame and 16-gauge steel uprights. • Supports and helps balance the sousaphone. Can be used for storage. • Adjustable height. • Vinyl protective coating. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

Sousaphone Holder

Book & Music Storage Rack

Ganging Clamps • 190A059. • Molded polycarbonate. • Used to connect chairs together.

Tuba Rest

Dust Cover • 054D500. • Vinyl coated polypropylene. • For use with chairs stacked on cart.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 8

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Nota® Premier Chair

Engaged Seating Zone

Perched Seating Zone

38-1 B

Move 'N Store Cart

96-106°

/4" ( 972 mm )

2" ) -1/ 24 mm 2 (62

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 9

55" (1397 mm) with twelve chairs

97°

34-1/4" (870 mm)

Perched Zone

41" (1041 mm)

29-1/8" (752 mm) 30-3/4" (781 mm) 32-1/4" (819 mm) 33-7/8" (860 mm) 35-3/8" (899 mm)

58-3/4" (1492 mm)

Engaged Zone

Transition Area

• 0320000 Black finish frame, 12 lbs (5.4 kg). 0320001 Chrome finish frame, 12 lbs (5.4 kg). • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available. • Patented design provides two seating zones: "Engaged" (rear) and "Perched" (forward). - The engaged position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle of 97°. - The perched position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle in the range of 96-106°. - A transition area allows users to move seamlessly between zones. Each zone enhances performance by promoting a naturally balanced skeletal shape, reducing muscle strain and enabling increased circulation, freedom of movement, and diaphragmatic breathing. • Narrow convex back provides lumbar support while still allowing for freedom and range of movement. • Seat and back are rugged polypropylene with 1/2" (13 mm) polyfoam seat cushioning and 1/4" (6 mm) polyfoam back cushioning. • Seat and back are covered with 100% polypropylene fabric and available in six colors: Black, Plum, Red, Green, Grey and Blue. • Fabric is treated with BLOCKaide™ Stain Repellant. • 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) welded round tube frame. • Available in heights of 14-1/2" (368 mm), 16" (406 mm), 17-1/2" (445 mm), 19" (483 mm), 20-1/2" (521 mm). • Rounded waterfall front allows one height of chair to accommodate a wider range of body sizes. • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs. • Chairs stack for compact storage, up to twelve chairs on a cart; six without a cart. If chairs are equipped with the Ganging Clamp Accessory, they can be stacked no more than five high. • Specially designed stacking bumpers provide maximum stability and protection when chairs are stacked. • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002 • California Technical Bulletin 117 compliant. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. Chair Height A* B C D

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information Accessories Include: Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lbs (13.6 kg). • Stack, move and store up to 12 Nota Premier Chairs. • 16-gauge steel construction with easy roll casters.

-3/

(45

Universal Folding Tablet Arm 1m

-1/

5 " (3

(29

" (7

)

Sousaphone Holder

Book & Music Storage Rack

Ganging Clamps • 190A059. • Molded polycarbonate. • Used to connect chairs together.

Tuba Rest

Dust Cover • 054D500. • Vinyl coated polypropylene. • For use with chairs stacked on cart.

2017-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Nota® conBRIO® Standard Chair

Transition Area

• 0350000 Black finish frame, 14.2 lb (6.4 kg) 0350001 Chrome finish frame, 14.2 lb (6.4 kg) • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available • Cantilever frame allows chair to respond to the musician’s movement, enabling the entire body to be engaged in the musical performance • Patented design provides two seating zones: “Engaged” (rear) and “Perched” (forward) - The engaged position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle of 97° - The perched position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle in the range of 96-106° - A transition area allows users to move seamlessly between zones Each zone enhances performance by promoting a naturally balanced skeletal shape, reducing muscle strain and enabling increased circulation, freedom of movement,and diaphragmatic breathing • Narrow convex back provides lumbar support while still allowing for freedom and range of movement • Wear resistant polypropylene seat and back promote even weight distribution, greater comfort and a lasting appearance • Seat and back available in three colors: Black, Plum and Blue • Back is 1/8” (3 mm) thick • Seat is 9/64” (3.6 mm) thick Engaged Zone • 12-gauge welded round high strength low alloy steel frame Perched Zone • Black powder-coat paint finish for maximum durability. Chrome finish is also available • Available in heights of 14-1/2” (368 mm), 16” (406 mm), 17-1/2” (445 mm), 19” (483 mm) and 20-1/2” (521 mm) • Rounded waterfall front allows one height of chair to accommodate a wider range of body sizes. Multiple standard height frames available to accommodate all musicians 97° 96-106° • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs • Chairs stack for compact storage, up to eighteen chairs on a cart; eight without a cart Note: When multiple heights of chairs are stacked on the same cart, always start with the tallest chairs • Specially designed stacking bumpers provide maximum stability and protection when chairs are stacked • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002 • California Technical Bulletin 133 compliant • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty Chair Height

14-1/2" (368 mm) 14-1/2" (368 mm) 16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm)

19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (48 mm)

21" (533 mm) 21" (533 mm) 21-3/4" (552 mm) 21-3/4" (552 mm) 22" (559 mm)

29-3/8" (746 mm) 30-7/8" (784 mm) 32-3/8" (822 mm) 33-7/8" (860 mm) 35-3/8" (899 mm)

Engaged Seating Zone

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 11

Perched Seating Zone

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information Accessories Include: Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lb (13.6 kg) • Stack, move and store up to eighteen Nota conBRIO Standard Chairs • 16-gauge steel construction with easy roll casters

33-1/4" (845 mm)

66" (1676 mm) with 18 chairs

41" (1041 mm)

Dust Cover • 054D500 • Vinyl coated polypropylene • For use with chairs stacked on cart

-1/

Move 'N Store Cart

(97

2" ) -1/ 24 mm 2 2 (6

2019-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Nota® conBRIO® Premier Chair Perched Zone

Transition Area

• 0340000 Black finish frame, 15.4 lb (7 kg) 0340001 Chrome finish frame, 15.4 lb (7 kg) • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available • Cantilever frame allows chair to respond to the musician’s movement, Engaged Zone enabling the entire body to be engaged in the musical performance • Patented design provides two seating zones: “Engaged” (rear) and “Perched” (forward) - The engaged position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle of 97° - The perched position allows the occupant to sit with a thigh to back angle in the range of 96-106° - A transition area allows users to move seamlessly between zones 97° Each zone enhances performance by promoting a naturally balanced skeletal shape, reducing muscle strain and enabling increased circulation, freedom of movement, and diaphragmatic breathing • Narrow convex back provides lumbar support while still allowing for freedom and range of movement • Seat and back are rugged polypropylene with 1/2” (13 mm) polyfoam seat cushioning and 1/4” (6 mm) polyfoam back cushioning • Seat and back are covered with 100% polypropylene fabric and available in six colors: Black, Plum, Red, Green, Grey and Blue • Fabric is treated with BLOCKaide™ Stain Repellant • 12-gauge welded round high strength low alloy steel frame • Black powder-coat paint finish for maximum durability Chrome finish is also available • Available in heights of 14-1/2” (368 mm), 16” (406 mm), 17-1/2” (445 mm), 19” (483 mm), 20-1/2” (521 mm) • Rounded waterfall front allows one height of chair to accommodate a wider range of body sizes. Multiple standard height frames available to accommodate all musicians • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002 • California Technical Bulletin 117 compliant • Chairs stack for compact storage, up to twelve chairs on a cart; six without a cart Note: When multiple heights of chairs are stacked on the same cart, always start with the tallest chairs • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty Chair Height A B C D 14-1/2" (368 mm) 14-1/2" (368 mm) 16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 19" (483 mm) 19" (483 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm) 20-1/2" (521 mm)

19" (483 mm) 21" (533 mm) 19" (483 mm) 21" (533 mm) 19" (483 mm) 21-3/4" (553 mm) 19" (483 mm) 21-3/4" (553 mm) 19" (483 mm) 22" (559 mm)

29-3/8" (746 mm) 30-7/8" (784 mm) 32-3/8" (822 mm) 33-7/8" (860 mm) 35-3/8" (899 mm)

Engaged Seating Zone

96-106°

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 13

Perched Seating Zone

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Accessories Include: Application Information Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lb (13.6 kg) • Stack, move and store up to twelve Nota conBRIO Premier Chairs • 16-gauge steel construction with easy roll casters

-1/

Move 'N Store Cart

(97

55" (1397 mm) with twelve chairs

34-1/4" (870 mm)

41" (1041 mm)

58-3/4" (149 2mm)

Dust Cover • 054D500 • Vinyl coated polypropylene • For use with chairs stacked on cart

2" ) -1/ 24 mm 2 (62

2019-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 14

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Color Sample Card

Nota® Standard Chairs and Bravo™ Music Stand

Available Colors

Black

Blue

Plum

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 15

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Color Sample Card

Nota® Standard Chairs and Bravo™ Music Stand

Product Images

Nota® conBRIO™ Standard Chair

Nota® Standard Chair

Bravo™ Stand

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800-836-1885 Worldwide 1.315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 1.315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 16

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

Nota® Universal Folding Tablet Arm

Color Sample Card Laminate Color

Graphite

Cherry

Fusion Maple

Solar Oak

Black

Edge Banding Support Tube Assembly

Shown with both Cherry and Fusion Maple Laminates Edge Banding and Support Tube Assemlies are Black.

WENGER CORPORATION 555 Park Drive, PO Box 448 Owatonna, MN 55060-0448 Phone 800.4WENGER (493-6437) Fax 507.455.4258 Parts & Service 800.887.7145

WENGER CORPORATION CANADA OFFICE Phone 800.268.0148

WORLDWIDE Phone 1.507.455.4100 Fax 1.507.774.8576

WEB SITE www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 17

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

STUDENT CHAIR

The most helpful music chair in history. The classic Wenger Student Chair has helped support correct posture in more music education facilities than any other chair. Like every Wenger Posture Chair, our Student Chair model puts musicians in the ideal performing position, all the while reducing discomfort so students can focus on technique. Durable and good-looking, Wenger Student Chairs also bring a polished, uniform appearance to your program.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 18

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

STUDENT CHAIR WENGER’S POSTURE CHAIR DESIGN DUPLICATES THE BENEFITS OF STANDING POSTURE IN A SEATED POSITION. The problem with common chairs. In a standing position, your rib cage is expanded for maximum breath intake. Your diaphragm is unconstricted for greater breath support. Your hips are rotated forward, allowing your back to follow its natural, supportive lumbar curve. The result is the ideal posture for singing or playing an instrument. But sit in any nonposture chair and your body’s immediate reaction is to slouch. When you sit back your spine is forced out of its natural supportive position. This forces your body down, lowering your rib cage and constricting your diaphragm. To compensate for this discomfort and lack of support, you move to the edge of the seat. You’ll continue this cycle as long as you’re seated, bringing on rapid fatigue and making it difficult to focus on technique. The Wenger Solution: Posture Chairs Sit in a Wenger Student Chair, one of our exclusive Posture Chair models, and you immediately notice how the chair’s contours help duplicate the body’s natural standing position. Your hips are slightly forward, putting your spine in its strongest, most naturally comfortable position. Your rib cage is raised as though you were standing, giving your diaphragm unobstructed movement. Your body is held firm, but comfortable. It’s difficult to slouch and easy to concentrate on mechanics and performance.

Wear-resistant polypropylene back wraps around chair frame for a finished, professional look.

Move & Store Cart

Folding Tablet Arm and Book/Music Storage Rack

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

COLORS FRAME Black

Sousaphone Holder

• Posture Chair design • Extra-strong, square tube framing for durability and longer life • Wear-resistant polypropylene seat and back in black promote even weight distribution, greater comfort and a lasting appearance • Large seat and back give musicians proper support and wider range of movement • Three height choices – 16", 171/2" or 181/2" (406, 445 or 470 mm) – support a wide range of students Note: Seat heights are measured from front of seat to floor • Chair glides provide increased durability and stability • Choice of two frame finishes: Black or Chrome • 5-Year warranty 0930000 Student Chair (14 lb)(6.4 kg) PURCHASE ONLINE!

STUDENT CHAIR SEAT/BACK Chrome

Tuba Rest

Black

Dust Cover

Ganging Clamps

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: 127A261 Move & Store Cart, (30 lb) (13.6 kg) Stack, move and store up to 18 Student Chairs Folding Tablet Arm Folds behind chair when not in use 0939020 Right-Hand Folding Tablet Arm (8 lb, 8 oz) (4 kg) 0939021 Left-Hand Folding Tablet Arm (8 lb, 8 oz) (4 kg) 054L286 Under-Chair Book Rack, (2 lb) (.9 kg) 054B159 Sousaphone Holder, (11 lb) (5 kg) 106C001 Student Chair and Sousaphone Holder, (25 lb) (11.3 kg) 054A160 Tuba Rest, (3 lb, 7 oz) (1.6 kg) Adjustable, vinyl-clad support stand helps student properly position the tuba and focus on technique 054D500 Posture Chairs Dust Cover 190A059 Ganging Clamps Used to connect chairs together © 2019 Wenger Corporation USA/7-19/200/W/LT0027G

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 19

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Student Chair • 0930000 Black finish frame,14 lbs (6.4 kg). 0930001 Chrome finish frame,14 lbs (6.4 kg). • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available • Black high impact 1/8" (3 mm) thick textured polypropylene seat and back. • Music posture design, with seat pan rise of 4-1/2° forward of pelvic area that creates a thigh to backrest angle of 97°, allowing musicians to sit in a posture equivalent to standing, thus freeing the diaphragm. • 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube frame, and 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube rear crossmember designed and welded to give support around entire outer edge of both seat and back. • Available in heights of 15-1/2" (394 mm), 16" (406 mm), 17" (432 mm), 17-1/2" (445 mm), 18-1/2" (470 mm) and 19-1/2" (495 mm). • Chairs stack for compact storage, up to 18 chairs on a cart; 8 chairs without a cart. If chairs are equipped with the Ganging Clamp Accessory, they can be stacked no more than 4 high. • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs. • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002. • California Technical Bulletin 133 compliant. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

Chair Height

15-1/2" (394 mm) 15-1/2" (394 mm) 21-1/4" (540 mm) 16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm) 21-1/2" (546 mm) 17" (432 mm) 17" (432 mm) 21-15/16" (557 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 22" (559 mm) 18-1/2" (470 mm) 18-1/2" (470 mm) 22-5/8 (575 mm) 19-1/2" (495 mm) 19-1/2" (495 mm) 23" (584 mm) *Dimension "A" measures frame height, not seat height.

19-3/4" (502 mm) 19-3/4" (502 mm) 19-7/8 (505 mm) 19-7/8 (505 mm) 19-15/16" (506 mm) 20" (508 mm)

31-3/8" (797 mm) 31-7/8" (810 mm) 32-7/8 (835 mm) 33-1/4" (845 mm) 34-1/4" (870 mm) 35-1/4" (895 mm)

97°

Available accessories listed on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 20

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information Accessories Include: Folding Tablet Arm • Right-hand: 0939014 8.5 lbs (3.9 kg) Left-hand: 0939015 8.5 lbs (3.9 kg). • Pebble laminate surface, 13-3/4" x 17" (349 x 432 mm). • 14-gauge support assembly with Black powder-coat paint finish. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

15-1/2

mm)

Folding Tablet Arm

)

" (394

Tuba Rest • 054A160 3.5 lbs (1.6 kg). • Thru-bolted 16-gauge steel frame construction supports the full weight of the tuba. • Height and depth adjustable. • Vinyl protective coating. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

30-3

/4"

(781

-3

432

mm)

17" (

Book/Music Storage Rack • Under-chair: 054L286 2 lbs (0.9 kg). • 3/16"(4.8 mm) diameter solid steel rod construction. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

)

Sousaphone Holder • 054B159 11 lbs (5 kg). • 14-gauge steel support frame and 16-gauge steel uprights. • Supports and helps balance the sousaphone. Can be used for storage. • Adjustable height. • Vinyl protective coating. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

Tuba Rest

Move 'N Store Cart

42" (1067 mm)

Dust Cover • 054D500. • Vinyl coated polypropylene. • For use with chairs stacked on cart.

Sousaphone Holder

65" (1651 mm) with 18 chairs

Ganging Clamps • 190A059. • Molded polycarbonate. • Used to connect chairs together.

65-1/2" (1664 mm) with 18 chairs

Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lbs (13.6 kg). • Stack, move and store up to eighteen Student Chairs. • 16-gauge steel construction with easy-roll casters.

38-1/4

" (972

mm)

24-1/2" m) (622 m

2017-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 21

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

MUSICIAN CHAIR

Perfect posture with added comfort. Helping musicians maintain posture is an endless task. And, rather than help you succeed, most chairs promote slouching. But Wengerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Posture Chair design actually duplicates the benefits of standing posture in a seated position. The Wenger Musician Chair offers advanced students and serious musicians padded comfort for grueling practice and performance schedules. And the attractive appearance adds a refined look on any stage or rehearsal room.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 22

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information

MUSICIAN CHAIR Wenger’s Posture Chair design. The problem with common chairs. In a standing position, your rib cage is expanded for maximum breath intake. Your diaphragm is unconstricted for greater breath support. Your hips are rotated forward, allowing your back to follow its natural, supportive lumbar curve. The result is the ideal posture for singing or playing an instrument.

Tuba Rest

Sousaphone Holder

Folding Tablet Arm and Book/Music Storage Rack

Dust Cover

Move & Store Cart

Ganging Clamps

But sit in any nonposture chair and your body’s immediate reaction is to slouch. When you sit back your spine is forced out of its natural supportive position. This forces your body down, lowering your rib cage and constricting your diaphragm. To compensate for this discomfort and lack of support, you move to the edge of the seat. You’ll continue this cycle as long as you’re seated, bringing on rapid fatigue and making it difficult to focus on technique. The Wenger Solution: Posture Chairs Sit in a Wenger Musician Chair, one of our exclusive Posture Chair models, and you immediately notice how the chair’s contours help duplicate the body’s natural standing position. Your hips are slightly forward, putting your spine in its strongest, most naturally comfortable position. Your rib cage is raised as though you were standing, giving your diaphragm unobstructed movement. Your body is held firm, but comfortable. It’s difficult to slouch and easy to concentrate on mechanics and performance.

FRAME

Covered with durable upholstery, the 2" (51 mm) foam seat cushioning provides comfort for long practice and performance sessions.

MUSICIAN CHAIR UPHOLSTERY Black

Chrome

Black

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Red

• Posture Chair design promotes easier breathing. • 2" (51 mm) seat cushioning for extra comfort during extended practices and performances. • Durable framing and fabrics. • Three height choices — 16", 171/2" or 181/2" (406, 445 or 470 mm) — support a wide range of musicians. Note: Seat heights are measured from front of seat to floor. • Attractive upholstery and frame finish choices let you coordinate with any color scheme. • Colors also match Wenger Bravo Music Stands and other Wenger products. • Choice of two frame finishes: Black or Chrome. • Six upholstery colors available: Black, Red, Grey, Plum, Green and Blue. • Five year warranty. • Color samples available upon request. 0920000

Musician Chair (15 lbs., 10 oz.) (7.1 kg)

Grey

Plum

Green

Blue

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: 127A261 Move & Store Cart (30 lb) (13.6 kg) 054D500 Dust Cover Folding Tablet Arm Folds behind chair when not in use 0939020 Right-Hand Folding Tablet Arm (8 lb, 8 oz) (3.9 kg) 0939021 Left-Hand Folding Tablet Arm (8 lb, 8 oz) (3.9 kg) 054L286

Under-Chair Book Rack (2 lb) (0.9 kg)

054B159

Sousaphone Holder (11 lb) (5 kg)

054A160

Tuba Rest (3 lb, 7 oz) (1.6 kg)

190A059

Ganging Clamps

PURCHASE ONLINE!

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 23

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Musician Chair • 0920000 Black finish frame, 15 lbs, 10 oz (7.1 kg). 0920001 Chrome finish frame, 15 lbs, 10 oz (7.1 kg). • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available. • Seat and back are rugged polypropylene and support 2" (51 mm) polyfoam seat cushioning and 1/2" (13 mm) polyfoam back cushioning. • Seat and back are covered with 100% polypropylene fabric, available in six colors: Black, Green, Blue, Plum, Red or Grey. • Fabric is treated with BLOCKaide™ Stain Repellant. • Music posture design, with seat pan rise of 4-1/2° forward of pelvic area that creates a thigh to backrest angle of 97°, allowing musicians to sit in a posture equivalent to standing, thus freeing the diaphragm. • Available in heights of 15-1/2" (394 mm), 16" (406 mm), 17" (432 mm), 17-1/2" (445 mm), 18-1/2" (470 mm) and 19-1/2" (495 mm). • 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube frame, and 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube rear crossmember designed and welded to give support around entire outer edge of both seat and back. • Stacks for compact storage, up to ten chairs on a cart; eight chairs without a cart. If chairs are equipped with the Ganging Clamp Accessory, they can be stacked no more than five high. • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs. • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002. • California Technical Bulletin 117 compliant. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. Chair Height

15-1/2" (394 mm) 15-1/2" (394 mm) 21-1/4" (540 mm) 19-3/4" (502 mm) 31-3/4" (807 mm) 16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm) 21-1/2" (546 mm) 19-3/4" (502 mm) 32" (813 mm) 17" (432 mm) 17" (432 mm) 21-15/16" (557 mm) 19-7/8" (505 mm) 33-1/4" (845 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 17-1/2" (445 mm) 18-1/2" (470 mm) 18-1/2" (470 mm)

22" (559 mm)

19-7/8" (505 mm) 33-3/4" (857 mm)

22-5/8" (575 mm) 19-15/16" (506 mm) 34-3/4" (883 mm)

19-1/2" (495 mm) 19-1/2" (495 mm) 23" (584 mm) *Dimension "A" measures frame height, not seat height.

20" (508 mm)

35-3/4" (908 mm)

97°

Available accessories listed on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 24

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information Accessories Include: Folding Tablet Arm • Right-hand: 0939014 8-1/2 lbs (3.9 kg) Left-hand: 0939015 8-1/2 lbs (3.9 kg). • Pebble laminate surface, 13-3/4" x 17" (349 x 432 mm). • 14-gauge support assembly with Black powder-coat paint finish. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

15" (3

Folding Tablet Arm

81 mm

)

Tuba Rest • 054A160 3-1/2 lbs (1.6 kg). • Thru-bolted 16-gauge steel frame construction supports the full weight of the tuba. • Height and depth adjustable. • Vinyl protective coating. • Can be added at any time. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

28-1

/4"

(718

mm)

-3

432

17" (

Book/Music Storage Rack • Under-chair: 054L286 2 lbs (0.9 kg). • 3/16" (4.8 mm) diameter solid steel rod construction. • Chairs cannot be stacked with this accessory attached.

)

Tuba Rest

Move 'N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lbs (13.6 kg). • Stack, move and store up to ten Musician Chairs. • 16-gauge steel construction with easy-roll casters. Move 'N Store Cart

Ganging Clamps • 190A059. • Molded polycarbonate. • Used to connect chairs together.

Sousaphone Holder

42" (1067 mm)

57" (1448 mm) with ten chairs

Dust Cover • 054D500. • Vinyl coated polypropylene. • For use with chairs stacked on cart.

38-1/4

" (972

mm)

24-1/2" m) (622 m

2017-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 25

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Symphony Chair • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

0970000 21 lb (9.5 kg) Seat is blow-molded polyethylene with contoured, high-density foam pad Back is rugged polypropylene with molded foam pad Seat and back are covered with high quality 100% nylon fabric Fabric is treated with BLOCKaide™ Stain Repellant Adjustable seat angle control Music posture design, with seat pan rise of 4-1/2° above thigh area, and a thigh to backrest angle of 97° allowing musicians to sit in a posture equivalent to standing, minimizing back problems 14-gauge steel tubing for strength Black upholstery and frame Available in heights of 18-1/2” (470 mm) and 19-1/2” (495 mm), with 1/4” (6 mm) seat angle adjustment Chairs stack for compact storage, up to six chairs on a cart; four chairs without a cart Black polypropylene leg guide California Technical Bulletin 117 compliant Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative Five-year warranty Patented Chair Height

18-1/2" (470 mm) 33-1/2" (851 mm) 23-7/8" (605 mm) 20-1/4" (514 mm) 18-1/2" (470 mm) 19-1/2" (495 mm) 34-1/4" (870 mm) 24-3/8" (619 mm)

21" (533 mm)

19-1/2" (495 mm)

Available accessories listed on next page.

B C

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 26

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information Accessories Include: Adjustable Lumbar Pad • 0979131 1 lb (0.5 kg) • Pad is 1-1/2" (38 mm) thick and covered with the same black fabric as the chair • Attached by hook and loop straps Adjustable Lumbar Pad

Adjustable Seat Angle Control

Ganging Clamp • 112A093 • Extruded ABS clamp allows chairs to be ganged together

Move 'N Store Cart

30" (76

2 mm)

2 (6 5-1 50 /2 m " m )

Dust Cover • 054D500 • Vinyl coated polypropylene • For use with chairs stacked on cart

59" (1499 mm) with six chairs

Move 'N Store Cart • 112A094 29 lb (13 kg) • Stack, move and store up to six Symphony Chairs • 14-gauge steel construction with four easy-roll swivel casters • One-year warranty

2019-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 27

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Chairs

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Cellist Chair

41" (1042 mm)

66-1/2" (1689 mm) with ten chairs

• 0940000 Black finish frame, 18 lbs (8.2 kg). 0940001 Chrome finish frame, 18 lbs (8.2 kg). • Seat and back are covered with 100% polypropylene fabric, available in six colors: Black, Green, Blue, Plum, Red, Grey. • Black powder-coat paint finish frame for maximum durability. Chrome finish frame is also available. Move ’N Store Cart • Seat is rugged ABS material with 2" (51 mm) polyfoam cushioning. Back has 1-3/4" (44 mm) polyfoam back cushioning over 5/16" (8 mm) wood. • Fabric is treated with BLOCKaide™ Stain Repellant. • Seat is tilted forward 1.3° to provide the ideal lean and balance requirements of a cellist. • Forward-positioned back stabilizes and supports the cellist posture. • 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube frame, designed and welded to give support around entire outer edge of both seat and back. • Available in standard heights of 18-1/2" (470 mm) and 19-1/2" (495 mm). • Stacks for compact storage, up to ten chairs on a cart; eight without a cart. • Durable, specially designed floor glides provide stability when seated and ease of movement when arranging chairs. • California Technical Bulletin 117 compliant. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. Move ‘N Store Cart • 127A261 30 lbs (14 kg). • Stack, move and store up to ten Cellist chairs. • 16-gauge steel construction with easy-roll casters. Dust Cover • 054D500. • Vinyl Coated Polypropylene. • For use with chairs stacked on cart. Chair Height

38-1/4

" (972

mm)

24-1/2" m) (623 m

18-1/2" (470 mm) 19-1/4" (489 mm) 19-1/4" (489 mm) 19-1/4" (489 mm) 35-9/32" (896 mm) 19-1/2" (495 mm) 20-1/4" (514 mm) 19-5/8" (599 mm) 19-1/4" (489 mm) 36-9/32" (922 mm)

96°

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.a. 28

2017-12

Music Stands INTERIORS BINDER

Music Stands

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Music Stands

Bravo™ Music Stand

Roughneck™ Music Stand

Classic 50® Music Stand

Preface® Music Stand

Gig Stand® Folding Music Stand

Small Music Stand Move & Store Carts

Large Music Stand Move & Store Carts

Music Stand Lights

Acoustic Shield

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

BRAVO™ MUSIC STAND

Rethinking a music room icon. No one calls them music wobblers or music leaners; we call them music stands. And shouldn’t your music stands do just that — stand? We thought so, and that’s why we took a fresh look at this music facility icon and re-designed the Bravo Music Stand. Music stands dot the landscape of every music facility. They are among the most prominent pieces of equipment so it’s important that they look good and stand up straight. On a daily basis they get used and over-used, they get carried around, knocked around and driven around. They have to be built tough. And, since a typical music facility needs quite a few of them, they end up being a significant investment. You shouldn’t have to repair, repaint or replace them after only a few years of use. If you want a better music stand, there’s no need to look past the Bravo Music Stand. It’s more durable, more functional, more attractive and a better investment.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

BRAVO™ MUSIC STAND Right out of the box, every music stand looks nice and is performance-ready. But once they’re put into use, it doesn’t take too much time for the typical metal music stand to look a little tired. In fact, if you have metal music stands in your facility now, go take a look at them. How many are scratched, dented, bent, wobbly or leaning: How many have height adjustments that are too stiff or too loose? How many have desks that won’t hold the angle? Any music teacher will tell you about tightening bolts on wobbly stands or picking through them before a concert to find the ones with the fewest dents and scratches. Ask a musician what it’s like trying to get through a performance with a stand that is slowly sinking, or with a desk that keeps tilting forward. When it comes time to invest in music stands, the Bravo Music Stand gives you a lot more for your money. In fact you’ll probably have to replace other music stands long before a Bravo retires.

COLORS FRAME Black

Brass spring height adjustment moves and stays put with a single, smooth motion.

Chrome

Black

Blue

Plum

Welded construction stands straight.

Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 18 Bravo Stands.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• Polycarbonate desk won’t chip or scratch. • Accessory shelf for assorted items. • Color selection matches Nota® Chairs and other Wenger products. • Stylized 203/8" x 131/2" (518 x 343 mm) desk surface. • Unique composite spring mechanism with exceptional holding ability. • 18 gauge upright post for added strength and stability. • Desk adjusts from 251/2" to 461/2" (648 to 1181 mm), desk lip to floor. • 5- year warranty. • Assembly required. 1020000 Bravo Stand (7.5 lbs.) (3.4 kg) PURCHASE ONLINE!

STAND DESK

Move music stands from rehearsal room to performance area and back again with ease.

Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 9 Bravo Stands.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: • MUSIC STAND MOVE & STORE CARTS 039C202 Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 38 lbs (17.2 kg) 039D201 Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 21 lbs (9.5 kg) • ELECTRIC MUSIC STAND LIGHT Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers’ stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (.4 kg) • LED MUSIC STAND LIGHTS Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated or AC adapter stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (.29 kg) • TABLET ACCESSORIES 040A142 Hands-Free Page Turner, .55 lbs (.24 kg) 040A140 Side-Mount Extension, .45 lbs (.20 kg) Accepts Universal Tablet Mount, Single and other popular mic threaded (5/8" – 27) devices 040A154 Universal Tablet Mount, Single, 15 oz (.42 kg) Attaches to any stand shaft using Wenger’s Side Mount Extension Bar or attaches to standard mic threaded (5/8" – 27) stands and mounts.

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Bravo™ Music Stand • 1020000 7 lbs (3.1 kg). • Polycarbonate desk with accessory shelf available in Blue, Plum or Black. • Base and tube are Black powder-coat paint finish for maximum durability. Chrome finish is also available. • 20-3/8" x 13-1/2" (518 x 343 mm) desk with 19" x 2-1/2" (483 x 64 mm) accessory shelf. • 18-gauge upright post for added strength and stability. • Unique composite spring mechanism with premium holding ability adjusts height from 22-1/2" to 46-1/2" (572 to 1181 mm) (desk lip to floor). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

Accessories Electric Music Stand Light Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers' stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (0.4 kg) LED Music Stand Lights Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology, so no bulbs to replace. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (0.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (0.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (0.29 kg)

20-3/8" (518 mm) 18-1/4" (464 mm)

16-3/4" (426 mm) 13-1/2" (343 mm)

2-1

/2"

(64

)

46-1/2" (1181 mm) Max.

22-1/2" (572 mm) Min.

1(44 3/4" .5 m m)

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information Accessories (continued) Hands-Free Page Turner A rugged hands-free device for turning the pages on your digital sheet music. Simple setup and operation make this a great solution for musicians who need a hand. 040A142, 0.55 lbs (0.24 kg) - Tap the foot switches to turn the pages on your digital sheet music forward or backward. - No messy cables, connects wirelessly to tablets or computers up to 60' (18,288 mm) away using secure Bluetooth technology. - Internal rechargeable battery, up to 100 hours between charges. - Nearly indestructible, made of same material as bullet-proof glass. Universal Tablet Mount, Single The perfect holder for most models of tablets. Clipping your tablet in place is easy and secure. No more resting your tablet on a stand, amp, floor, etc. 040A154, 15 oz (0.42 kg) - Attaches to a standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand or any music stand shaft using our Side Mount Extension. Side-Mount Extension Mount your tablet to the shaft of your music stand or mic stand. 040A140, 0.45 lbs (0.20 kg) - Use your tablet with a traditional music stand or mic stand. - Heavy duty steel extension bracket fits shafts up to 1" (25 mm) in diameter. - Accepts our Universal Tablet Mount and other standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand devices. - 8" (203 mm) long with 6.25" (159 mm) extension from the shaft. Large Stand Move and Store Cart 039C202, 38 lbs (17.2 kg). - Holds eighteen Bravo Stands. - Large center pivot wheels for maneuverability. - Loads and unloads from both ends. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22.22 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) wheels and 5" (127 mm) heavy-duty casters. - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 68" (699 x 1727 mm) floor space. Allow 64-1/2" (1638 mm) for height with Bravo Stands. Small Stand Move and Store Cart 039D201, 21 lbs (9.5 kg). - Holds nine Bravo Stands. - Two-wheel cart design allows transport up and down stairs. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22.22 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) heavy-duty wheels. - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 36" (699 x 914 mm) floor space. Allow 64-1/2" (1638 mm) for height with Bravo Stands.

Large Move and Store Cart

Hands-Free Page Turner

Side-Mount Extension

Universal Tablet Mount

Small Move and Store Cart

2017-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

Color Sample Card

Nota® Standard Chairs and Bravo™ Music Stand

Available Colors

Black

Blue

Plum

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

Color Sample Card

Nota® Standard Chairs and Bravo™ Music Stand

Product Images

Nota® conBRIO™ Standard Chair

Nota® Standard Chair

Bravo™ Stand

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800-836-1885 Worldwide 1.315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 1.315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

ROUGHNECK™ MUSIC STAND

The all-steel stand that’s built to last. Because you’ve spent hours practicing, your performance shouldn’t be hampered by a music stand that doesn’t perform. Wenger builds sturdy stands that won’t shake, wobble, tilt or slip. Wenger RoughNeck Stands have a solid welded base that won’t lean or loosen. Wenger’s trigger lock height-adjustment mechanism allows smooth, easy adjusting action and then holds tight! And Wenger guarantees their music stands for a full five years. So don’t put up with music stands that keep letting you down. Insist on RoughNeck, and get a superior performance every time.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

ROUGHNECK™ MUSIC STAND The RoughNeck desk is made of tough 22-gauge steel. Finished rolled steel edges reinforce the desk to withstand bending, and are less likely to nick precious instruments or snag clothing. And the desk easily accommodates full-sized scores. The base and tube are made of steel for durability. The finish of the desk, base and tube is an extra-durable, textured, black powder-coat, which looks fresh far longer than metal enamels. The trigger lock height adjustment mechanism goes up easily and stays up.

Bolt-through desk attachment Trigger lock keeps stand in position, even if you have a tendency to overload your stands; holds 30 lbs without releasing. Wobble-free base attachment

Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 10 RoughNeck Stands.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• 22-gauge steel desk with rolled edges • Solid welded base • Wobble free base attachment and boltthrough desk attachment • Durable black powder coat finish • Desk: 20" x 121/2" (508 x 318 mm) • Trigger lock height adjustment mechanism adjusts height from 271/4" to 433/8" (692 to 1102 mm) (desk lip to floor) • 5- year warranty • Some assembly required 038A001

RoughNeck Music Stand, 9 lbs (4 kg)

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 20 RoughNeck Stands.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: • MUSIC STAND MOVE & STORE CARTS 039C202 Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 38 lbs (17.2 kg) 039D201 Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 21 lbs (9.5 kg) • ELECTRIC MUSIC STAND LIGHT Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers’ stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz (.4 kg) • LED MUSIC STAND LIGHTS Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated or AC adapter stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (.29 kg) • TABLET ACCESSORIES 040A142 Hands-Free Page Turner, .55 lbs (.24 kg) 040A140 Side-Mount Extension, .45 lbs (.20 kg) Accepts Universal Tablet Mount, Single and other popular mic threaded (5/8" – 27) devices 040A154 Universal Tablet Mount, Single, 15 oz (.42 kg) Attaches to any stand shaft using Wenger’s Side Mount Extension Bar or attaches to standard mic threaded (5/8" – 27) stands and mounts. © 2019 Wenger Corporation USA/7-19/200/W/LT0007H

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

RoughNeck™ Music Stand • • • • • • • • •

038A001 8.3 lb (3.7 kg). 22-gauge steel desk with rolled edges for instrument protection and reinforcement. Trigger lock height adjustment mechanism adjusts height from 27" to 43-3/8" (686 to 1102 mm) (desk lip to floor). Wobble-free base attachment. Bolt-through desk attachment. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. 20" x 12-1/2" (508 x 318 mm) desk. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

Accessories Electric Music Stand Light Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers' stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (0.4 kg) LED Music Stand Lights Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology, so no bulb to replace. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (0.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (0.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (0.29 kg)

20" (508 mm)

12-1/2" (318 mm)

27" (686 mm) Min.

Handle Release Adjustment Mechanism

43-3/8" (1102 mm) Max.

Bolt-through Attached Pivoting Desk

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information Accessories (continued) Hands-Free Page Turner A rugged hands-free device for turning the pages on your digital sheet music. Simple setup and operation make this a great solution for musicians who need a hand. 040A142, 0.55 lb (0.24 kg) - Tap the foot switches to turn the pages on your digital sheet music forward or backward. - No messy cables, connects wirelessly to tablets or computers up to 60' (18 m) away using secure Bluetooth technology. - Internal rechargeable battery, up to 100 hours between charges. - Nearly indestructible, made of same material as bullet-proof glass. Universal Tablet Mount, Single The perfect holder for most models of tablets. Hands-Free Page Turner Clipping your tablet in place is easy and secure. No more resting your tablet on a stand, amp, floor, etc. 040A154, 15 oz (0.42 kg) - Attaches to a standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand or any music stand shaft using our Side Mount Extension. Side-Mount Extension Mount your tablet to the shaft of your music stand or mic stand. 040A140, 0.45 lb (0.20 kg) - Use your tablet with a traditional music stand or mic stand. - Heavy duty steel extension bracket fits shafts up to 1" (25 mm) in diameter. - Accepts our Universal Tablet Mount and other standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand devices. - 8" (203 mm) long with 6.25" (159 mm) extension from the shaft. Large Stand Move & Store Cart 039C202, 38 lb (17.2 kg). - Holds twenty RoughNeck Stands. - Large center pivot wheels for maneuverability. - Loads and unloads from both ends. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (20 mm) steel tubing Universal Tablet with 8" (203 mm) wheels and 5" (127 mm) heavy-duty casters. Side-Mount Mount - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 68" (699 x 1727 mm) floor space. Extension Allow 60" (1524 mm) for height with Roughneck Stands. Small Stand Move & Store Cart 039D201 21 lb (9.5 kg). - Holds ten RoughNeck Stands. - Two-wheel cart design allows transport up and down stairs. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (20 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) heavy-duty wheels. - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 36" (699 x 914 mm) floor space. Allow 60" (1524 mm) for height with Roughneck Stands.

Large Move and Store Cart

Small Move and Store Cart

2018-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

CLASSIC 50® MUSIC STAND

Traditional styling meets advanced construction. The Classic 50® is the end result of half a century of experience with music educators just like you. By thoroughly investigating your day-to-day needs and recurring problems, we’ve been able to create a music stand that delivers traditional elegance without traditional headaches. The Classic 50’s superiority begins with its tough, lightweight construction. The special polymer material has an inherent tensile strength that withstands daily rigors without bending or denting like metal — and without creating a clatter. Add striking good looks and you have the most refined music stand ever designed, along with a stand that’s tough enough to withstand years of use.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

CLASSIC 50® MUSIC STAND We tested Classic 50 against metal to see which would bend — and stay bent.

The unique recessed area prevents pencils and other ancillaries from flying off the desk when you turn the pages. The desk is tightly secured to the stem but still allows an extremely fluid tilting motion and full-range of angles.

Classic 50

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• • • • •

High-strength polymer desk and base. Balanced for excellent stability. Wobble-free base attachment. Unique recessed desk area for pencils. Classic black styling is color-molded through base and desk for distinctive, long-lasting good looks. Bolt-through desk attachment holds tight and secure — always. 131/2" x 20" (343 x 508 mm) music desk. Brass spring height adjustment mechanism adjusts height from 251/2" to 49" (648 to 1245 mm), desk lip to floor. 5- year warranty. Some assembly required.

039E500 Classic 50 Music Stand, 6 lb, 8 oz (2.9 kg) PURCHASE ONLINE!

Classic 50

Metal Stand

As you can see, there is no comparison. The Classic 50 bounces back into shape, while metal stays permanently bent.

Molded collar construction keeps stands straight. Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 20 Classic 50 Stands.

• • • • •

Metal Stand

We wanted to see how the Classic 50 and a metal stand would compare when subjected to identical sustained pressure.

Move music stands from rehearsal room to performance area and back again with ease.

Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 10 Classic 50 Stands.

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Classic 50® Stand • • • • • • • • • • • •

039E500 Standard Classic 50 Stand 4.9 lbs (2.2 kg). 039E499 Short Classic 50 Stand 4.8 lbs (2.2 kg). Lightweight, high-strength polycarbonate desk and base. Wobble-free base attachment. Black finish. Color molded through base and desk for long-lasting good looks. Bolt-through desk attachment to prevent desk from coming off unexpectedly. 13-1/2" x 20" (343 x 508 mm) Music Desk. Brass spring height adjustment mechanism - Standard Classic 50 Stand adjusts from 25" to 49" (635 to 1245 mm) (desk lip to floor). - Short Classic 50 Stand adjusts from 21" to 45" (534 to 1143 mm) (desk lip to floor). Available in shorter option for use with smaller musicians and when stand will be used primarily when seated. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Five-year warranty.

Accessories Electric Music Stand Light Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers’ stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (0.4 kg) LED Music Stand Lights Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology, so no bulbs to replace. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (0.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (0.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (0.29 kg)

20" (508 mm)

49" (1245 mm) Max. 45" (1143 mm) Max (Short Classic 50 Stand)

25" (635 mm) Min. 21" (534 mm) Max (Short Classic 50 Stand)

13-1/2" (343 mm)

Bolted Desk Attachment

Tongue-and-Groove Base Assembly

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 13

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information Accessories (continued) Hands-Free Page Turner A rugged hands-free device for turning the pages on your digital sheet music. Simple setup and operation make this a great solution for musicians who need a hand. 040A142, 0.55 lbs (0.24 kg) - Tap the foot switches to turn the pages on your digital sheet music forward or backward. - No messy cables, connects wirelessly to tablets or computers up to 60â&#x20AC;&#x2122; (1524 mm) away using secure Bluetooth technology. - Internal rechargeable battery, up to 100 hours between charges. - Nearly indestructible, made of same material as bullet-proof glass. Universal Tablet Mount, Single The perfect holder for most models of tablets. Clipping your tablet in place is easy and secure. No more resting your tablet on a stand, amp, floor, etc. 040A154, 15 oz (0.42 kg) - Attaches to a standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand or any music stand shaft using our Side Mount Extension. Side-Mount Extension Mount your tablet to the shaft of your music stand or mic stand. 040A140, 0.45 lbs (0.20 kg) - Use your tablet with a traditional music stand or mic stand. - Heavy duty steel extension bracket fits shafts up to 1" (25 mm) in diameter. - Accepts our Universal Tablet Mount and other standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand devices. - 8" (203 mm) long with 6.25" (159 mm) extension from the shaft. Large Stand Move and Store Cart 039C202, 38 lbs (17.2 kg). - Holds twenty Classic 50 Stands. - Large center pivot wheels for maneuverability. - Loads and unloads from both ends. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) wheels and 5" (127 mm) heavy-duty casters. - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 68" (699 x 1727 mm) floor space. Allow 61" (1550 mm) for height with Classic 50 Stands. Small Stand Move and Store Cart 039D201 21 lbs (9.5 kg). - Holds ten Classic 50 Stands. - Two-wheel cart design allows transport up and down stairs. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) heavy-duty wheels. - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 36" (699 x 915 mm) floor space. Allow 61" (1550 mm) for height with Classic 50 Stands.

Hands-Free Page Turner

Universal Tablet Mount Side-Mount Extension

(shown on traditional music stand)

Large Move and Store Cart

Small Move and Store Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 14

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

PREFACE® MUSIC STAND

The low-cost music stand that’s high on features The Wenger Preface® Music Stand combines affordability with reliability. The large aluminum desk provides ample space for displaying music. A large one-piece attachment bracket and bolt-through desk attachment holds the desk securely to the stand. A reliable brake mechanism provides precise height adjustment and the stand can be easily positioned whether seated or standing. A 12-gauge steel-welded base features a wobble-free base attachment that won’t loosen because it can’t twist in the base – no more weekly tightening of wobbly stands! Slim and lightweight, the Preface Music Stand is just under 6 lbs. (under 3 kg.) so it’s easy to carry several stands in one hand. And the recessed desk lip lets you stack stands quickly on a cart because there’s no need to flip the desks. The Wenger Preface Music Stand – a smart economical addition to your music program.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 15

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

PREFACE® MUSIC STAND Recessed desk lip

Ample surface area for displaying music

Brass friction spring slider mechanism provides reliable height adjustment

Wobble-free base attachment Bolt-through desk attachment

Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 24 Preface Stands.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• Lightweight – just 5.7 lbs (2.6 kg) • 131/2" x 20" (343 x 508 mm) desk • 251/2" - 49" (648 – 1245 mm) height adjustment desk lip to floor • All-metal construction • 12-gauge steel welded base for durability • Wobble-free base attachment • 1" outer tube for easy transport • Brass spring slider mechanism • Sturdy aluminum desk • Bolt-through desk attachment • Durable powder-coat paint finish • 5- year warranty 237B500 Preface Stand, 5.7 lbs (2.6 kg)

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart will hold up to 12 Preface Stands.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: • MUSIC STAND MOVE & STORE CARTS Move music stands from rehearsal room to performance area and back again with ease. 039C202 Large Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 38 lbs (17.2 kg) 039D201 Small Music Stand Move & Store Cart, 21 lbs (9.5 kg) • ELECTRIC MUSIC STAND LIGHT Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers’ stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (.4 kg) • LED MUSIC STAND LIGHTS Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated or AC adapter stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (.29 kg) • TABLET ACCESSORIES 040A142 Hands-Free Page Turner, .55 lbs (.24 kg) 040A140 Side-Mount Extension, .45 lbs (.20 kg) Accepts Universal Tablet Mount, Single and other popular mic threaded (5/8" – 27) devices 040A154 Universal Tablet Mount, Single, 15 oz (.42 kg) Attaches to any stand shaft using Wenger’s Side Mount Extension Bar or attaches to standard mic threaded (5/8" – 27) stands and mounts.

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 16

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Preface® Music Stand • • • • • • • • • • •

237B500 5.7 lbs (2.9 kg). 13-1/2" x 20" (343 x 508 mm) lightweight, aluminum desk with one piece aluminum attachment bracket. 14-gauge steel base. Wobble-free base attachment. 1" (25 mm) steel upright post for easy transport. Bolt-through desk attachment to prevent desk from coming off unexpectedly. Recessed desk lip area allows stand to be stored on cart without having to flip the desk. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Brass spring height adjuster adjusts height from 25" to 49" (635 to 1245 mm) (desk lip to floor). UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

25" (635 mm) Min.

49" (1245 mm) Max.

13-1/2" (343 mm)

Assembly

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 17

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information Accessories (continued) Hands-Free Page Turner A rugged hands-free device for turning the pages on your digital sheet music. Simple setup and operation make this a great solution for musicians who need a hand. 040A142, 0.55 lbs (0.24 kg) - Tap the foot switches to turn the pages on your digital sheet music forward or backward. - No messy cables, connects wirelessly to tablets or computers up to 60' (18 m) away using secure Bluetooth technology. - Internal rechargeable battery, up to 100 hours between charges. - Nearly indestructible, made of same material as bullet-proof glass. Universal Tablet Mount, Single The perfect holder for most models of tablets. Clipping your tablet in place is easy and secure. Hands-Free Page Turner No more resting your tablet on a stand, amp, floor, etc. 040A154, 15 oz (0.42 kg) - Attaches to a standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand or any music stand shaft using our Side Mount Extension. Side-Mount Extension Mount your tablet to the shaft of your music stand or mic stand. 040A140, 0.45 lbs (0.20 kg) - Use your tablet with a traditional music stand or mic stand. - Heavy duty steel extension bracket fits shafts up to 1" (25 mm) in diameter. - Accepts our Universal Tablet Mount and other standard 5/8" (16 mm) threaded stand devices. - 8" (203 mm) long with 6.25" (159 mm) extension from the shaft. Large Stand Move & Store Cart 039C202, 38 lbs (17.2 kg). - Holds twenty Preface Stands without flipping the desk. Maximize cart storage by flipping desk, holds 24. - Large center pivot wheels for maneuverability. - Loads and unloads from both ends. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubing Universal with 8" (203 mm) wheels and 5" (127 mm) heavy-duty casters. Tablet Side-Mount - Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 68" (699 x 1727 mm) floor space. Mount Extension Allow 61" (1549 mm) for height with Preface Stands. Small Stand Move & Store Cart 039D201, 21 lbs (9.5 kg). - Holds ten Preface Stands without flipping the desk. Maximize cart storage by flipping desk, holds 12. - Two-wheel cart design allows transport up and down stairs. - 14-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) heavy-duty wheels. - Stores compactly in 27 1/2" x 36" (699 x 914 mm) floor space. Allow 61" (1549 mm) for height with Preface Stands.

Large Move & Store Cart

Small Move & Store Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 18

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

GIG STAND® FOLDING MUSIC STAND

At last! A portable music stand that’s in a class by itself! Wenger’s Gig stand is the most sturdy, solid, inventive portable music stand ever built. The Gig stand looks different because it is different. Designed to adjust and lock into positions other portable stand makers haven’t even thought of. Don’t put a solid performance at risk by using a flimsy stand and don’t settle for inflexible classroom stands that were never meant for traveling. Go with Gig stands and go in style.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 19

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information

GIG STAND® FOLDING MUSIC STAND The convenience of a portable with the sturdiness of a classroom stand. The Gig portable music stand is no pushover. It stands up to the weight of an oversized folder loaded with music. Solid, durable. Built to endure all the banging around that a heavy travel schedule can dish out. Sets up and adjusts in seconds and holds its position tight until the musician changes it. Only the Gig stand adjusts to the extra low positions preferred by jazz bands, guitarists and chamber ensembles. Simply raise the swing-lift arm and extend it to reach over timpani or handbell tables bringing the music up high and close to the performer. High, low or any position in between is equally simple and solid. When the performance is over, just fold up the Gig stand, grab the handle and go.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • Portable stand with 20" x 14" (508 x 356 mm) aluminum desk and 16-gauge steel tube and base. • Cantilever arm for wide range positioning of desk. • Height adjustment 10" to 42" (254 x 1067 mm) (desk lip to floor). • Folds down to 20" x 241/2" x 45/8" (508 x 622 x 117 mm) with its own carrying handle. • Black powder coat finish. • 5- year warranty. 143E001 Gig Music Stand, 9 lbs. (4 kg)

PURCHASE ONLINE!

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: • ELECTRIC MUSIC STAND LIGHT Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers’ stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (.4 kg) • LED MUSIC STAND LIGHTS Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery- operated or AC adapter stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology. 237A040 HammerHead Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (.06 kg) 237A035 Encore Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (.29 kg) • TABLET ACCESSORIES 040A142 Hands-Free Page Turner, .55 lbs (.24 kg) 040A140 Side-Mount Extension, .45 lbs (.20 kg) Accepts Universal Tablet Mount, Single and other popular mic threaded (5/8" – 27) devices 040A154 Universal Tablet Mount, Single, 15 oz (.42 kg) Attaches to any stand shaft using Wenger’s Side Mount Extension Bar or attaches to standard mic threaded (5/8" – 27) stands and mounts. © 2018 Wenger Corporation USA/1-18/200/W/LT0004G

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 20

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Gig Stand® Folding Music Stand • • • • • • • •

143E001 (9 lb) (4 kg). Portable stand with 20" x 14" (508 x 356 mm) aluminum desk and 16-gauge steel tube and base. Cantilever arm for wide range positioning of desk. Hex wrench included for angle adjustment. Height adjustment 10" to 42" (254 to 1067 mm) (desk lip to floor). Folds into briefcase size 20" x 24-1/2" x 4-5/8" (508 x 622 x 118 mm) with its own carrying handle. Black powder-coat paint finish. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

Accessories

14" (356 mm)

20" (508 mm)

24-1/2" (622 mm)

Electric Music Stand Light Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers' stands. 1090001 Music Stand Light, 14 oz. (0.4 kg) LED Music Stand Lights Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology, so no bulbs to replace. 237A040 HammerHead LED Music Stand Light, 2.1 oz (0.06 kg) 237A035 Encore LED Music Stand Light, 4.3 oz (0.12 kg) 237A033 Orchestra Music Stand Light, 10.2 oz (0.29 kg)

Highest Position

42" (1067 mm)

Carrying Position

10-1/2" (267 mm)

Extended Reach Position

Lowest Position

10" (254 mm)

16-3/8" (416 mm)

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 21

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Hands-Free Page Turner

Universal Tablet Mount Side-Mount Extension

(shown on traditional music stand)

2018-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 22

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Stand Move & Store Carts Large Move & Store Cart • 039C202 38 lbs (17 kg). • Holds twenty Classic 50® Stands. Holds eighteen Bravo® Stands. Holds twenty RoughNeck® Stands. Holds twenty Preface® Stands without flipping the desk, maximize cart storage by flipping the desk to hold twenty-four. • Large center pivot wheels for maneuverability. • Loads and unloads from both ends for fast, two person use. • 14-gauge 1-1/2" (38 mm) square, 16-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 mm x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) diameter steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) wheels and 5" (127 mm) stem swivel casters. • Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 68" (699 mm x 1727 mm) floor space. Allow 60" (1524 mm) for height. If Bravo Stands, allow 63" (1600 mm). Small Move & Store Cart • 039D201 21 lbs (9.5 kg). • Holds ten Classic 50® Stands. Holds nine Bravo® Stands. Holds ten RoughNeck® Stands. Holds ten Preface® Stands without flipping the desk, maximize cart storage by flipping the desk to hold twelve. • • Two-wheel cart design allows transport up and down stairs. • 14-gauge 1-1/2" (38 mm) square, 16-gauge 1" x 1-1/2" (25 mm x 38 mm) and 16-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) diameter steel tubing with 8" (203 mm) wheels. • Stores compactly in 27-1/2" x 36" (699 mm x 914 mm) floor space. Allow 60" (1524 mm) for height. If Bravo Stands, allow 63" (1600 mm). Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Five-year warranty on both Move and Store Carts.

Large Move & Store Cart

Small Move & Store Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 23

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Music Stand Lights Electric Music Stand Light Classic stand light fits all Wenger stands, and most other manufacturers' stands. Classic Music Stand Light • 1090001 14 oz (0.40 kg). • Clips securely to music stand. • 40-watt bulb and electrical cord included. • Black texture finish.

LED Music Stand Lights

Classic Music Stand Light

Compact, attractive, and adjustable, these battery-operated stand lights work with all Wenger stands. Features all-LED technology, so no bulbs to replace. Hammerhead LED Music Stand Light • 237A040 2.1 oz (0.06 kg). • 3" (76 mm) long light head with six energy-efficient LEDs and two brightness levels. • Precisely engineered lens spreads light evenly. • Flexible 8" (203 mm) gooseneck and clip opens extra-wide. • Uses three AAA batteries (included). • Durable 6" x 3-3/4" (152 x 95 mm) travel pouch included.

)

( 3"

Hammerhead LED Music Stand Light

6" 52

(1 )

Encore LED Music Stand Light • 237A035 4.3 oz (0.12 kg). • 6" (152 mm) long light head with six energy-efficient LEDs and two brightness levels. • Optical grade lens spreads light evenly and integrated fin shields light from audience. • Flexible 8" (203 mm) gooseneck and padded clip opens extra-wide. • Powered by an AC adapter with or three AAA batteries (included). • Durable 7-1/2" x 7-1/2" x 2-1/4" (191 x 191 x 57 mm) travel bag included.

Encore LED Music Stand Light

Orchestra LED Music Stand Light • 237A033 10.2 oz (0.29 kg). • 8-1/4" (210 mm) long light head with nine LEDs illuminate up to four pages of sheet music. • Easy access power switch controls two brightness levels. • Powered by an AC adapter or three AA batteries (included). • Sturdy proprietary spring clip provides solid and simple attachment to music stands. • Solid state LEDs never require replacement. • Flexible 11" (280 mm) gooseneck allows for precise adjustment. • Comes in it's own durable 9-1/2" x 9-1/2" x 2-1/2" (235 x 235 x 63 mm) zipper bag to secure and protect the light and AC adapter.

8-1/4" (210 mm)

Orchestra LED Music Stand Light

Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. One-year warranty on all stand lights.

2019-04

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 24

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Acoustic Shield • 143E102 (12 lbs.) (5.4 kg). • The Acoustic Shield effectively reduces potentially damaging sound energy from instruments played directly behind a musician. • The initial wave from a loud musical sound (like a trumpet blast) can be reduced up to 40% in perceived loudness of the higher frequencies (above 2 KHz). • Shield surface is mounted on a unique cantilevering arm that reaches over chair backs for positioning just behind the head of a musician. • Ideal positioning for maximum reduction off sound intensity is 3" to 6" (76 to 152 mm) behind the head of the musician. • Height is measured from floor to bottom of shield and is adjustable from 10" to 43" (254 to 1092 mm). • Fully adjustable Shield is 22-1/2" x 17" (572 x 432 mm) and outside ends are angled around the musician. • Shield is constructed of clear, unobtrusive polycarbonate. • T-shaped base is 20-1/4" x 16-1/4" (514 x 413 mm) and provides maximum stability and tucks under chair out of the way of musicians’ feet or music stands. • Folds compactly to 22-1/2" wide x 27" high x 4-1/2" thick (572 x 686 x 114 mm) and has built-in carrying handle. • Hex wrench included for shield angle adjustment. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five year warranty. • Patented.

10" to 43" (254 to 1092 mm)

17" (432 mm)

/2" 22-1 m) m 2 7 5 (

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 25

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Music Stands

Notes: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.b. 26

Conductor’s Equipment INTERIORS BINDER

Conductor’s Equipment

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Flex® Conductors Stand

Conductors Chair

Conductor’s Podium

Techbridge

Preface® Conductor’s Stand

Director’s Stand

Rehearsal Resource Center

Porcelain Steel Markerboard

Rubber Tackboard

Music Notation Board

Platinum Reversible Board

Conductor’s Equipment

Flex® Conductor’s System

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information

FLEX® CONDUCTOR’S SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A flexible conductor’s system that you configure Now you can build the perfect conductor’s system for the way you want to teach, and not just once but whenever your needs change. This brilliant Wenger system adapts to your height, habits, and imagination. Flex is a harmonious design where all elements work together. It starts with the large, sturdy conductor’s stand that adjusts to virtually any position you need. From here you can add our innovative TechBridges in custom lengths with snap-on attachments for MIDI keyboards, laptops, iPads, a workspace and even a drink holder – and each easily positions right where you want it.

The Flex Stand can be used with the entire system or by itself.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information

FLEX® CONDUCTOR’S SYSTEM COMPONENTS Don’t leave your laptop at your desk. Have it within easy reach on our tiltable attachment.

The centerpiece of the new Flex Conductor’s System is the stand itself. It’s large, more versatile and rotates, tilts and swivels right where you like it.

MIDI keyboards rest comfortably on the TechBridges. The special keyboard mounts hold most sizes of electronic keyboards.

Clamp on a desktop work surface wherever you like. It’s perfect for ipods, mixers, microphones, music books, speakers...

Universal Tablet Mount.

Customize the length of your TechBridge with bridge lengths of 2'-8' (610 x 2438 mm).

The TechBridges swivel to just about any angle, allowing you to customize your conducting space.

Cup holder attachment.

Is it sturdy? You bet. Heavy, cast iron footings give it a confident foundation.

Set the perfect height for you and then tighten it in place. A traditional set-up of a stand, chair, and double podium.

Scan this QR Code to view the Flex Conductor’s System Video

SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A-la-carte – Purchase the parts you need to customize your system: • Conductor’s Stand • Storage baskets that mount under desk • Conductor’s Podium

The fully adjustable Conductor’s Chair puts you in just the right position no matter the task.

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• Traditional Conductor’s Chair • Conductor’s Chair • TechBridges in various sizes

By adding TechBridges and attachments, the Flex Conductor’s System can be customized to meet your exact needs.

www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information

CONDUCTOR’S STAND

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• Choice of Polycarbonate or High Pressure Laminate Desk. Desk is 27" wide x 20" deep (686 x 508 mm) • Desk rotates and locks into position so the lip may be toward or away from the user • Desk height is adjustable from 30" - 48" (762 - 1219 mm) • Desk tilts from flat to vertical • Cast iron base with wheels for easy transport • Optional Storage Baskets

HPL Desk

Polycarbonate Desk

CONDUCTOR’S CHAIR

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Traditional Conductor’s Chair • Swivels 170 degrees or locks into position • Pneumatic height adjustable for seat and footrest from 26.5"- 36.5" (673 - 927 mm) • Black frame and choice of several fabric colors

Green • Blue • Plum • Red • Black • Grey

CONDUCTOR’S PODIUM

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• • • •

Two step podium that includes a detachable safety rail Heavy duty 14-gauge steel construction Built-in wheels for easy mobility Durable grey carpeted surface

TECHBRIDGE

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• Cast iron legs for stability and wheels for easy transport and repositioning • Height adjustable from 29"- 41" (737 - 1041 mm) floor to bridge top with no accessories • Lengths include 2', 3', 4', 5', 6', 7' and 8' (610, 914, 1219, 1524, 1829, 2134 and 2438 mm)

Customize the length of your TechBridge. With sizes ranging from 2' to 8' (610 to 2438 mm) you can really stretch out.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information

FLEX® CONDUCTOR’S SYSTEM COMPONENTS TECHBRIDGE ACCESSORIES: • Keyboard Mount • Laptop Mount

• iPad Mount • Universal Tablet Mount Put your keyboards right at your fingertips. The laptop mount accessory adjusts to your preferred angle. And a built in fan keeps the base cool. MIDI keyboards – even full size ones – can rest stably on the keyboard mounts.

• Work Surface • Cup Holder

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• Power Strip Shelf • Bridge Clips Universal Tablet Mount accommodates Smart Phones and Tablets from 5" to 13.3" (127 to 338 mm).

Cup Holder

Work Surface

Power Strip Shelf

“The Flex is perfect for the technology I use in my classroom, including laptop, smart board, iPad, mixer and my iPhone. I think technology greatly enhances teaching when used correctly and the Flex makes this easy.” – Matt Bradford, Director of Bands, Clay Center Schools, Clay Center, Kansas “The Flex Conductor’s System is aptly named - it can be whatever you need it to be. It’s awesome! Flex helps me organize my teaching environment - everything I need is at my fingertips without having to turn away from my students.” – Joshua Countryman, Choir Director Brooklyn Center High School Brooklyn Center, Minnesota “I really like the Flex System’s flexibility. It gives me easy access to my laptop computer and the worksurface can also hold my instrument. It’s very convenient. The optional storage basket helps hold commonly used items like rosin or mutes, along with key documents. – Nancy Epperson, Orchestra Director Lady Bird Johnson Middle School, Irving, Texas “The Conductor’s Podium is very easy to move from room to room and the see-through music stand allows students sitting in the front to still see the Smartboard.” – Brent Poling Director of Performing and Visual Arts International School Bangkok, Thailand

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Flex® Conductor's System Components An ergonomically designed, customizable system that allows the conductor to create a personal workspace perfect for his or her own needs. Easily adjust heights, angles, positions and more for a back-saving workspace. Components can work together or independently. Mix and match from the following components. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Flex Conductor's Stand • Polycarbonate Desk 236C002 39 lb (17.7 kg) • High-Pressure Laminate Desk 236C011 41 lb (18.4 kg) • Provides additional storage space and will accommodate scores up to 10-1/2" x 19-1/2" (267 x 495 mm) • Optional Storage Baskets 236C006 3.6 lb (1.6 kg) Set of two 9" x 20" (229 x 508 mm) 22-gauge perforated steel baskets Mounts to desk with hardware provided • Desk is 20"x 27" (508 x 686 mm) • Dual lock feature on desk allows desk to rotate so desk lip can be oriented toward or away from the user • Desk lip is 2" (51 mm) high • Desk height is adjustable in 2" (51 mm) increments by means of a trigger release lever located under the desk • Height adjustment range from 36" – 52.5" (914 – 1334 mm) with the desk in the horizontal position • Desk tilts from flat to vertical • Extruded Aluminum uprights are at a 75° angle • Cast iron base with wheels for easy transport • Five-year warranty

(50 20" 8m m)

" 27 m) 6m (68

" 2.5 m) m

(64

Optional Storage Baskets

9" m) 9m 2 2 (

2" m) m

(51

" .25 ) 22 mm 5 (56

1 (39 5.4" 1m m)

Conductor's Podium • Double: 1110302 101 lb (45 kg) Base: 158E002 61 lb (28 kg) Upper: 158E001 42 lb (19 kg) • Podium tops are constructed of 5/8" (16 mm) plywood covered with 100% olefin carpet, and secured by heavy-duty steel edging; carpet color: Grey • Each podium has eight black thermoplastic rubber pads on the bottom for stability • Upper podium has an attached swing away vinyl coated locking clamp to secure it to the base podium • Base is constructed of 14-gauge (2 mm) steel with black powder-coat paint finish • Edging is 16-gauge (1.5 mm) steel; color: Grey • Front panel is designed to allow conductor's stand to slide under podium • Each podium has two 4" (102 mm) rubber casters recessed into front panel to move easily from room to room • Upper podium has 36" (914 mm) high detachable guardrail constructed of 16-gauge (1.5 mm) steel Finish: Black powder-coat paint • Overall dimensions: Base podium: 43" wide x 38" deep x 6" high (1092 x 965 x 152 mm) Upper podium; 32" wide x 38" deep x 6" high (2057 x 965 x 152 mm) m) • Five-year warranty 2m 15 6"

36" (914 mm)

Flex Conductor's Stand

)

" (9

(8 2"

)

(

9 (10

Conductor's Podium

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

29" to 49" (737 to 1245 mm)

Conductor's Chair • 30 lb (14 kg) • Chair frame and upright post assembly are constructed of 14-gauge steel with black powder-coat paint finish • Seat and back are covered with polypropylene fabric over 2" (51 mm) foam padding Available in six colors: Black, Green, Blue, Plum, Red, Grey • Seat height adjusts with pressurized gas cylinder in heights from 26-1/2" to 36-1/2" (673 to 927 mm) • Seat has 170° swivel with locking feature • Seat has three pre-determined depth settings for conductor, string bass, or percussion use • 14-gauge (2 mm) steel foot rest is fixed to chair frame and the height adjusts with the seat • Five 14-gauge (2 mm) steel legs designed to slide under 6" (152 mm) podium • Overall footprint: 28" (711 mm) • Overall height: 29" to 49" (737 to 1245 mm) • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Five-year warranty

26-1/2" to 36-1/2" (673 to 927 mm)

Application Information

Conductor's Chair

Flex TechBridge • 236A003 38.4 lb (17.4 kg) (reference 4' length) • Extruded Aluminum channels are available in any length from 2' – 8' (610 mm – 2438 mm) for the perfect fit • Cast iron footings for stability • Wheels on one end for easy transport and repositioning • Orientation feature on other end for connection to the Conductor's Stand • Infinitely height adjustable between 29" and 41" (737 and 1041 mm) by means of a threaded rod • Holds up to 250 lb (113 kg) • Center of channels provide for cable and wire routing • Velcro tie straps included for routing of cables and wires down each leg when required • Five-year warranty

41" (1041 mm) Max. 29" (737 mm) Min.

52-1/2" (1334 mm) Max. 36" (914 mm) Min.

Max. 8' (2438 mm) n. 2' (610 mm) Mi

Flex Conductor's Stand

Flex TechBridge

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information TechBridge Accessories Accessories easily attach to TechBridge without the use of tools by means of Bridge Clips made of durable injection molded ABS. Work Surface Mount • 236A004 9.5 lb (4.3 kg) • Laminated 18" x 24" (457 x 610 mm) in graphite finish with black edge banding securely attaches to TechBridge by means of two bridge clips • Perfect for iPods, mixers, speakers, etc

(45 18" 7m m

24" ) mm (610

)

Work Surface Mount

Keyboard Mount • 236A005 4 lb (1.8 kg) per set of 2 • Set of two 15" x 2" (381 x 51 mm) bars with non-slip pads rotate to position keyboard and provide maximum workspace

(38 15" 1m m

)

Keyboard Mounts

Laptop Mount • 236A008 4.7 lb (2.1 kg) • Z-lift with support shelf supports the weight of the heaviest notebooks • Elevates and angles for best viewing • Fold flat for convenient storage • Support shelf extends outward for thicker notebooks • USB 2.04-Port connectivity • Non-slip pads for dependable positioning without interference • Securely attaches to the TechBridge by means of two bridge clips and brackets

2" m) m

(51

" 12 m) 5m

(30

(30 12" 5m m) 15(39 5/8" 7m m)

Laptop Mount

Universal Tablet Mount • 236A013 2.5 lb (1.1 kg) • Accommodates Smart Phones and Tablets 5" to 13.3" (127 to 338 mm) with or without cases • Vinyl-covered segmented steel flex arm for perfect positioning • Secures to the underside of the TechBridge using carrige bolts and wing nuts

Universal Tablet Mount

TechBridge Accessories continued on the following page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information TechBridge Accessories (continued) 5" mm)

06 16" m m )

(127

6 (152 mm)

Power Strip Shelf • 236A010 1.4 lb (0.63 kg) • Formed ABS plastic Shelf holds standard power strip • Secures to the underside of the TechBridge using carriage bolts and wing nuts

Power Strip Shelf

Cupholder • 236A007 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) • 3-1/2" (89 mm) diameter holding area • Convenient place for a water bottle, pencils or other small items Cupholder

Bridge Clips • 236A007 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) • Set of two injection molded ABS clamps for mounting other items on the TechBridge Bridge Clips

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 8

2019-09

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Preface™ Conductor’s Stand • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

238D001 15.3 lbs (6.9 kg). 18-1/2" high x 29" wide (470 x 737 mm), 1.2 mm thick aluminum desk. 12-1/2" x 25" x 2" (318 x 635 x 51 mm), 2 mm thick aluminum storage box for out of site storage of additional scores, papers, etc. Storage box extends the full width of the desk providing additional desk strength. Integrated storage box allows easy access from either side of the desk. Side access to the storage box prevents unexpected spills if desk is tipped. Bolt-through desk attachment to prevent desk from coming off unexpectedly. Curved desk shape for additional aesthetic appeal. Double upright posts with brass spring height adjustment mechanisms adjust height of desk from 25-1/2" to 49-1/4" (648 to 1251 mm) desk lip to floor. Inner tubes of upright posts are black E-coat finish for a formal all-black appearance. 12-gauge double base assembly with 14-gauge tie bar for additional strength. Wobble-free base attachment: upright posts sit in the base collars for additional stability. 19" x 21" (483 x 533 mm) Base footprint for exceptional stability. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Five-year warranty.

16-1/2" (419 mm) 49-1/4" (1251 mm) Max. 25-1/2" (648 mm) Min.

2" (51 mm)

Bolted Desk Attachment

Assembly

21" (533 mm)

19" (483 mm)

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 9

18-1/2" (470 mm)

29" (737 mm) Integrated Storage Box

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Equipment

Hands-Free Page Turner

Universal Tablet Mount Side-Mount Extension

(shown on traditional music stand)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 10

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductor’s Equipment

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Rehearsal Resource Center

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

121C001._ (243 lb) (110 kg) Left Curved Unit with Drawer or Stereo Rack Option 121C002._ (243 lb) (110 kg) Right Curved Unit with Drawer or Stereo Rack Option 121C003._ (2x 243 lb) (2x 110 kg) Twin Set - One each Left and Right Curved Unit with Drawer or Stereo Rack Options Overall dimensions: 28" deep x 39-1/2" high x 65-3/8" long (711 x 1003 x 1661 mm) Overall footprint: Wraparound Configuration: 75-1/2" wide x 75-1/2" deep (1918 x 1918 mm) Straight Configuration: 130-3/4" wide x 25-1/2" deep x 39-1/2" high (3321 x 648 x 1003 mm) Top, bottom and interior panels constructed of 1-1/8" (29 mm) thick thermofused composite wood with polyester laminate finish in graphite Side and interior panels constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) thick formaldehyde free industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors Rack mountable rails and three shelves included (Stereo Rack Option only) six-outlet power strip included with 15' (4572 mm) power cord, rated 15 amp, 120VAC, UL listed (Stereo Rack Option only) Top counter space measures 25-1/4" deep x 65-3/8" long (641 x 1661 mm) Drawer Option includes two 18-gauge steel pull-out drawers 17" wide x 18" deep x 3-1/2" high (432 x 457 x 89 mm) in black finish 65-3/8" (1661 mm) Includes upper storage compartment Two lockable rear service doors for wiring and cabling access (7 28 11 " Each unit includes five 4" (102 mm) diameter swivel casters m m ) Two wire grommets included in top panel for routing of cables Each unit includes a lockable storage compartment Units will lock together for straight across or wrap-around configuration 2 (64 5-1/ Rolls through standard 3' (914 mm) doorway ) 1 m 4" mm UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: m) 10 0 ul.com/gg - UL 2818 (1 20" 4" -3/ Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at (508 mm) 39 www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative Five-year warranty

Optional Accessories Folio Insert • 121B105 (26 lb) (12 kg) set of two • Pass-through slots for handouts, assignments, etc • Includes three slots at 2" high x 18-3/4" wide (51 x 476 mm)

39-1/2" (1003 mm)

• • • • •

Right Curved Unit Assembly (Shown with Drawer Option)

Locking Security Panels • 121B101._ (19 lb) (9 kg) Lower door • 121B102._ (7 lb) (3 kg) Upper door • Doors are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade particleboard in polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors

65-3/8" (1661 mm) " ) 28 mm 1 71

4" ) -1/ 25 1 mm (64

6-1

/2"

(16

Speaker Shelves • 121B106._ (13 lb) (6 kg) set of two • Shelves are 13-5/8" wide x 15-9/32" deep x 3/4" high (346 x 388 x 19 mm) • Fold down flat against unit for storage and transport • Shelves are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade particleboard in polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors

25-3/8" (645 mm)

39-1/2" (1003 mm)

(

Leg Extensions • 121B103 (10 lb) (5 kg) set of five • Includes five tubular steel leg extensions for use with 12" high (305 mm) podiums • Adds 6" (152 mm) to height of Rehearsal Resource Center

Left Curved Unit Assembly (Shown with Stereo Rack Option)

2019-04

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.c. 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Conductorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Equipment

Elementary Products INTERIORS BINDER

Elementary Products

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

teacherTAXI® Cart

footNOTES® Music Rug

flipFORMS®

Poster/Teaching Materials Cabinet

Small Instrument Storage Cabinet

ORFFgarage®

ORFFmobile®

Wardrobe Cabinet

Elementary Products

Bookcases

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

footNOTES®

An elementary classroom rug for music education Kids love learning notation when it’s this much fun. Walk, jump or dance. Your kids will have a blast jumping and dancing on the colorful footNOTES staff rug. New design is now in four sizes.

footNOTES® ACTIVITY BOOKLET This essential piece of the footNOTES system was written by Dr. John Feierabend, Ph.D., a champion of elementary music education. It’s filled with effective and engaging activities to help you get the most from your footNOTES system. (mailed separately)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

footNOTES®

A creative way to introduce notation to younger students

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • • • •

• • • • • •

Injection dyeing ensures lasting beauty and best value over time Rolls up for easy storage Free activity booklet by Dr. John Feierabend with purchase Now available in four sizes: 5'4" x 7'8" (1626 x 2337 mm) rectangle 7'8" x 10'9" (2337 x 3277 mm) rectangle 7'7" (2311 mm) round 13'2" (4013 mm) round Stainmaster® premium bulk continuous filament and heat set, premium nylon are designed to last in demanding environments Softflex® backing system Lotus Fiber Shield™ sheds liquid and soil particles Edges are bound and double stitched Meets NFPA Class I Flammability Standards CRI Green Label Plus™ Certification for lowest emitting VOC levels PURCHASE ONLINE!

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

footNOTES® 180B009 180B001 180B010 180B011

17 lbs (7.7 kg) 39 lbs (17.7 kg) 17 lbs (7.7 kg) 68 lbs (30.8 kg)

7'8" (2337 mm)

• Designed to perform in demanding environments. • State of the art injection dyeing ensures superb durability, lasting beauty, and the best value over time. • Stainmaster® Premium Bulk Continuous Filament Type 6,6 nylon. • High-twist, heat set, premium nylon maximizes appearance retention, resiliency, and the ability to withstand traffic. • LotusFX Fiber Shield™ shed liquids and soil particles, resist food and beverage stains, allowing carpet to stay 30% cleaner and last 50% longer. • Softflex® backing system eliminates wrinkling and curling. • Edges are bound and double-stiched for maximum durability. • Resists color fading and discoloration. • 100% recyclable. • CRI Green Label Plus™ Certification for lowest emitting VOC levels. • Indoor Air Quality Certified. • Class 1 Flammability Rating. • Passes NFPA253 and ASTM #-648 tests. • Made in the USA. • Lifetime Limited Wear Warranty guarantees surface pile abrasive wear not to exceed 10%. • Lifetime Limited Anti-microbial Protection guards against mold, mildew, and odor causing substances. • Lifetime Limited Static Protection is built-in and permanent. • Ten-Year Limited Soil & Stain Protection. • Limited Manufacturer Defects Warranty. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found atwww.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • "Free" Activity Booklet by Dr. John Feierabend with purchase.

5'4" (1626 mm)

5'4" x 7'8" Rectangle 7'8" x 10' 9" Rectangle 7'7" Round 13'2" Round

5'4" x 7'8" Rectangle 10'9" (3277 mm)

7'8" (2337 mm)

• • • •

7'8" x 10'9" Rectangle Diameter 13'2" (4013 mm)

Diameter 7'7" (2311 mm)

7'7" Round

13'2" Round

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 3

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

teacherTAXI® CART

A smooth rolling storage and transport cart for carrying all your supplies and equipment. Need to move books, AV equipment, theatre gear or other teaching materials—inside your building or even outside? Moving around your teaching facility has never been easier with the Wenger teacherTAXI® cart. It’s the easy way to transport your essential teaching tools anywhere you need to take them. The easy-grip handle and maneuverable wheel design lets you roll the teacherTAXI smoothly down halls, around corners and through doorways. It’s ergonomically designed with tiered, stepped shelves for easy access and plenty of leg room while walking. And, optional cupholders provide creature comforts during those long days. So why haul everything by hand when you can take a taxi? The teacherTAXI cart from Wenger.

Theatre

Audio Visual

Library

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

teacherTAXI® CART Instead of a storage drawer, you can opt for a slide out shelf for a laptop or gradebook.

Got a purse, gradebook, cell phone or other valuables you need to bring with you to class? Keep them secure and out of sight with the lockable storage drawer.

Your car has them, why not your TAXI? Don’t leave your coffee, soft drink or water behind when you move to another classroom.

A lip and recessed groove that runs around the edge of all the shelves keeps pens, pencils and other small items from rolling off. It can even hold over one gallon of spilled liquid.

The sturdy handle lets you easily guide your teacherTAXI down the hall and around corners.

Semi-opaque clear bins are available in several sizes.

Plug in your laptop, projector and more with the convenient power strip.

Storage drawer can be accessed from either side.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• Can be easily moved by student or adult even when fully loaded. Static rear wheels ensure straight tracking down narrow hallways • Ergonomically designed - Top work surface at ergonomic height of 341/2" (876 mm) - handle design avoids stress • Fits through standard doorways, hallways and elevators • 11/2” (38 mm) diameter curved steel tubular frame provides strength and attractive design • Powdercoated silver frame. Shelf available in black only • Total cart weight: Approximately 85 lb (38.5 kg) empty • Shelf weight load capacity: 100 lb (45 kg) per shelf • Built-in pencil and marker tray on all shelves • Three large shelves: 42" L x 223/4" W (1067 x 578 mm) overall dimensions • Adjustable center shelf can be removed

Swivel casters in the front for easy maneuverability and 12" (305 mm) static all-terrain wheels in the back for smooth movement.

• All-terrain wheels – two 12" (305 mm) static rear wheels/ two 4" (102 mm) front pivoting swivel casters • Top transport storage rim keeps instrument cases, keyboards, etc. from falling off • Contemporary design • Water resistant • Five-year warranty • Ships fully assembled OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: • Lockable storage drawer • Retractable surface for teaching or laptop use • 15 amp/6 outlet, UL approved power strip with a 10' (3048 mm) cord • (2) Cupholders: (1) large and (1) small • Plastic storage bins in various shapes and sizes

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

teacherTAXI® Cart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

204A001, teacherTAXI Cart, 85 lbs (39 kg). Three large shelves: 42" l x 22-3/4" w (1067 x 578 mm) overall dimensions. One piece blow molded polyethylene shelves have a skid resistant texture that is easy to clean. Shelf weight load capacity: 100 lbs (45 kg) per shelf. Ideal for transporting instrument cases, keyboards, etc. Top transport storage rim keeps instrument cases, keyboards, etc. from falling off. Ergonomically designed - Top work surface at ergonomic height. - Handle position and design avoids stress. Fits through standard doorways, hallways and elevators. 1-1/2" (38 mm) diameter curved steel tubular frame provide strength and attractive design. Powder-coat paint finish available in silver texture or black texture. Built-in pencil and marker tray on all shelves. Center shelf adjusts in seven positions and can be removed. Includes cupholders (set of two): one large and one small (large 3-1/2" ID; small 2-3/4" ID) Water resistant. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative Five-year warranty. Shipped assembled.

Optional Accessories:

34-1/2" (876 mm)

• Lockable storage drawer for laptop computers, purses, etc: Inside dimension: 24-1/2"l x 11"w x 6-3/4"d (622 x 280 x 171 mm). Overall dimension: 26"l x 13"w x 7"d (660 x 330 x 178 mm). • Pullout surface for teaching or laptop use: surface dimension 12"d x 19-1/2"w (305 x 495 mm). • Power strip is UL approved: 15 amp/six outlet/10' (3 m) cord. • Bins available in clear color. Small; 15" l x 6" w x 6" h (381 x 152 x 152 mm). Medium; 15" l x 12" w x 6" h (381 x 305 x 152 mm). Medium divided; 15" l x 12" w x 6" h (381 x 305 x 152 mm). Large with lid (clear only); 16" l x 11" w x 6" h (406 x 279 x 152 mm).

54" (1372 mm)

" 29-3/4 ) mm (756

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 6

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

flipFORMS®

flipFORMS®—fun, fast and flexible. Since their introduction, flipFORMS have become one of the most quickly accepted product innovations in our history. That’s because they were designed to meet needs that no other piece of equipment can meet — fast-changing, flexible, fun, interactive environments that adapt to the way you teach. And now, with an improved design, flipFORMS are better than ever. As a flat platform flipFORMS work separately or can be pushed together to create a stage for your performers. With a simple flip, you can create tiered seating and with another flip you can create standing risers. When you want to open up your floor space, flipFORMS roll out of the way on built-in, recessed wheels.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information

flipFORMS®

Platforms. The ideal shape for small group choreography, color teams, tables and more. A set of four can be pushed together to make an 8' x 10' (2438 x 3048 mm) performance stage.

Tiered Seating. Flip the larger section onto the core to create two tiers of seating. Stable, comfortable, quiet seating that eliminates a room full of chairs without doing away with a place for students to sit.

Standing Risers. Another simple flip creates great standing risers for the classroom or performances. Risers elevate students so they can be seen and heard by teachers and parents.

Out of the Way. flipFORMs tip up onto stable wheels and can easily be rolled out of the way and into compact storage. You’ll be amazed at how quickly you can open up your room and move between lesson activities with flipFORMS.

flipFORMS add creativity to your curriculum. In today’s education world, curriculum is more than just books and paper. We have turned to an expert in interactive music education who has created and used a variety of flipFORM lessons. With this book and flipFORM units, your education goals will come alive. You will receive this curriculum book free, with your order of one or more flipFORMS.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• Available in blue, green, red, yellow, and grey with a grey base or black with a black base. • Molded hand-holds make flipping and moving flipFORMS easy. • Built-in recessed wheels. • High-density plastic for strength and durability. • Textured surface for enhanced traction. • Easy-to-clean material. • Replaceable top sets available. • Assembly required. • Five year warranty. PURCHASE ONLINE!

025D002 025D003 025D004 025D005 025D027 025D028

flipFORM - blue top/grey base (100 lbs.)(45 kg) flipFORM - green top/grey base (100 lbs.)(45 kg) flipFORM - yellow top/grey base (100 lbs.)(45 kg) flipFORM - red top/grey base (100 lbs.)(45 kg) flipFORM - grey top/grey base (100 lbs.)(45 kg) flipFORM - black top/black base (100 lbs.)(45 kg)

GRADE LEVEL

2-STEP TIERED SEATING CAPACITY

3-STEP RISER CAPACITY*

grades 1-3

8 students per unit

16 students per unit

grades 4-6

6 students per unit

12 students per unit

*Capacity using the floor as the front row.

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

flipFORMS®

12" (305 mm)

• 025D002 Blue/Grey, 025D003 Green/Grey, 025D004 Yellow/Grey, 025D005 Red/Grey, 025D027 Grey/Grey, 025D028 Black/Black (100 lbs) (45 kg). • Takes on three basic shapes for use as a one tier platform, two tier or three tier unit. • Has two moveable sections hinged onto a core unit. ) mm Flip larger back section onto core for two tiers. 24 5 1 "( Flip both back and front sections onto core unit for three tiers. 60 When both sections are down, flipFORMS can be used as a one tier raised platform. • Blow molded, high-density polyethylene plastic shell provides an easy-to-clean surface that’s super tough. • Shell has skid resistant texture molded into surface for added safety and surefootedness. • Replaceable tops. One Tier • Recessed, molded handholds on front and sides for easy Hinged sections positioning or carrying. in flat position. - Elevated Platform • Built-in wheels in reinforced wheel pockets provide one-person portability. • Units store in an upright position. • Twelve 1-1/2" (38 mm) square skid-resistant, non-marring glides ) positioned on the bottom of the unit. Secured by recessed screws. mm 81 3 ( • Patented hinge design maintains flat surface in all positions. " 15 • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can 12" be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your (305 mm) Wenger representative. ) • Five-year warranty. mm

" (1

2-Step Tiered Seating Capacity

3-Step Riser Capacity*

Grades 1-3

8 students/unit

16 students/unit

Grades 4-6

6 students/unit

12 students/unit

*Capacity using the floor as the front row.

" (7

24" (610 mm)

Grade Level

12" (305 mm)

Two Tier Back hinged section flips onto core unit. - Classroom Seating

)

1 " (1

" 15 m) 1m

(38 Units roll, nest and store in an upright position.

" 15 m) 1m

Wheels and recessed handles make it easy to transport flipFORMS.

" 15 m) 1m

(38

24" (610 mm)

(38

8" (203 mm)

Three Tier Back and front sections flip onto core unit. - Standing Risers - Stairs

)

1 " (1

2018-05

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Poster/Teaching Materials Cabinet • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

169D001._ 457 lb (206 kg) Overall dimensions: 39" wide x 29-1/4" deep x 72" high (991 x 743 x 1829 mm) Two adjustable shelves in lower cabinet, three in upper cabinet Four compartments for storage of posters, charts and other teaching materials: 37-1/2" wide x 27" deep x 4" high (953 x 686 x 102 mm) Includes three medium red bins, four large blue bins and six small yellow bins with labels Small bins are mounted on hangers inside of both doors for easy student access Cabinet construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC Thru-bolt construction on all door hardware Cabinet has locking double doors UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative Cabinet is shipped assembled Ten-year warranty m)

-1/

(74

" (9

)

72" (1829 mm)

Accessories • 166A061 Small Bins (yellow) with mounting brackets, set of 4 • 166A062 Medium Bins (red), set of 4 • 166A063 Large Bins (blue), set of 2

2019-02

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Small Instrument Cabinet • • • • • • • • • • • • •

166E001 290 lbs. (131 kg). Overall dimensions: 36" wide x 23-1/4" deep x 72" high (914 x 591 x 1829 mm). Nine adjustable shelves provide flexibility in organizing various small instruments. Cabinet construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Comes with four small bins, five medium bins and two large bins with labels. Bins come in the primary colors of red, blue and yellow. Small storage bins mount on hangers to either door for easy student access. Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. Thru-bolt construction on all door hardware. Cabinet has locking double doors. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Cabinets are shipped assembled. Ten-year warranty.

Accessories • 166A061 Small Bins (yellow), set of 4 with mounting brackets. • 166A062 Medium Bins (red), set of 4. • 166A063 Large Bins (blue), set of 2.

-1/

9 " (5

" (9

72" (1829 mm)

)

2018-06

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

ORFFgarage® • • • • • • • • • • • • •

168E001._ 431 lbs (194 kg). Comes with four adjustable shelves for storage of various sizes of Orff instruments. Overall dimensions: 48" wide x 29-1/4" deep x 72" high (1219 x 743 x 1829 mm). Floorless lower compartment is designed exclusively for Wenger ORFFmobile. Cabinet construction is 3/4"(19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Edge banding is 1/8" (3 mm) thick PVC Square tubular steel frame in bottom of cabinet provides rigidity and strength. Includes locking double doors. Thru-bolt construction on all door hardware. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Shipped assembled. Ten-year warranty.

ORFFgarage instrument storage capacity:

(12 48" 19 mm

)

72" (1829 mm)

2 - Alto Metallophones 2 - Soprano Metallophones 2 - Soprano Xylophones 5 - Soprano Glockenspiels 5 - Alto Glockenspiels

4" -1/ ) 29 3 mm (74

2018-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

ORFFmobile® • 167D001 - 106 lbs (48 kg). • Overall dimensions: Folded: 44" wide x 24-1/2" deep x 36" high (1118 x 622 x 914 mm). Unfolded: 113" wide x 24-1/2" deep x 35" high (2870 x 622 x 889 mm). • Unique folding design stores instruments compactly and unfolds to provide proper playing surfaces for Orff instruments. • Includes four molded polyethylene surfaces for playing and storage that can be positioned different heights for various sizes of Orff instruments. • Frame is constructed of 0.875" (22 mm) round tubular steel frame in black powder-coat paint finish. • Four black neoprene 4" (102 mm) swivel casters. • Foam-padded leg supports serve as hand grips when in folded position, and also prevent damage to paint finish. • Includes four 1-3/4" diameter mallet holders. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Assembly of wheels required by customer. 44" (1118 mm) • Five-year warranty. Orff instrument capacity*: Folded: 1 - Bass Metallophone or Xylophone 2 - Soprano or Alto Metallophones or Xylophones Unfolded: 1 - Bass Metallophone or Xylophone 2 - Soprano Metallophones or Xylophones 2 - Alto Metallophones or Xylophones

15-1/4" (387 mm) 36" (914 mm) 11-3/4" (299 mm)

*NOTE: Each outer tray will hold four Soprano or Alto Glockenspiels in place of Metallophones or Xylophones in unfolded position. ORFFmobile in Folded Position

24-1/2" (622 mm)

Top View

113" (2870 mm)

35" (899 mm)

Side View

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 13

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Wardrobe Cabinet

84" (2134 mm)

• 145V006 355 lbs (161 kg). • Cabinet construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Body of cabinet matches door except for Oyster, Maple and Pebble where body finish is Oyster. • Three adjustable shelves for flexibility in storage of personal items. • Two pendaflex file drawers for storing personal files. • Storage compartment with hanger rod and fixed shelf for hanging garments. • Lockable full door with individually keyed lock. • 10" x 12" (254 x 305 mm) mirror on inside door. • Overall dimensions: 30" wide x 29-1/4" deep x 84" high (762 x 743 x 2134 mm). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Ten-year warranty. • Shipped assembled with shelf placement needed.

" (7

)

-1/

4 " (7

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 14

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Porcelain Steel MarkerboardMusic Notation Board • The environmental low-gloss magnetic steel surface laminated to a 7/16” thick MDF substrate for extra strength and moisture resistance and framed in anodized aluminum trim. • The surface has environmental advantages of no VOC’s, and is made from a min. 30% post-consumer and post-industrial waste. The surface is 99% recyclable. • Enhance your lessons with the optional permanent ceramic ink music stave lines (5 sets) that have been fused to the surface to provide years of use and assistance with the teaching of music notation. • The surface is engineered to create greater color contrast with dry erase markers. • Marker ghosting is not a problem with the porcelain steel surface, which offers superior erasability. The reduced surface light distortion enhances visibility to provide optimum eye comfort. • Dual purpose surface can be used for both writing and magnetic purposes. • Includes an accessory tray with rubber corners. • Boards provided with L-clips, rawl plugs, and screws for installation. Professional installation available. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Fifty-year warranty. • Other sizes available upon request. Porcelain Steel Markerboard Markerboard without stave lines available in the following sizes: - 174A100.01 - 33-3/4” H x 48” W (857 x 1219 mm) - weight 25 lbs (12 kg). - 174A100.02 - 4’ H x 6’ W (1219 x 1829 mm) - weight 122 lbs (56 kg). - 174A100.03 - 4’ H x 8’ W (1219 x 2438 mm) - weight 145 lbs (66 kg). - 174A100.04 - 4’ H x 10’ W (1219 x 3048 mm) - weight 180 lbs (82 kg). - 174A100.05 - 4’ H x 12’ W (1219 x 3658 mm) - weight 222 lbs (101 kg). - 174A100.06 - 4’ H x 16’ W (1219 x 4877 mm) - weight 290 lbs (132 kg). Music Notation Board Markerboard with stave lines available in the following sizes: - 174A101.22 - 4’ H x 6’ W (1219 x 1829 mm) - weight 122 lbs (56 kg). - 174A101.23 - 4’ H x 8’ W (1219 x 2438 mm) - weight 145 lbs (66 kg). Optional Accessories • 174A024 - 1” Hook Clip. • 174A025 - Flag Holder (w/1” clip). • 174A026 - 1” Map Winder (pair). • 174A028 - Set of 4 Rite-On Markers.

Music Notation Board

Porcelain Steel Markerboard

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 15

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Platinum Reversible Board • The Platinum Reversible Board adds a sleek and contemporary design element to any room. • Providing twice the functional surface of a traditional wall-mounted board, these mobile boards are ideal for presentations, meetings, training and other group instruction. • Choose from a wide variety of surface combinations; environmental porcelain steel with and/or without music stave graphics or natural cork. Porcelain surfaces are also magnetic, adding even more versatility. • The porcelain steel surface has environmental advantages of no VOC's, steel that is made from a min. 30% post-consumer and post-industrial waste, and the surface is 99% recyclable. • The surface rotates 360º and knobs lock the surface securely in place. • Wide base design and 3" locking casters provide safety, stability, and mobility. • Perforated steel accent panel and full-length tray can hold magnets and other accessories. • Marker set is included. • Available in the following board sizes: - 174A300.50 - 40" H x 30" W (1016 x 762 mm) - Environmental Porcelain both sides - weight 72 lbs (33 kg). - 174A300.51 - 40" H x 30" W (1016 x 762 mm) - Environmental Porcelain/natural cork - weight 68 lbs (31 kg). - 174A300.52 - 40" H x 30" W (1016 x 762 mm) - Environmental Porcelain/Porcelain w/music staves - weight 72 lbs (33 kg). - 174A300.60 - 4' H x 6' W (1220 x 1829 mm) - Environmental Porcelain both sides - weight 186 lbs (85 kg). - 174A300.61 - 4' H x 6' W (1220 x 1829 mm) - Environmental Porcelain/natural cork - weight 166 lbs (76 kg). - 174A300.62 - 4' H x 6' W (1220 x 1829 mm) - Environmental Porcelain/Porcelain w/music staves - weight 186 lbs (85 kg). • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Fifty-year warranty on porcelain steel surfaces. • Ten-year warranty on natural cork surfaces. • One-year warranty on frame.

Surface Rotates 360º

55" (1397 mm)

21-1/4" (540 mm)

26" (660 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 16

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Rubber Tack Board • Rubber Tack Board is manufactured from high-density 100% recycled rubber to provide unmatched durability and resiliency. • Rubber Tack Board's superior surface for classrooms, hallways, auditoriums or sports and fitness areas, offering excellent sound and shock absorbent qualities. • The textured surface will not show pin holes, and resists moisture, mold, mildew, bacteria, and chemicals. • Rubber Tack is stain-resistant, non-fading, and easy to maintain. • Color options are black, blue, red and tan. • Available in the following sizes: - 174A202 - 33 3/4" H x 48" W (857 x 1219 mm) - weight 33 lbs (15 kg) - 174A203 - 4' H x 4' W (1219 x 1219 mm) - weight 44 lbs (20 kg) - 174A204 - 4' H x 6' W (1219 x 1829 mm) - weight 66 lbs (30 kg) - 174A205 - 4' H x 8' W (1219 x 2439 mm) - weight 88 lbs (40 kg) - 174A206 - 4' H x 10' W (1219 x 3048 mm) - weight 110 lbs (50 kg) - 174A207 - 4' H x 12' W (1219 x 3658 mm) - weight 132 lbs (60 kg) • Other sizes available upon request. • Boards provided with L-clips for installation. Professional installation available. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Twenty-year warranty.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.d. 17

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Elementary Products

Workstations INTERIORS BINDER

Workstations

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Workstations

Select Lab Workstation

Essential Lab Workstation

Class Piano Workstation

Piano Work Desk

Deluxe Percussion Workstation

Rehearsal Resource Center

Mobile Media Storage

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

SELECT LAB WORKSTATION

Expanded features for your advanced needs. Our new Select Workstations have been ergonomically designed to be more comfortable by positioning music and computer equipment where theyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re most accessible, creating an environment where everything is within easy reach. Wenger workstations are more functional because there is plenty of workspace and room for equipment with unobstructed sightlines and less disruption caused by stacked equipment and tangled cables. Our pull-out shelf is wide enough to choose to place a piano keyboard or computer keyboard, allowing you the flexibility to choose the right ergonomics for your students. Flip up door in the back of the desk, allows easy access to a channel below to keep cords and powerstrips accessible, but out of sight. Many features are optional, so you can create the right solution specific to your needs and equipment. You select if you want adjustable height or a fixed height style. Choose 50" (1270 mm) wide or if you have an 88 key-keyboard a 62" (1575 mm) wide will be the right size for you. Have rack-mount components to store? You can order in 2 unit increments to get just the right amount. We offer several power options and a music holder that can be positioned where you need it.

Select Lab Workstation Fixed Height

Select Lab Workstation Adjustable Height

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

SELECT LAB WORKSTATION SPACIOUS Users love the wide open freedom. There’s plenty of room for a big keyboard and all the other lab tech you want. The expansive desk and shelves allow comfortable spacing for all your hands-on equipment.

Rack-Mount available from two to eight units (sold in two unit increments).

Keyboard Tray

Open

TECHNOLOGICALLY SAVVY These forward-thinking designs keep all your equipment connected, with dedicated spaces in the perfect spot. There’s even a system to keep all your cables and cords neatly concealed, but within reach. MOBILE AND ADJUSTABLE Choose the options that are right for you. Fixed height or adjustable height. 50" or 62" wide (1270 or 1575w mm) for 88 key - keyboards. Rackmount shelf option and multiple accessories to choose from.

COLORS

Wenger Maple

Pebble

Closed

Cable Management

Adjustable Height

Master Power Switch

Oyster

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Cherry

Evening Tigris

• Size/Dimensions: - Available in 2 Desk Sizes - 50" or 62" wide x 30" deep (1270 or 1575w x 762d mm) - Keyboard tray: - 50" (1270 mm) Desk keyboard tray: 353/4" wide x 153/4" deep (908 x 400 mm) - 62" (1575 mm) Desk keyboard tray: 473/4" wide x 153/4"deep (1213 x 400 mm - Fixed height – 291 /2" (749 mm) high - Adjustable height – adjustable from 281 /4" to 311 /4" (718 to 794 mm) high (ADA compliant) • Colors: Wood parts constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade composite wood in colors shown. Desk and shelf surfaces in graphite and metal parts in black powder-coated paint finish. • Includes headphone hook with feature that allows the addition of a padlock. • Keyboard tray is mounted on heavy-duty ball bearing glides. • 4 swivel 4" (102 mm) diameter rolling casters, two locking. • Cable management channel on top of desk. Flip up compartment allows access for mounting and organizing cords and power strips. Clips included to keep cords in place.

Fusion Maple

Fixed Height

Solar Oak

Graphite

ACCESSORIES: • Music Holder • Powerstrip Options - 8 outlet, 15 amp with remote master power switch on 6' (1829 mm) cord with sound dampening and surge protection - 6 outlet power strip with switch (no surge protection) - outlet rack-mount power strip • Rack-mount and shelf - Available in 2 unit increments • Bottom shelf is optional in fixed height only, (adjustable height always includes a bottom shelf)

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Select Lab Workstation • 225D110.__ Fixed Height 50" model weighs 160 lbs (73 kg), 62" model weighs 180 lbs (82 kg). 225D111.__ Adjustable Height 50" model weighs 180 lbs (82 kg), 62" model weighs 195 lbs (88 kg). 225D121.__ Adjustable Height model without Casters 50" model weighs 158 lbs (72 kg), 62" model weighs 175 lbs (79 kg). Weights are with no added accessories. Weight will vary depending on desk width and added accessories. • Workstations are available in 50" or 62" (1270 or 1575 mm) wide x 30" (762 mm) deep. Desk surface is 48" or 60" (1219 or 1524 mm) wide. Fixed Height Model desk height is 29-1/2" (749 mm) Adjustable Height Model desk height can be between 28-1/4" to 32-1/4" (718 to 820 mm). Adjustable Height Model without Casters desk height can be between 28-1/4" to 38" (718 to 965 mm). • Pull-out keyboard tray on 50" models is 35-3/4" wide x 15-3/4" deep (908 x 400 mm) Pull-out keyboard tray on 62" models is 47-3/4" wide x 15-3/4" deep (1213 x 400 mm) Adjustable spacing in 1/2" (13 mm) increments to fit piano keyboards at 5" (127 mm) height or computer keyboards at 2-1/2" (64 mm) height. • Fits through standard 32" (813 mm) doorways. • Workstations are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish. Desktop is contructed of 1-1/8" (29 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde. Desktop and shelves are Graphite color laminate finish. Workstation sides and back are available in Wenger standard colors. • Bottom shelf is optional in fixed height only, adjustable height always includes a bottom shelf. • Legs are constructed of heavy-duty steel tubes. All metal parts finished with black powder-coated paint finish. • Four swivel 4" (102 mm) diameter rubber casters, two locking. • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. • Wiring access on top of desk. Flip up compartment allows access to a wireway channel for mounting and organizing cords and powerstrips. Cords are held in place with included clips. • Grommets are included in the sides and back (three total) for easier cord management. • Includes headphone holder with ability to lock in place with padlock. Accommodates padlock with a 5/16" (8 mm) diameter shackle and up to 3/4" (19 mm) tall. Padlock is not included. Headphone can be mounted on right or left side of keyboard pullout. Accommodates maximum headband size of 2" wide x 1/2" thick (51 x 13 mm). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Shipped ready to assemble. • Ten-year warranty. 50" or m)

m 62

" (7

62" (12

70 or 1

575 mm

)

" 30

(76

29-1/2" (749 mm)

Adjustable Height Select Lab Workstation

70 or 1

) 28-1/4" to 32-1/4" (718 to 819 mm) Without Casters 28-1/4" to 38" (718 to 965 mm)

50" or

62" (12

Fixed Height Select Lab Workstation (shown with Optional Rackmount Shelf Assembly)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information Accessories Rackmount Shelf • 225D227 • Flip up shelf to access rackmount components. • Rackmount stackable in two unit increments. • Rackmount power strip can be included. Acrylic Music Holder • 222A151 2.5 lbs (1 kg). • 20" wide x 11-1/2" high (508 x 292 mm). Six Unit Power Strip • 256A013 5 lbs (2 kg). • Six outlets, 15 amps, 120VAC, UL listed, 10' cord. Eight Unit Power Strip • 225D242 5 lbs (2 kg). • Eight outlets, 15 amps, 120VAC. • Remote power switch on a 6' cord with sound dampening and surge protection. Verifying dimensions for fit of equipment Note: To determine what size desktop is needed and whether the equipment will fit, lay out equipment as it would be for use. Measure the width and depth. Compare to the width and depth of the desktop. Piano keyboards can be placed on the pullout shelf, however the maximum height for the keyboard is 5" (127 mm). The pullout shelf depth is 15-3/4" (400 mm), the width is either 35-3/4" (908 mm) on a 50" desktop or 47-3/4" (1213 mm) on a 62" desktop. The pullout shelf is adjustable in heights of 1/2" (13 mm) increments. The adjustable height model is recommended if placing a piano keyboard on the pullout shelf. At the lowest position on the fixed height model, the clearance may not be sufficient for most students.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 4

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

ESSENTIAL LAB WORKSTATION

Essential Lab Workstation - Economical, sleek design to meet the needs of modern labs The Essential Lab Workstation is designed to maximize limited space and encourage collaborative sessions in the classroom. The unique C-shaped frame minimizes aisle space necessary to enter and exit the workstation and allows students to move easily from station to station. The Essential Lab comes standard widths of 32" and 42" (813 and 1067 mm), but can be customized to fit your room and your equipment in any width between 32" and 49" (813 and 1245 mm). This workstation is designed to accommodate a variety of technology and comes standard with a pull-out keyboard tray and cord management system. Built to withstand institutional use, the Essential Lab is constructed of industrial grade composite wood and reinforced with 14-gauge steel. It tough, attractive and smartly designed to create an efficient and functional music lab in your facility.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

ESSENTIAL LAB WORKSTATION MODERN TECHNICAL DESIGN One look says, sleek and smart. It has economical, space for PC’s, iMacs, iPads, and keyboards.

ENHANCED COLLABORATION Now, sharing inspiration is easier than ever. The C-shaped frame opens leg room under adjoining stations for a tighter, more engaged setup.

PURCHASE ONLINE!

ROBUST CONSTRUCTION

SPACE EFFICIENT

It’s elegant but tough, engineered to hold up to 175 lb. (78 kg.) of equipment with rock-solid stability. The 3⁄4" (19 mm) wood desk is reinforced with a 14-gauge steel profile. The welded 16-gauge tubular steel frame has internal steel counterweights for added strength. Designed to withstand years of student use.

This design is pure streamlined strength. The compact size and proprietary frame create a smaller footprint and require less aisle space. The solid desk and pull-out shelf optimize equipment. Features like the lockable headphone holder add value. It is the essential design for limited space.

STANDARD COLORS:

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • Size/Dimensions: • Desk standard sizes: 32" and 42" (813 x 1067 mm) • Custom deck sizes: any width 32" to 49" (813 x 1245 mm) • Desk depth: 22" (559 mm) • Desk Height: 273/4" (283/4" with spacers) (70 5 / 730 mm) • Height to keyboard tray: 25" (26" with spacers) (635 / 660 mm) • Pull-out keyboard tray: 24"w x 153/4"d x 2"h (610 x 40 0 x 5 1 mm) • Desk constructed of durable 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade composite wood • Desk reinforced with 14-gauge steel profile • Desk edging is 1 /8" (3 mm) radiused PVC • Frame constructed of welded 16 gauge tubular steel with internal steel counterweights for added stability and strength • All metal parts finished with black textured powder coat paint • Non-marking leg glides • Pull-out computer keyboard shelf mounted on precision drawer glides • Lockable headphone holder, mountable on either side • Dedicated space for optional power strip and cordmanagement clip system • Desk grommet for easy cord access • Durable polyester laminate desk finish in Wenger standard colors; please see back for details

Cherry

Evening Tigris

Fusion Maple

Wenger Maple

Pebble

Solar Oak

Oyster

Graphite

Headphone Holder headphone holder with ability to lock in place with padlock (not provided, with shackle 5/16" diameter x 3/4" tall) (8 x 19 mm). Headphone can be mounted on right or left side of keyboard pullout. Accommodates maximum headband size of 2" wide x 1/2" thick (51 x 13 mm).

ACCESSORIES: 6 outlet powerstrip with switch 10' (3048 mm) cord, 15 amp, UL listed, 120 VAC

Steel Spacers increase height of desk by 1" (25 mm).

Acrylic Music Holder 20" wide x 111/2" high (508 x 292 mm) CPU Holder adjusts for different heights and widths: Minimum and Maximum Dimensions for CPU’s Height: 131/2" – 163/4" (343 - 425 mm) Width: 51/2" -73/4" (140 - 197 mm) Depth: Maximum 18" (457 m) Mounts on right side of desk. Rated weight – 55 lbs. (25 kg) Must be ordered at time of desk purchase.

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Essential Lab Workstation • 256A001.__ • Desk standard sizes 32" or 42" (813 or 1067 mm). Available in custom sizes up to 49" (1245 mm) wide. 42" desk size weighs 60 lbs (27 kg) with no added accessories. Weight will vary depending on desk width and added accessories. • Overall dimensions: - Desktop is 22" (559 mm) deep - Height to top of desk is 27-3/4" (705 mm) standard, 28-3/4" (731 mm) with spacers - Height to keyboard tray is 25" (635 mm) standard, 26" (661 mm) with spacers. • Lower pull out tray for computer keyboard, mounted on precision drawer glides. Keyboard space allowance: 24"w x 15-3/4" deep x 2" tall (610 x 400 x 51 mm). • Desk is constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. • All metal parts finished with black powder-coated paint finish. • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. • Desk reinforced with 14-gauge steel profile with space to mount optional powerstrip on right or left and holds cords in place with included clips. • Grommet on desk surface included for access to cord management in back. • Frame is constructed of welded 16-gauge tubular steel with internal steel counterweights for added stability and strength. • Frame includes non-marking leg glides. • Includes headphone holder with ability to lock in place with padlock. Accommodates padlock with a 5/16" (8 mm) diameter shackle and up to 3/4" (19 mm) tall. Padlock is not included. Headphone can be mounted on right or left side of keyboard pullout. Accommodates maximum headband size of 2" (51 mm) wide x 1/2" (13 mm) thick. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by 22" (55 m) 9m contacting your Wenger representative. 067 m 1 r o m) 3 • Shipped ready to assemble. 2" (81 4 r o 32" • Ten-year warranty.

Accessories Acrylic Music Holder • 222A151 2.5 lbs (1 kg). • 20" wide x 11-1/2" high (508 x 292 mm). Power Strip • 256A013 5 lbs (2 kg). Headphone • 6 outlets, 15 amps, 120VAC, Holder UL listed, 10’ cord. Steel Spacers • 256A013 • Increase height of desk by 1" (25 mm). CPU Holder • Adjusts for different heights and widths: Minimum and maximum dimesions for CPUs: Height 13.5" to 16.75" (343 to 425 mm) Width 5.5" to 7.75" (140 to 197 mm) Maximum depth: 18" (457 mm). • Mounts on right side of desk. Rated weight - 55 lbs. (25 kg). CPU Holder must be ordered at time of desk purchase.

27-3/4" (705 mm) Keyboard Tray Optional CPU Holder

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 7

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

CLASS PIANO WORKSTATION

Within reach, without crowding. The Class Piano Workstation is designed with your students in mind - making it easier for them to organize their piano space. The ergonomic design places everything within comfortable reach without crowding piano keys, controls, or speakers. And thereâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s more surface space for their computer, monitor, keyboard, mouse and music. The Class Piano Workstation is built solid and fits securely onto flat-top 76-key and 88-key digital upright pianos. The computer keyboard shelf slides slightly forward providing simultaneous access to piano keys and keyboard. Or it can slide completely out of the way when not in use. And the transparent acrylic Music Holder puts music at eye level without creating a barrier to the front of the room.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

CLASS PIANO WORKSTATION SECURE

ERGONOMIC

It’s perfectly stable and perfectly safe for your instrument. Removable, no-residue suction cups securely fasten the workstation to the top of most stand-alone 76-key and 88-key digital pianos. The workstation also features adjustable supports to better fit electronic piano tops.

Wenger excels at optimizing function in limited spaces and that is the essence of this design. All elements are right where you want them, within comfortable reach. The pullout keyboard shelf lets you work on both keyboards simultaneously, and the spacious desktop provides lots of room for monitors, speakers, and other accessories.

AESTHETIC A product this smart and sophisticated should look the part, and it does. The strong, streamlined look is a fitting crown for any digital upright. To maintain appearances, the back cover can secure and conceal any cords and power strip. Choose from a variety of attractive finish options to create your own custom aesthetic.

STANDARD COLORS: Cherry

Evening Tigris

Fusion Maple

Wenger Maple

Pebble

Solar Oak

Oyster

Reinforced construction that looks good, lasts long and handles the heaviest of loads. The extra wide platform can hold larger monitors and hard drives and still have plenty of room for students to work. Durable polyester laminate available in seven color combinations, the workstation is an attractive accent to any piano. And wiring is concealed and protected by a back panel cover that includes a 6-outlet power strip.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • Size/Dimensions: • 60"w x 18"d x 5"h (1524 x 457 x 127 mm) • Durable 3/4" (19mm) reinforced plywood platform • Fits most 76-key and 88-key flat-top, upright pianos • Attaches securely to pianos with eight rubber suction cups • Spacious 16"w x 18"d (406 x 457 mm) desk areas on each side accommodate large monitors and CPU’s • Pull-out computer keyboard shelf slides out of the way when not in use • Clear acrylic music holder 20"w x 111 /2"h (508 x 292 mm) • Mouse pad • Back cover panel conceals cords and protects wiring • Two wire-access holes lined with plastic sleeves • U.L.®-listed 6-outlet power strip • Durable polyester laminate desk finish in Wenger standard colors PURCHASE ONLINE!

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Class Piano Workstation • 225C024._ 56 lbs (25 kg). • Construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. • Includes 20" wide x 11-1/2" high (508 x 292 mm) acrylic music holder. • Built-in 15 amp, 6-outlet power strip, UL listed. • Computer terminal shelf measures 18" deep x 16" wide (457 x 406 mm), both left and right hand usage. • Pull-out computer keyboard tray adjusts for many different types of applications. • Rubber cupped feet attach firmly to most makes of digital pianos with a flat top surface. • Plastic cover to protect and conceal wiring is included. • Mouse pad is included. • Adjustable side panels to fit both 88 and 76-key free standing digital pianos. • Outside vertical supports have two adjustment positions, 46.69" and 52.25" (1186 and 1327 mm) to fit various electronic piano top profiles. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • U.S. Patent D365,465.

)

(4 8"

60" (

16" (4 06 mm)

1524

mm)

9" mm) 29

28.25

5.25 (133 " mm)

" (71

8 mm

) Adju s 52.25 tment Po s " ition an (132 7 and d 46.689" s: 1186 mm)

Two

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 10

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

PIANO WORK DESK

Digital Keyboards become multimedia workstations Todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s most popular Yamaha digital pianos now have the perfect finishing touch. The Wenger Piano Workdesk attaches directly to your Yamaha digital piano, models YPG635 and DGX630, to create a stable work surface for multimedia components. This work desk gives you plenty of room for all your piano accompaniments, and all at the ideal height. Simple, stylish, and stable, itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s the smart way to optimize your time at the keyboard. The attached computer shelf or work desk allows work space above digital piano. The Piano Work Desk connects at the cross brace of your piano stand for easy installation that does not require additional fasteners.

Piano stand not included

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information

PIANO WORK DESK

WORKSTATION COLORS Wenger Maple

Pebble

Oyster

Evening Tigris

Fusion Maple

Solar Oak

Cherry

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • • • • • •

• • • •

Allows for better usage of space Desk to hold computer or equipment, books and music Fits on digital piano, Yamaha YPG635 and DGX630 Connects to piano stand with existing fasteners, no need to add holes Slot to move music stand from piano to desk Heavy-duty polyester oyster laminate is adhered to 3/4" (19 mm) thermofused industrial-grade composite wood with 3 mm vinyl edgebanding on all edges Reinforced for strength with steel sheet metal with grey powder-coat paint finish Supported by steel tubes with grey powder-coat paint finish Desk dimensions are 59.5" long x 10" wide (1511 x 254 mm) 10-year warranty

PURCHASE ONLINE!

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.e. 12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Piano Work Desk Construction • 225A100 33 lbs (15 kg). • Heavy-duty polyester oyster laminate is adhered to 3/4” (19 mm) thermofused industrial-grade composite wood with 3 mm vinyl edgebanding on all edges. • Reinforced for strength with steel sheet metal with grey powder-coat paint finish. • Supported by steel uprights with grey powder-coat paint finish. • Surface dimensions are 59-1/2” long x 10” deep (1511 x 254 mm). Performance Requirements • Allows for better usage of space. • Creates a work surface to hold computers, equipment, books or music. • Fits on Yamaha YPG635 and DGX630 digital pianos. • Connects to directly to the piano stand with existing fasteners, no need to add holes. • Slot to move an existing music tray from the piano to the work desk. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Ten-year warranty.

" (2

)

-1/

5 " (1

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Interiors Binder | 02.e. 13

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Workstations

Storage INTERIORS BINDER

Storage

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

AcoustiCabinets®

Corner Storage Cabinets

Stringed Instrument Cabinet

Stringed Instrument Rack

Tuba/Sousaphone Mobile Storage

Guitar Rack

Percussion Cabinet

Media Storage

Robe and Uniform Storage

Music Library System

Music Sorting Rack

Folio Cabinets

Rack ‘n Roll® Garment Racks

Storage

UltraStor® Storage Cabinets

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

UltraStor® Storage Cabinets

Our original, trusted and proven storage cabinets. Our patented polyethylene shelves are just part of the best-built, most-reliable storage cabinets available. Heavy-duty hardware and top-quality doors further ensure reliable day-to-day operation and unparalleled durability when you buy Wenger storage cabinets. UltraStor cabinets are also designed to look great with virtually any décor. They're available in a range of sizes, colors and styles to fit a wide variety of needs. That includes different door types for different applications. Plus, UltraStor cabinets are modular so you can rearrange and even add units as needed.

Performance Requirements

• Choice of solid doors, straight grille doors or no doors • Waterfall grille doors available for an extra charge • Polyester laminate and industrial grade composite wood core resists chipping and looks new years longer than other laminates • Shelves feature patented ventilation ridges and rounded front edges, improving airflow crucial to musical instrument, equipment, and garment longevity • Load-tested hinges and lock assemblies stand up to institutional use • 85-5/8" (2175 mm), 69-3/4" (1772 mm) and 38-5/16" (973 mm) heights available to meet your students' needs Middle school and elementary school students cannot easily reach storage compartments more than 68" (1727 mm) off the floor • Standard 27-1/2" (699 mm) wide and 21" (533 mm) narrow widths available • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

Construction

• Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Available with right- or left-hinged (standard) doors for easy access • Bolt-through construction maintains superior door and hardware condition, year after year • Seismic-compliant bracing available upon request as a special order • Available in several core substrates to meet your specific needs: no formaldehyde added industrial grade composite wood (standard), fire-rated, moisture-resistant, FSC certified and Vencore (plywood)

Cabinet #4 with wood compartment doors

Cabinet #6 with straight grille compartment doors

Cabinet #4 with waterfall grille compartment doors

Cabinet #4 without doors

Cabinet #4 with full wood door

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

AcoustiCabinets®

Need to have instrument storage in your rehearsal room? Wenger's unique patented solution minimizes the loss of cubic volume, provides sound absorption, and helps eliminate flutter echo caused by direct sound reflection. After working closely with acoustical consultants, Wenger has developed an instrument storage cabinet that combines specially designed grille doors, acoustically absorptive material and reliable durability to produce storage that can help enhance the room's acoustical performance.

Performance Requirements

• Waterfall design on grille doors provides a distinctive look, minimizes a room's cubic volume loss and reduces vibration • Solid steel lockable grille doors provide protection from theft or damage • Acoustically absorptive material at the back of the AcoustiCabinet helps eliminate direct sound reflection while absorbing high and low frequencies • Environmentally friendly, acoustically absorptive material helps eliminate sound reflection • Patented polyethylene shelves, bolt-through construction, and heavy-duty hardware for unmatched durability • Polyester laminate and industrial grade composite wood core resists chipping and looks new years longer than other laminates • Shelves feature patented ventilation ridges and rounded front edges, improving airflow crucial to musical instrument, equipment, and garment longevity • Load-tested hinges and lock assemblies stand up to institutional use • 85-5/8" (2175 mm), 69-3/4" (1772 mm) and 38-5/16" (973 mm) heights available to meet your students' needs Middle school and elementary school students cannot easily reach storage compartments more than 68" (1727 mm) off the floor • Standard 27-1/2" (699 mm) wide and 21" (533 mm) narrow widths available • Acoustical performance, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for four 27-1/2"w x 21-3/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 552 x 2175 mm) in compliance with testing standards defined by ASTM C423-02a and E795-05 when installed as recommended • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

Construction

• Available in all standard Wenger cabinet sizes 1-28, 42 and 51-61 standard and narrow • Compartment grille door sizes are available for all standard Wenger cabinet sizes 1-28 and 51-61 • Corner Cabinets not available in this configuration • Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Available with right- or left-hinged (standard) doors for easy access • Bolt-through construction maintains superior door and hardware condition, year after year • Seismic-compliant bracing available upon request as a special order • Available in several core substrates to meet your specific needs: no formaldehyde added industrial grade composite wood (standard), fire-rated, moisture-resistant, FSC certified, and Vencore (plywood).

Cabinet #4

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Adjustable Shelf Storage Option

The adjustable shelf design for UltraStor and AcoustiCabinets gives options. Now when programs change, adjust cabinets to adapt to new storage needs. Cabinets are easy to reconfigure with no tools and it takes just minutes.

Performance Requirements

• Offered for Wenger UltraStor and AcoustiCabinets • Available in multiple heights and widths in a variety of single, double and triple column configurations • Each cabinet includes one fixed bottom shelf and two adjustable height shelves per column. Additional shelf packs are available Each shelf pack will complete one row (one shelf for each column). - 84" (2134 mm) tall cabinets can fit up to eight adjustable shelves, creating up to nine compartments in each column - 68" (1727 mm) tall cabinets can fit up to six adjustable shelves, creating up to seven compartments in each column • Patent pending adjustable height shelf uses a swing pin and latch design • Environmentally friendly, acoustically absorptive material helps eliminate sound reflection • Patented polyethylene shelves, bolt-through construction, and heavy-duty hardware for unmatched durability • Polyester laminate and industrial grade composite wood core resists chipping and looks new years longer than other laminates • Shelves feature patented ventilation ridges and rounded front edges, improving airflow crucial to musical instrument, equipment, and garment longevity • Load-tested hinges and lock assemblies stand up to institutional use • Standard 27-1/2" (699 mm) wide and 21" (533 mm) narrow widths available • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

Construction

• Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Available with right- or left-hinged (standard) doors for easy access • Bolt-through construction maintains superior door and hardware condition, year after year • Available in several core substrates to meet your specific needs: no formaldehyde added industrial grade composite wood (standard), moisture-resistant and FSC certified

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Cabinet Specifications - UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets #1 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 19-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 489 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 282 lb (128 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 15 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#2 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 367 lb (166 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 15 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#3 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 319 lb (145 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 695 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm), 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 9 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes, and 1 french horn, alto horn or snare drum

#4 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 313 lb (142 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm) Stores: 10 trumpets, cornets or alto saxophones

#5 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 383 lb (173 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)* Stores: 10 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor saxophones or alto clarinets

#6 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 285 lb (129 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 695 x 371 mm) 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 695 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm), 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 6 trumpets, cornets, alto saxophones and 1 french horn, alto horn or snare drum

#7 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 351 lb (159 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 949 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm), 19-1/2" (495 mm)* Stores: 6 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor Sax or alto clarinets, and 1 baritone horn, euphonium or mellophone

#8 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 230 lb (104 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 78-1/2"h (648 x 695 x 1993 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 1 string bass, contra bass clarinet, or bass drum or use for general storage

#9 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 238 lb (108 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (648 x 695 x 371 mm) 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 61-7/8"h (648 x 695 x 1572 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 1 cello or guitar, and 1 snare drum or use for general storage

#10 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 248 lb (112 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 695 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 3 french horns, alto horns or snare drums

#11 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 297 lb (135 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 949 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 3 baritones, euphoniums or mellophones

#12 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 282 lb (105 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 23-3/4"h (1181 x 695 x 603 mm) Stores: 3 baritone saxophones, bass clarinets, bassoons, field drums, or snare drums or use for general storage

Standard compartment sizes. Cabinets are shown without doors and 38" height cabinets are shown without work surface tops. *Narrow width sizes do not fit trombones. Wider tenor saxophone cases may not fit in #5, #7, #24, #28, #55 and #61 narrow compartment sizes.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Cabinet Specifications - UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets #13 Cabinet size: 14-3/8"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (365 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 11-3/8" (289 mm) Weight: 199 lb (90 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (31 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm) Stores: 5 trumpets, cornets or alto saxophones

#14 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 288 lb (131 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 37-3/8"h (648 x 949 x 949 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 2 bass drums, field drums, snare drums or parade drums

#15 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 235 lb (107 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 37"h (1181 x 695 x 940 mm) Stores: 2 bass drums, field drums, snare drums, parade drums, tri-toms, quads, tubas or sousaphones (bell detached)

#17 Cabinet size: 60-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1537 x 997 x 2175 mm) Weight: 348 lb (158 kg) Compartment sizes: 58-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 83-1/4"h (1486 x 949 x 2115 mm) Stores: 1 timpani, chimes, small vibes and xylophones, marimbas and gongs Adjustable height shelf depth: 26-3/16" (665 mm)

#18 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 286 lb (129 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 48-1/4"h (203 x 695 x 1226 mm) Stores: 3 guitars and 6 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#19 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Weight: 340 lb (154 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 37-3/8"d x 38-1/4"h (203 x 949 x 972 mm) Stores: 6 acoustic guitars

#20 Cabinet size: 10"w x 19-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (254 x 489 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 8" (203 mm) Weight: 136 lb (62 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 5 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#21 Cabinet size: 18-3/4"w x 19-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (476 x 489 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 14-3/4" (375 mm) Weight: 207 lb (94 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 10 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#22 Cabinet size: 10"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (254 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 8" (203 mm) Weight: 220 lb (100 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 5 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#23 Cabinet size: 18-3/4"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (476 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 14-3/4" (375 mm) Weight: 320 lb (145 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 10 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#24 Cabinet size: 14-3/8"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (365 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 11-3/8" (289 mm) Weight: 229 lb (104 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)* Stores: 5 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor saxophones or alto clarinets

#25 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 19-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 489 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 315 lb (143 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 12 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#26 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 299 lb (136 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 12 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#27 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 256 lb (116 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm) Stores: 8 trumpets, cornets or alto saxophones

#28 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 997 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 302 lb (137 kg) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)* Stores: 8 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor saxophones or alto clarinets

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information #30

#29

Cabinet Specifications - UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets #29

#47

#45

#30

#29 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 265 lb (120 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 48-1/4"h (203 x 695 x 123 mm) Stores: 3 guitars and 3 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes #43

#47

#44

#43

#42 Cabinet size: 60-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1537 x 997 x 2175 mm) Weight: 424 lb (192 kg) Compartment sizes: 58-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 81"h (1486 x 949 x 2057 mm) Stores: up to 3 bass, 4 cellos, 18 guitars, 20 violins or violas

#45

#30

#45

#45 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 270 lb (122 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (648 x 949 x 371 mm) 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 61-7/8"h (648 x 949 x 1572 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 1 snare drum and 1 cello or guitar

#29

#50 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 997 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 118 lb (54 kg) - without HPL work surface top 148 lb (67 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 949 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 1 baritones, euphoniums or mellophones

*NEW* 46 #30

*NEW* 66

#30 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 181 lb (82 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 61-7/8"h (648 x 695 x 1572 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: #47 or guitar #43 1 cello #44

#41 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 48-1/2"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 1232 x 2175 mm) Weight: 348 lb (158 kg) Stationary and revolving shelf models available for instrument, garment and flag/rifle storage. Contact your Wenger representative for best utilization details.

#44

#43 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 303 lb (137 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (648 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 5 trombones, bass trombones or orchestra bells #45 #30

#47 #29

#29

#46 *NEW* 65 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 308 lb (140 kg) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 78-1/2"h (203 x 695 x 1994 mm) Stores: flags, 3 contrabassoons or 3 electric guitars

*NEW*

#45

#51 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 19-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 489 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 108 lb (49 kg) - without HPL work surface top 128 lb (58 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 6 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#44 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 242 lb (110 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 37-3/8"h (648 x 695 x 949 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 2 bass drums #43

#44

#47 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 246 lb (112 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (648 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 5 mellophones, marching trombones or snare drums #29 #30 #52 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 150 lb (68 kg) - without HPL work surface top 180 lb (82 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 6 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Cabinet Specifications - UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets #53 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 113 lb (51 kg) - without HPL work surface top 143 lb (65 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 25"h (648 x 695 x 635 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 1 french horn, alto horn or snare drum

#54 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 127 lb (58 kg) - without HPL work surface top 157 lb (71 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm) Stores: 4 trumpets, cornets or alto saxophones

#55 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (699 x 997 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 162 lb (74 kg) - without HPL work surface top 203 lb (92 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)* Stores: 4 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor saxophones or alto clarinets

#56 Cabinet size: 14-3/8"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (365 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 11-3/8" (289 mm) Weight: 85 lb (39 kg) - without HPL work surface top 101 lb (46 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm) Stores: 2 trumpets, cornets, or alto saxophones

#57 Cabinet size: 10"w x 19-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (254 x 489 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 8" (203 mm) Weight: 57 lb (26 kg) - without HPL work surface top 64 lb (29 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 2 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#58 Cabinet size: 18-3/4"w x 19-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (476 x 489 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 14-3/4" (375 mm) Weight: 81 lb (37 kg) - without HPL work surface top 95 lb (43 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 441 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 4 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#59 Cabinet size: 10"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (25 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 8" (203 mm) Weight: 100 lb (46 kg) - without HPL work surface top 10"w x 29-1/4"d x 39-7/16"h 111 lb (50 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores:*NEW* 46 2 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

#60 Cabinet size: *NEW* 46 18-3/4"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h *NEW* 65 (476 x 743 x 973 mm) *NEW* 46 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work surface top Narrow cabinet width: 14-3/4" (375 mm) Weight: 124 lb (56 kg) - without HPL work surface top 145 lb (66 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (203 x 695 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm) Stores: 4 clarinets, flutes, piccolos or oboes

*NEW* 65

#62 Cabinet size: 36"w x 29-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (914 x 743 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) with HPL work surface top Weight: 197 lb (90 kg) - without HPL work surface top 238 lb (108 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 16-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d x 26-1/2"h (416 x 695 x 673 mm) *NEW* Drawer sizes: *NEW* 66 15-11/16"w x 19-5/8"d x 4-3/8"h (398 x 498 x 111 mm) Stores: use for general storage

#65 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 210 lb (95 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 30-3/4"h (648 x 695 x 781 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 2 french horns, alto horns, snare drums or mellophones

*NEW* 66

*NEW*

*NEW* 66 #66 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 997 x 1772 mm) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Weight: 249 lb (113 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d x 30-3/4"h (648 x 949 x 781 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm) Stores: 2 baritone horns, euphoniums or mellophones

#61 Cabinet size: 14-3/8"w x 39-1/4"d x 38-5/16"h (365 x 997 x 973 mm) 39-7/16"h (1002 mm) - with HPL work *NEW* 65 surface top Narrow cabinet width: 11-3/8" (289 mm) Weight: 102 lb (47 kg) - without HPL work surface top 123 lb (56 kg) - with HPL work surface top Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d x 14-5/8"h (314 x 949 x 371 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)* Stores: 2 trombones, bassoons, bass clarinets, violins, violas, tenor saxophones or alto clarinets *NEW* 67 #67 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (1232 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 206 lb (94 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 30-3/4"h (1181 x 695 x 781 mm) Stores: 2 baritone saxophones, bass clarinets or field/snare drums

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Cabinet Specifications - Adjustable Shelf Storage Option #70 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 19-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 489 x 2175 mm) Weight: 282 lb (128 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d (203 x 441 mm) Compartment height range: 7-5/8" to 78-1/8"h (194 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm)

#71 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 367 lb (166 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d (203 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7-5/8" to 78-1/8"h (194 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm)

#72 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 313 lb (142 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d (314 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7-5/8" to 78-1/8"h (194 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)

#73 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Weight: 383 lb (173 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d (31 x 949 mm) Compartment height range: 7-5/8" to 78-1/8"h (194 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)

#74 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 248 lb (112 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d (648 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7" to 78-1/8"h (178 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm)

#75 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 997 x 2175 mm) Weight: 297 lb (135 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d (648 x 949 mm) Compartment height range: 7" to 78-1/8"h (178 to 1984 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm)

#76 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 282 lb (105 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d (1181 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 6-7/16" to 76-3/8"h (164 to 1940 mm)

#77 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 19-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 489 x 1772 mm) Weight: 315 lb (143 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 17-3/8"d (203 x 441 mm) Compartment height range: 7-7/8" to 62-1/4"h (200 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm)

#78 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 299 lb (136 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 8"w x 27-3/8"d (203 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7-7/8" to 62-1/4"h (200 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 6" (152 mm)

#79 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 256 lb (116 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 27-3/8"d (314 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7-7/8" to 62-1/4"h (200 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)

#80 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 997 x 1772 mm) Weight: 302 lb (137 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 12-3/8"w x 37-3/8"d (314 x 949 mm) Compartment height range: 7-7/8" to 62-1/4"h (200 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 9-3/8" (238 mm)

#81 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 195 lb (88 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d (648 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 7-7/8" to 62-1/4"h (200 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm)

#82 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 39-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (699 x 997 x 1772 mm) Weight: 242 lb (110 kg) Narrow cabinet width: 21-1/2" (546 mm) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 37-3/8"d (648 x 949 mm) Compartment height range: 7-5/16" to 62-1/4"h (186 to 1581 mm) Narrow compartment width: 19-1/2" (495 mm)

#83 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 69-3/4"h (1232 x 743 x 1772 mm) Weight: 206 lb (94 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d (1181 x 695 mm) Compartment height range: 6-7/16" to 60-1/2"h (164 to 1537 mm)

Standard compartment sizes. Cabinets are shown without doors.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Typical Drawings UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets Band Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets 1. The set capacities are based on storing one instrument per compartment. 2. These drawings are not to scale. 3. Plan and Elevation Views shown in Typical Drawing section. NOTE: Cabinet CAD and Revit symbols are available, please contact Wenger. Cabinets shown without doors. Qty. Description

Set B-85 85 Band Instruments

34' 8-1/4" (10.57 m)

85 band

34'-8 1/4"

85 band

3 20

85 band

34'-8 1/4"

3 20

34'-841/4"

17 1

3 20

3 20 3 20

Set B-100 100 Band 100 bandInstruments 100 band

13 13

100 band

13 10

10 10

13 10

10 1

13 10

13 10 1

13 10

120 band

13 13

1 1

10 10

1 1

21 22

15 4

10 4

48'-0" 48'-0"

10 20 4

1 1

15 15

21 22

4 15 40'-11 1/4"

40' 11-1/4" (12.48 m)

21 22

40'-11 1/4"

120 band Set B-120 120 Band Instruments 120 band

40'-11 1/4"

21 22

13 10

1 1

1248'-0"

10 20 4

48' 0" (14.63 m) 12 2

10 20 4

10 20 4 10 20

12 12

2 2

#1 Cabinet

#3 Cabinet

#4 Cabinet

62'-11 1/4"

150 band

62'-11 1/

150 band

1 PRODUCTS #7 Cabinet 10 10 10 13 20 12 WENGER 1 1 150 band 2DESCRIPTION #10 Cabinet QTY. 24 7 24 10 10 10 13 12 WENGER PRODUCTS 20 1 1 2 QTY. #01 1 CABINET #12 Cabinet 24 7 24 DESCRIPTION #03 CABINET 10 10 10 13 12 1 WENGER 1 PRODUCTS #15 Cabinet 20 1 1 #01 CABINET 2 #04 CABINET 2 QTY. 24 7 24 1DESCRIPTION #17 Cabinet #03 CABINET 1 #07 CABINET 1 #01 CABINET 22 #04 CABINET 1 CABINET #20 Cabinet 7' 6" 2(2286 mm) #10 CABINET 1 1Rough #03 (Min. #07 CABINET 2 CABINET #24 Cabinet 1 #12 #04 22 Opening) #10CABINET CABINET #15 CABINET 1 14 Total #07 1 1 #12CABINET CABINET #17 CABINET CABINET 1 10 1 10 1 10 13 20 12 #10 21 #15 CABINET 24 7 24 #20 CABINET CABINET 1 1 #12 #17 CABINET 1 10 1 10 1 10 13 20 12 #24 CABINET CABINET #15 121 24 7 24 #20 CABINET 14 20 #17 12 10 1 10 1 10 13 12 #24CABINET CABINET 24 7 24 #20 CABINETQty. Description 1 14 #24 CABINET 2 2 #1 Cabinet 14 #4 Cabinet WENGER 2PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION 1 #7 Cabinet WENGER PRODUCTS 7 11 24 17 24 2 QTY. #013 CABINET 4 4 10 10 #10 Cabinet DESCRIPTION 1 #041PRODUCTS CABINET 2 WENGER 7 11 24 17 24 #11 Cabinet #01 CABINET 2 4 4 10 10 #07 CABINET 1 QTY. 1 DESCRIPTION #04 CABINET 2 #13 Cabinet 3 #102 CABINET CABINET 7 11 24 17 24 #01 2 4 4 10 10 #07 CABINET 1 1 #15 Cabinet #112 CABINET CABINET 1 #04 23 #10 CABINET #17 Cabinet #131 CABINET CABINET #07 121 #11 CABINET #151 CABINET CABINET 2 #21 Cabinet 7' 3 6"2(2286 mm)#10 #13 CABINET (Min. #171 CABINET CABINET 1 Rough #11 1 #22 Cabinet #15 CABINET 2 Opening) 1 #21 CABINET CABINET #13 21 #17 CABINET #24 Cabinet 7 11 24 17 24 1 #222 CABINET CABINET #15 21 4 10 1 10 4 #21 CABINET 18 CABINET Total #24 #17 CABINET 121 7 11 24 17 24 #22 CABINET 4 10 1 10 4 18 1 #21 CABINET #24 CABINET 2 7 11 24 17 24 1 18 #22 CABINET 4 10 1 10 4 #24 CABINET 2 Qty. Description 18 #1 Cabinet WENGER 3PRODUCTS 15 4 10 QTY. 1 #2 Cabinet DESCRIPTION 5 11 24 17 24 WENGER PRODUCTS 3 QTY. #012 CABINET #4 Cabinet 15 4 10 DESCRIPTION 11 24 17 24 1 5 #021PRODUCTS CABINET #5 Cabinet 3 WENGER #01 CABINET #04 CABINET 2 15 4 10 DESCRIPTION 5 11 24 17 24 #02 1QTY. 3 CABINET #10 Cabinet #05 CABINET 1 32 #01 #04CABINET CABINET #11 Cabinet #101 CABINET CABINET #02 131 #05 CABINET 1 #12 Cabinet #11 CABINET 1 #04 23 #10CABINET CABINET 1 #122 CABINET CABINET #13 Cabinet #05 1 #11 CABINET 1 #132 CABINET CABINET 2 7' 3 6"1(2286 mm)#10 #15 Cabinet #12 CABINET (Min. #15 CABINET CABINET 15 4 10 5 11 24 17 24 12 2 Rough #11 #13 1 CABINET #17 Cabinet #17 CABINET CABINET 1Opening) #12 1 #15 CABINET 2 15 4 10 5 11 24 17 24 #20 Cabinet #201 CABINET CABINET 1 #13 21 #17 CABINET 2 #24 Cabinet #24 CABINET 2 #15 CABINET 2 15 4 10 5 11 24 17 24 #20 CABINET 1 20 CABINET Total #17 1202 #24 CABINET #20 CABINET 1 20 #24 CABINET 2 20

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 9

10 4

1 4

4 1

4 4

10 10

4 20 1/4" 62'-11

20 4

200 band 200 band

200 band

10 10

1 1

12 12

13 13

15 1

15 15

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Typical Drawings UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AccoustiCabinets Band Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets (continued) Qty. Description

Set B-150 150 Band Instruments

PRODUCTS 10 1 DESCRIPTION N 01 CABINET 03 CABINET 04 CABINET 07 CABINET 10 CABINET 12 CABINET 15 CABINET 17 CABINET 10 1 20 CABINET 24 CABINET

62'-11 1/4" 62'

150 band

11-1/4" (19.18 m) 62'-11 1/4"

10 10 1 1 10 1013 20 1 1210 13 120

412

10 1 2 4

1510

2 4

15 15 20 4 1

415

1 17

10 10 1 1 10 1013 20 1 1210 13 120

412

10 1 2 4

1510

202 4

15 15 20 41

415

1 17

Set B-200 200 Band Instruments200 band

WENGER PRODUCTS PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION ESCRIPTION #01 CABINET 21 CABINET 4 10 #04 CABINET 24 CABINET #07 CABINET 7 CABINET 30 CABINET #10 CABINET #11 1 CABINET CABINET #13 CABINET 23 CABINET #15 CABINET 25 CABINET #17 CABINET 7 CABINET #21 CABINET 1 CABINET #22 CABINET 2 CABINET 4 10 #24 CABINET 24 CABINET 8

78'-9 5/8"

200 band

17 17

5 24 11 17 5

17 17

5 24 11 17 5

#1 Cabinet

#2 Cabinet

WENGER3PRODUCTS WENGER PRODUCTS #4 Cabinet QTY. DESCRIPTION QTY. DESCRIPTION 2 #5 Cabinet 4 CABINET #01 CABINET 4 #01 4 CABINET #10 Cabinet 2411 11 15 11 #02 #02 1 CABINET 3 CABINET #04 2 CABINET #11 Cabinet 3 #04 #05 2 CABINET 1 CABINET #12 Cabinet #05 2 4 #10 CABINET 4 #10 CABINET 1 #13 Cabinet #11 CABINET 2 #11 CABINET 2 7' 6" (2286 mm) 2 #15 Cabinet 1 CABINET 1 #12 (Min. Rough #12 CABINET 2 CABINET #17 Cabinet #13 1 Opening) #13 CABINET 1 #15 2 CABINET #20 Cabinet 2 CABINET #15 2 #17 2 CABINET 1 CABINET #24 Cabinet #17 2 2411 11 5 11 #20 CABINET 2 CABINET #20 2 25 Total 1 #24 CABINET 1 #24 CABINET 25 25

78'-9 5/8"

78' 9-5/8" (24.02 m) 4 10 10 4 1 10 10 4 1

1210

13 1

12 15 13

13 20 154

315 20 4 1

1015

4 120

1015

4 2320 10 15 1

23 10 11 5 1 11 11 5 5

11 17

17 17

1 4 10 10 4 1 10 10 1 4

1210

1 13

1 12 15 13

13 20 154

315 20 41

1015

4 120

1015

4 2320 10 15 1

2311 10 5 1 11 11 5 5

11 17

17 17

Qty. Description 5

#1 Cabinet

#3 Cabinet

WENGER PRODUCTS WENGER PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION QTY. DESCRIPTION 5 CABINET #01 CABINET 5 #01 #03 CABINET 1 CABINET #03 1 4 CABINET #04 CABINET 4 #04 3 CABINET #05 CABINET 3 #05 #07 CABINET 1 CABINET #07 1 5 CABINET #10 CABINET 5 #10 #11 CABINET 2 CABINET #11 2 1 CABINET #12 CABINET 1 #12 #13 CABINET 1 CABINET #13 1 #15 CABINET 3 CABINET #15 3 #17 CABINET 2 CABINET #17 2 #20 CABINET 2 CABINET #20 2 #23 CABINET 1 CABINET #23 1 31 31

WENGER PRODUCTS WENGER PRODUCTS #4 Cabinet QTY. 4 DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION 3 #01 #5 Cabinet 3 CABINET CABINET #01 1 #02 #7 Cabinet CABINET 1 CABINET #02 CABINET 2 CABINET 5 #04 #10 Cabinet #04 CABINET 1 CABINET #05 2 #05 #11 Cabinet 3 CABINET #10 CABINET #10 1 #12 Cabinet #11 CABINET 1 CABINET #11 1 #12 #13 Cabinet 1 CABINET CABINET #12 3 #15 Cabinet #13 CABINET 2 CABINET #13 CABINET 2 CABINET 2 #15 #17 Cabinet 24 #15 CABINET 1 CABINET #17 2 #17 #20 Cabinet #20 CABINET 1 CABINET #20 1 #23 Cabinet #24 CABINET 2 #24 CABINET 31 Total 20

17QTY. 24

3 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 217 1 1 2 20

NOTES: 1. In an area where soffits are to be constructed above Wenger cabinets, a minimum rough opening height of 7' 6" (2286 mm) is required for cabinet installation. 2. Standard door is left-hand swing. Right-hand swing door is available. 3. Closure panels available. 4. End covers available.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 10

10 9 10 9

#08CABINET CABINET #09 #09CABINET CABINET #10 #10 CABINET

42 14 91 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

Storage

Typical Drawings Elementary Programs 68" (1727 mm) High Cabinets UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AcoustiCabinets Band and Orchestra Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets (continued) Set B-40 17'-9 1/2" 17'-9 1/2" 40 Band Instruments

40 band Elementary 40 band Elementary

17' 9-1/2" (5.42 m)

27 27

27 65

Qty. Description

28 66

5'-9 3/4" 5' 9-3/4" (1772 mm) 5'-9 3/4" (Min. Rough

27 27

27 65

25 67

Opening)

28 66

#25 Cabinet

WENGER #27 CabinetPRODUCTS QTY.WENGER PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION 1 QTY. #25DESCRIPTION CABINET 1 #28 Cabinet 12 1 #65 Cabinet #25CABINET CABINET #27 #27CABINET CABINET #28 11 2 #66 Cabinet #28CABINET CABINET #65 11 1 #67 Cabinet #65CABINET CABINET #66 11 7 Total #66CABINET CABINET #67 11 #67 CABINET 71 7 2

Set O-40 22'-11" 40 Orchestra Instruments 22'-11"

22' 11" (6.96 m)

Qty. Description

40 orchestra Elementary 40 orchestra Elementary

28 28

27 30

65 27

30 28

28 65

30 30

30 28

28 30

30 30

28 30

30 30

30 28

28 30

#27 Cabinet

#28 Cabinet

#30 Cabinet

WENGER PRODUCTS 1 #65 Cabinet QTY.WENGER PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION 1 QTY. CABINET 10 #27 Total #27CABINET CABINET 41 #28 #28CABINET CABINET #30 5' 9-3/4" (1772 mm) 4 4 5'-9 3/4" #30CABINET CABINET #65 (Min. Rough Opening) 1 4 5'-9 3/4" #65 CABINET 101 10

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 11

10 9 10 9

13 15 13 15

WEN WE QTY. 3 QTY. 53 85 28 12 11 11 211 21

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Typical Drawings UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AcoustiCabinets Orchestra Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets 1.

The set capacities are based on storing one instrument per compartment.

These drawings are not to scale.

Plan and Elevation Views shown in Typical Drawing section.

NOTE: Cabinet CAD and Revit symbols are available, please contact Wenger. Cabinets shown without doors. Qty. Description

Set O-30 30 Orchestra Instruments 20'-7 1/2" 20' 7-1/2" (6.29 m)

30 orchestra

#5 Cabinet

#8 Cabinet

#9 Cabinet

#10 Cabinet

9 Total

WENGER PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION #05 CABINET 2 #08 CABINET 2 4 #09 CABINET #10 CABINET 1 9

7' 6" (2286 mm) (Min. Rough Opening)

47'-8 1/4"

60 Orchestra

Alternate suggested cabinet set (with violin/viola, string bass and cello racks)

WENG QTY.

Set O-30A 30'-11 7/8" 30 Orchestra Instruments 40 orchestra

5' 1-1/8" 308 orchestra (1.55 9 m) 3

5' 1-1/8" (1.55 9 m) 9 5'-1 1/8"

4' 1-1/2" 4' 7" (1.40 9 (1.26 8 m) 9 8 m)10 9

5'-1 1/8"

4'-1 1/2"

3 BASS

4 CELLO

4'-7"

2'-9"

V-V RACK

4'-2 1/4"

V-V RACK

50 orchestra

3 BASS

4 CELLO

WENGER PRODUCTS 60 Orchestra QTY. DESCRIPTION This A Series set substitutes portable string instrument racks for cabinets. 5'-1 1/8" 5'-1 1/8" #03This CABINET 1 helps to conserve space. 1 #10 Cabinet2 alternate storage sets are available for all the orchestra sets shown. #05These CABINET 1 3 Unit Bass 3Rack #08 CABINET 6Rack #09 CABINET 1 WENGER 4 Unit CelloPRODUCTS #10 CABINET 1Rack QTY. DESCRIPTION 1 Violin/Viola V-V RACK V-V RACK 1 #24 CABINET 1 5 Total #05 CABINET 14 #10 CABINET 1 3 UNIT BASS 1 7' 6" (2286 mm) 9 (Min. 5 15 24 Rough 4 UNIT CELLO Opening) 1 VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 4'-2 1/4" 5 24

Qty. Description 1

#5 Cabinet

V-V RACK

40'-8101/2" 5

6'-9 1/4"

V-V RACK

4 BASS

4 CELLO

4 BASS

4 CELLO

WENGER PRODUCTS 11'-5 1/2" Alternate cabinet set (with instrument storage QTY. cabinet) 8 9 suggested 8 9 3 5'-18 1/8" 9 15 9 84'-1 1/2" 10 stringed 9 5'-1 1/8" DESCRIPTION 409orchestra 5 11 5 11

#03 CABINET 1 #05 CABINET 2 WENGER PRODUCTS 4 #08 CABINET 5 QTY. DESCRIPTION 6 #09 CABINET Description 3 BASS Qty. 4 CELLO This utilizes a #42 stringed instrument storage cabinet for #03 CABINET V-V RACK 1 B Series set #10 CABINET 1 different storage possibilities. 2 #8 Cabinet CABINET 1 alternate#05 19'-3" These storage sets are available for all CABINET the orchestra sets shown. #11 2 19' 3" (5.87 m) 30 orchestra 1 #9 Cabinet #09 CABINET 2 #15 CABINET 1 #10 CABINET 1 1 #10 Cabinet 17 60 Orchestra 42 42 3 UNIT BASS 1 8 8 9 10 9 8 9 8 9 3 8 9 15 9 1 8 #4210Cabinet 9 Cello 5 11 5 11 4 UNIT CELLO 1 WENGER PRODUCTS 1 #42 Cabinet3'-11" V-V-V VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 42 QTY. DESCRIPTION 1 42 8 9 10 6 Total 8 2 4 CELLO#08 CABINET 9 3 10 9 5 V-V RACK 7' 6" (2286 3 BASS mm)1 #09 CABINET (Min. Rough #10 CABINET Opening) 1 CELLO #42 CABINET CELLO 1 V-V-V 15'-6" 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 42 42 8 9 8 10 6'-1 1/4" 5'-1 1/8" 66'-9 1/4" 50 orchestra

Set O-30B 309 Orchestra 3 10 9 Instruments

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | 11 27'-933/8" 10

V-V RACK

40 orchestra

24 10

QTY.

WENGER PRODUCTS 8 9 42 Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com QTY. DESCRIPTION 2'-0" #03 CABINET 1 6 CELLO 4 BASS Interiors #05 CABINETBinder | 1 #10 CABINET 1 WENGER PRODUCTS #11 CABINET QTY. DESCRIPTION 2 #15 CABINET 1 #03 CABINET 1 4 UNIT BASS 1 3 #09 CABINET

44'-2 3/8"

02.f. 12 2 2 2

QTY.

#0 #1 #1 #1 #2 4U 4U VI

BASS

CELLO

V-V-V 42

WENG

1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 11

2'-0"

V-V-V

3 5 8 2 14'-1 1/2" 1 1 21

WENGER PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION #08 CABINET #09 CABINET #10 CABINET

20'-7 1/2"

30 orchestra

REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS 9 MUSIC 8 9 8 9 10 9 5 5 Storage

UltraStor Storage Cabinets and AcoustiCabinets 8 9 8 9 10 9 5 5 Orchestra Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets (continued)

30' 11-7/8" (9.45 m)

30 orchestra 5'-1 1/8"

Qty. Description

Set O-40 40 Orchestra Instruments 30'-11 7/8" 40 orchestra

WENGER PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION #05 CABINET 2 #08 CABINET 2 4 #09 CABINET #10 CABINET 1 9

Typical Drawings

47'-8 1/4"

60 Orchestra

5'-1 1/8"

4'-7"

4'-1 1/2"

2'-9"

#3 Cabinet

#5 Cabinet

#8 Cabinet

WEN QTY.

PRODUCTS 6WENGER #9 Cabinet QTY. DESCRIPTION 1 #10 Cabinet #03 CABINET 1 1 #24 Cabinet #05 CABINET 2 14 Total 3 #08 CABINET 6 #09 CABINET 7' 6" (2286 mm)1 #10 CABINET (Min. Rough #24 CABINET Opening) 1 14

5 5

60 Orchestra 5'-1 1/8"

5'-1 1/8"

3 5 8 2 1 1 1 21

6'-9 1/

WENGER PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION 4 BAS V-V RACK V-V RACK #05 CABINET 1 #10 CABINET 1 3 UNIT BASS 1 40'-8 1/2" 4 UNIT CELLO 1 50 orchestra Set4'-2O-40A VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 4'-2 1/4" 1/4" 5 40 Orchestra Instruments WENGER PRODUCTS QTY. 9 8 9 8 9 3 8 9 15 9 8 10 9 DESCRIPTION 5 11 5 11 V-V RACK V-V RACK 5 V-V RACK 3 BASS 4 CELLO 10 4 BAS #03 CABINET 1 4' 1-1/2" #05 CABINET 2 5' 1-1/8" 5' 1-1/8" 11'11'-5 5-1/2" Qty. Description 4 #08 CABINET 1/2" (1.55 m) (1.55 m) (1.26 m) This#09 A Series set substitutes portable string instrument racks for (3.49 m) 1 #3 Cabinet 6 CABINET 5'-1 1/8" 5'-1 1/8" 40 orchestra 4'-1 1/2" cabinets. 1 1 #5 Cabinet This#10 helpsCABINET to conserve space. #11 CABINET 2 These alternate storage sets are available for all the orchestra 1 #9 Cabinet 2'-0" sets#15 shown. PRODUCTS CABINET 1WENGER 3 9 10 9 5 1 #10 Cabinet QTY. DESCRIPTION 17 4 CELLO 3 BASS 1 3 Unit Bass1Rack #03 CABINET 9 8 9 8 9 3 8 9 15 V-V RACK 9 8 10 9 5 11 5 11 #05 CABINET 1 4 Unit Cello1Rack #09 CABINET 19'-3" 1 Violin/Viola 2Rack 30 orchestra #10 CABINET 1 7' 6" (2286 mm) 8 Total (Min. Rough 3 UNIT BASS 1 44'-2 3/8" Opening) 60 Orchestra 42 42 4 UNIT CELLO 1 8 9 8 10 3'-11" VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 WENGER PRODUCTS 8 QTY. 4 CELLO DESCRIPTION 42 42 42 3 9 10 9 5 8 9 10 9 8 10 V-V RACK 3 BASS #08 CABINET 2 #09 CABINET 1 #10 CABINET 1 15'-6"CELLO #42 CABINET CELLO 1 V-V-V 6'-1 1/4" 5'-1 1/8" 1 V-V-V 6'-9 1/4"#42 CABINET Set O-40B 42 42 8 950 orchestra 8 10 6 B CELLO V-V-V V-V-V WENGER PRODUCTS 40 Orchestra Instruments QTY. DESCRIPTION 2'-0" 42 42 8 9 10 9 8 10 42 5 11 15 3 10 11 #03 CABINET 1 Qty. Description 6 CELLO 4 BASS 27'-9 3/8" #05 CABINET 1 V-V RACK This B Series set utilizes a #42 stringed instrument storage cabinet for 1 #3 Cabinet 27' 9-3/8" (8.47 m) WENGER PR different storage possibilities. #10 CABINET 1 40 orchestra 3 #9 Cabinet These alternate sets are available for all the orchestra sets shown. QTY. DES CABINET 2 storage#11 WENGER 1 #10 Cabinet PRODUCTS #08 CAB 2 #15 CABINET 1 QTY. DESCRIPTION 24 10 42 42 42 1 #24 Cabinet #09 CAB 3 9 9 9 2 4 UNIT BASS 1 #03 CABINET 1 #10 CAB 2 6 UNIT CELLO 1 Bass 3 1 #42 Cabinet #09 CABINET 3'-11" #13 CAB 1 VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 Cello #10 CABINET 1 1 #42 Cabinet #15 CAB 1 9 1 1 #42 Cabinet #24 CABINET 5 15 11 3 10 11 V-V RACK7' 6" (2286 mm) V-V-V 4 BASS 6 CELLO 1 #42 CAB #42 CABINET BASS (Min. Rough 19 Total #42 CAB 2 Opening) 1 #42 CABINET CELLO BASS CELLO #42 CAB 2 V-V-V 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 13 9 3 42 42 42 24 10 9 9 9 9

3 9 V-V RACK

8 3 BASS 9

4 CELLO 10 9 24

QTY.

Alternate suggested cabinet set (with violin/viola, string bass and cello racks)

Alternate suggested cabinet set (with stringed instrument storage cabinet)

37'-6" 50 orchestra

WENGER PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION #03 CABINET 1 #08 CABINET 1 3 #09 CABINET #10 CABINET 1 #11 CABINET 2 #15 CABINET 1 1 #42 CABINET BASS +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com #42 CABINET CELLO 1 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V Interiors Binder 12 QTY.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide CELLO

BASS

V-V-V 42

| 02.f. 13

40 orchestra MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

Storage 9 8 9 3

Typical Drawings 30 orchestra 5'-1 1/8"

5'-1 1/8"

WENGER PRODUCTS QTY. DESCRIPTION #03 CABINET 1 #05 CABINET 2 3 #08 CABINET 6 #09 CABINET #10 CABINET 1 1 #24 CABINET WENGER PRODUCTS 14 QTY. DESCRIPTION #05 CABINET 1 #10 CABINET 1 3 UNIT BASS 1 Qty. Description 4 UNIT CELLO 1 1 RACK #3 Cabinet VIOLIN/VIOLA 1 2 #5 Cabinet 5

5 4'-7"

4'-1 1/2"

60 Orchestra

UltraStor 10 2'-9" Storage Cabinets and AcoustiCabinets 5 3 BASS 4 CELLO V-V RACK Orchestra Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets (continued) 9

Set O-50 50 Orchestra Instruments 4'-2 1/4" 50 orchestra

40'-8 1/2"

40' 8-1/2" (12.41 m)

V-V RACK

3 BASS

4 CELLO

5'-1 1/8"

V-V RACK

#8 Cabinet

Alternate suggested cabinet set (with violin/viola, string bass and cello racks)

Qty. Description

CELLO 8

#3 Cabinet

BASS

V-V-V 42

This B Series set utilizes a #42 stringed instrument storage cabinet for different storage possibilities. #8 Cabinet WENGER PRODUCTS These alternate storage sets are available for all the orchestra sets shown. 3 QTY. #9 Cabinet DESCRIPTION 1

#03 CABINET 11 #10 Cabinet #08 CABINET 1 2 #11 Cabinet 3 #09 CABINET 1 #15 Cabinet #10 CABINET 1 1 #42 Cabinet #11 Bass CABINET 2 7' 6" (2286 mm) (Min. Rough 11 #42 Cabinet #15 Cello CABINET Opening) 11 #42 Cabinet #42 V-V-V CABINET BASS #42 CABINET CELLO 1 12 Total 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 14

CELLO

Set O-50B 30 Orchestra Instruments

37'-6"

4 BASS

44'-2 3/8"

Alternate suggested cabinet set (with stringed instrument storage cabinet).

37' 6" (11.43 m)

4 BASS

4'-2 1/4"

WENGER #9 Cabinet PRODUCTS 8 8 3 8 15 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 1 QTY. #10 CabinetDESCRIPTION 11 5 11 5 #03 CABINET 1 11'-5 1/2" 2 #11 Cabinet #05 CABINET 2 5'-1 1/8" 5'-1 1/8" 40 orchestra 4'-1 1/2" 1 4 #15 Cabinet #08 CABINET 176 Total #09 CABINET 7' 6" (2286 mm) 1WENGER #10 2'-0" PRODUCTS CABINET 9 3 10 9 5 (Min. RoughQTY. DESCRIPTION #11 CABINET 2 Opening) 4 CELLO 3 BASS #15 CABINET V-V RACK 1 1 #03 CABINET 1 17 #05 CABINET #09 CABINET 2 3 9 8 9 8 9 8 9 15 9 8 10 9 5 11 5 11 19'-3" #10 CABINET 1 30 orchestra 3 UNIT BASS 1 4 UNIT CELLO 1 3'-11" 60 Orchestra 42 42 8 9 8 10 VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 WENGER PRODUCTS 8 Set O-50A 9 3 10 9 5 4QTY. CELLO V-V RACK 3 BASS DESCRIPTION 42 42 8 9 10 50 Orchestra Instruments #08 CABINET 2 #09 CABINET 1 6' 9-1/4" 5' 1-1/8" 6' 1-1/4" #10 CABINET Qty. Description 1 15' 15'-6"6" (2.06 m) #42 (1.55 m) (1.86 m) CELLO CELLO This A Series set substitutes portable string CABINET 1 1 #3 Cabinet V-V-V5'-1 1/8" (4.72 m) 6'-1 1/4" 6'-9 1/4" 50 orchestra instrument racks for cabinets. 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 1 #5 Cabinet helps to conserve space. 42 42 8 9 8 10 WENGERThis PRODUCTS 6 These alternate storage sets are available 1 #10 CabinetQTY. V-V-V V-V-V for all DESCRIPTION 2'-0" the orchestra sets shown. 5 11 2 #11 Cabinet 15 3 10 11 #03 CABINET 42 1 42 8 9 10 6 CELLO 4 BASS 1 #15 Cabinet #05 CABINET 1 V-V RACK 27'-9 3/8" 1 Rack #10 CABINET 1 4 Unit Bass 40 orchestra 2 Rack #11 CABINET 1 6 Unit Cello #15 CABINET 1 7' 6" (2286 mm) WENGER PRODUCTS 1 Violin/Viola Rack (Min. Rough 4 UNIT BASS 1 QTY. DESCRIPTION 42 42 42 Opening) 24 10 3 9 9 9 9 Total 6 UNIT CELLO 1 #03 CABINET 1 3'-11" VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 3 #09 CABINET 9 #10 CABINET 1 3 5 15 11 10 11 V-V RACK 4 BASS 6 CELLO 1 #24 CABINET 1 #42 CABINET BASS #42 CABINET CELLO 1 BASS CELLO V-V-V 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 9 24 10 3 9 9 9 42 42 42

50 orchestra

WENGER QTY. D 3 #0 5 #0 8 #0 #1 2 #1 1 #1 1 1 6'-9 1/4" #2 21

30'-11 7/8"

QTY.

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 13

WENGER D #08 CA #09 CA #10 CA #13 CA #15 CA #42 CA #42 CA #42 CA

WE QTY.

30'-11 7/8"

40 orchestra MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

Storage 9 9 8 9

Typical Drawings 30 orchestra 5'-1 1/8"

5'-1 1/8"

5 4'-7"

4'-1 1/2"

Set O-50 50 Orchestra Instruments 4'-2 1/4" 50 orchestra

4 CELLO

11'-5 1/2"

9 5'-1 1/8"

40 orchestra

19'-3"

30 orchestra

5'-1 1/8"

3 BASS

V-V RACK 9

40'-8 1/2"

3 BASS

40' 8-1/2" (12.41 m)

V-V RACK 9

5'-1 1/8"

V-V RACK

15' 6" 15'-6" (4.72 m) 50 orchestra 8

V-V RACK

5' 1-1/8" (1.55 m)

CELLO

V-V-V5'-1 1/8"

3 BASS

V-V RACK

27'-9 3/8" 40 orchestra

7' 6" (2286 mm) (Min. Rough 24 10 Opening)

V-V RACK

#8 Cabinet

WENGER #9 Cabinet PRODUCTS 1 QTY. #10 CabinetDESCRIPTION 11 5 11 5 #03 CABINET 1 2 #11 Cabinet #05 CABINET 2 4'-1 1/2" 1 4 #15 Cabinet #08 CABINET 176 Total #09 CABINET 2'-0" 7' 6" (2286 mm) 1WENGER #10 PRODUCTS CABINET (Min. RoughQTY.2 DESCRIPTION #11 CABINET 4 CELLO Opening) #15 CABINET 1 1 #03 CABINET 1 17 #05 CABINET #09 CABINET 2 5 11 5 11 #10 CABINET 1 3 UNIT BASS 1 4 UNIT CELLO 1 3'-11" 60 Orchestra VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 WENGER PRODUCTS8 4QTY. CELLO DESCRIPTION 42 42 8 9 10 #08 CABINET 2 #09 CABINET 1 6' 9-1/4" 6' 1-1/4" #10 CABINET Qty. Description 1 (2.06 m) #42 (1.86 m) CELLO This A Series set substitutes portable string CABINET 1 1 #3 Cabinet 6'-1 1/4" 6'-9 1/4" instrument racks for cabinets. 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 1 #5 Cabinet helps to conserve space. WENGERThis PRODUCTS 6 These alternate storage sets are available 1 #10 CabinetQTY. V-V-V V-V-V for DESCRIPTION 2'-0" all the orchestra sets shown. 2 #11 Cabinet #03 CABINET 42 1 42 8 9 10 6 CELLO 4 BASS 1 #15 Cabinet #05 CABINET 1 1 Rack #10 CABINET 1 4 Unit Bass 2 Rack #11 CABINET 1 6 Unit Cello #15 CABINET 1 WENGER PRODUCTS 1 Violin/Viola Rack 4 UNIT BASS 1 QTY. DESCRIPTION 9 Total 6 UNIT CELLO 1 #03 CABINET 1 3'-11" VIOLIN/VIOLA RACK 1 3 #09 CABINET 9 #10 CABINET 1 4 BASS 6 CELLO 1 #24 CABINET 1 #42 CABINET BASS #42 CABINET CELLO 1 1 #42 CABINET V-V-V 9 6

BASS V-V-V Alternate suggested cabinet set CELLO (with stringed instrument storage cabinet). 24 10 3 9 42 Set O-50B 30 Orchestra Instruments

Qty. Description

37'-6"

37' 6" (11.43 m)

50 orchestra

CELLO 8

#3 Cabinet

BASS

V-V-V 42

4 BA

4'-2 1/4"

42 42set (with violin/viola, string bass and cello racks) Alternate suggested 8 9 8 10 cabinet

Set O-50A 9 3 10 9 5 50 Orchestra Instruments

3 5 8 2 1 1 1 6'-9 1 21

60 Orchestra

UltraStor 10 2'-9" Storage Cabinets and AcoustiCabinets 5 3 BASS 4 CELLO V-V RACK Orchestra Instruments Suggested Cabinet Sets (continued) 9

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 15

4 BA

44'-2 3/8"

CELLO 9

QTY.

2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 13

WEN

# # # # # # # #

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Cabinet Accessories Side Closure

Attachment Detail

Cabinet

Soffit Closure

Attachment Detail

Ceiling

Cabinet

Side View Top Back Closure

Attachment Detail

Cabinet

Side View

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 16

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Cabinet Accessories Finished Exterior Back Panel

Notes: 1. For installations that require an exposed exterior back to the cabinet, finished back panels securely attach to cabinets. The finished exterior back panel is 3/4" (19 mm) thick and is available for all standard cabinet widths in 48" (1219 mm) or less. 2. The panel standard color is available to match Wenger standard color options.

Tuba/Sousaphone Wall Bracket

Wall

Minimum 4' 0" (1219 mm)

Minimum 1' 6" (457 mm) Minimum 3' 0" (914 mm)

Adjusts Tuba/Sousa Wall Bracket on Adjacent Wall

30" ± 2" (760 ± 50 mm) Typ. (from Floor)

22-1/2" - 35" (572 – 889 mm) Adjusts 13-1/2" – 22" (343 – 559 mm)

Floor

Notes: 1. When mounting Tuba/Sousa wall bracket on adjacent walls, a minimum distance of 4' (1219 mm) from end of wall is required. 2. When mounting Tuba/Sousa wall bracket from end of wall, a minimum distance of 1' 6" (457 mm) is required. 3. Tuba/Sousa wall bracket should be placed 28" to 32" (711 to 813 mm) off floor. 4. Does not fit Miraphone Tubas, Baritone Horns or Rotary Valve Tubas. 5. 1" x 12" x 24" (25 x 305 x 610 mm) board required to mount to sheet rock walls. 6. Assembly required. 7. The upper bracket fits through the tubing on the upper part of the Tuba. Rotary Valve Tubas or Tubas constructed without any space for the bracket to fit through, will not fit with this bracket. 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 17

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Symbols are available upon request. Contact Wenger for more information.

Percussion Workstation 24-1/2"w x 48-1/8"d x 35-3/4"h (622 x 1222 x 908 mm)

Guitar Rack 65-3/4"w x 29-1/2"d x 72"h (1670 x 749 x 1828 mm)

3-Unit String Bass Rack 61"w x 26"d x 60-1/2"h (1549 x 660 x 1537 mm)

Piano Work Desk 59-1/2"w x 10"d (1511 x 254 mm)

3-Unit Tuba/Sousaphone Rack 77-1/4"w x 32"d x 39-1/2"h (1962 x 813 x 1003 mm)

4-Unit String Bass Rack 80-5/8"w x 26"d x 60-1/2"h (2048 x 660 x 1537 mm)

Class Piano Workstation 60"w x 18"d x 5"h (1524 x 457 x 127 mm)

4-Unit Tuba/Sousaphone Rack 101-1/4"w x 32"d x 39-1/2"h (2572 x 813 x 1003 mm)

4-Unit Cello Rack 49-3/8"w x 24"d x 47"h (1254 x 610 x 1194 mm)

6-Unit Cello Rack 73-1/8"w x 24"d x 47"h (1857 x 610 x 1194 mm)

Violin/Viola Rack 61"w x 33"d x 50-1/4"h (1549 x 838 x 1276 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 18

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Corner Cabinet

Maximum height of 85-5/8" (2175 mm) with levelers fully extended

• Basic cabinet 460 lb (209 kg) • Multi-purpose storage cabinet with a variety of internal storage compartment options • Cabinet may be placed between adjacent rows of cabinets meeting in a corner, or may stand alone • Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Standard top panel is 3/4" (19 mm) thick plywood with polyester laminate finish • Door opening is 24" (610 mm) wide • Door options: - Full wood door - same construction as wall panels - Full grille door - welded steel grille construction with powder-coat paint finish - No door • Cabinets have five adjustable steel leveling glides for uneven floors • Deflector panel is constructed of high density fiberboard with oyster laminate prevents items from falling from shelves If FSC certified is required, deflector panel is constructed of unfinished tempered hardboard • Ventilation holes are built-in on cabinet top panel to dissipate moisture and aid air circulation • Bottom and top tubular steel frame adds strength to cabinet • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty Stationary Shelf Option Revolving Shelf • Polyethylene shelf with three tubular steel support • Shelf made of 12-gauge steel in powder-coat paint frames finish, attaches to revolving center post that contains adjustable holes. • Dimensions: 30" deep x 46-1/2" wide (762 x 1181 mm) • Cabinet will hold up to six 360 degree shelves Garment/hangar bars Garment ring • Includes 2 steel hangar bars • Includes 1 set of rings made of 5/8" (16 mm) • Each bar stores up to 20 uniforms or robes spaced diameter steel rod in powder-coat paint finish 2" (51 mm) apart • Will hold up to 30 uniforms or 30 choral robes • Add a second set of rings to increase storage to hold up to 30 more uniforms maximum of 2 sets) Flag storage • Includes 1 set of garment rings • A 360 degree bottom shelf with carpeted pad Attaches to center post 48-1/2 48-1/2 mm) " (123 2 3 " (1232 • Will hold up to 2 mm) 1 ( 2 " mm) mm) " (1232 48-1/2 /2 1 8 200 flags 4

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 19

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Percussion Workstation • Basic Percussion Workstation 147G002._ 230 lbs (104 kg). Deluxe Percussion Workstation with all accessories 147G001._ 251 lbs (113 kg) 230 lbs. • Workstation is 48-1/8" wide x 24-1/2" deep x 35-3/4" high (1222 x 622 x 908 mm). • Workstation construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. • Workstation top is 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade composite wood with industrial grade carpet on top. • Plywood bottom is 3/4" (19 mm) with four 4" (102 mm) rubber swivel casters that make it easy to move from room to room. • Workstation has four foam-lined 21-1/2" wide x 19-3/4" deep x 3-1/2" high (546 x 502 x 89 mm) drawers constructed of 18 gauge steel with built-in handle. • Four 23" wide x 23" deep (584 x 584 mm) compartments, 3-1/2" (89 mm) high and 15-3/4" high (400 mm). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Shipped assembled. • Ten-year warranty.

Pop-Up Music Desk

Accessories Pop-up Music Desk • 147H510._ 17.7 lbs. (7.7 kg). • Holds music for three or more people. • Desk is 46-1/8" wide x 1-7/16" deep x 10-3/4" high (1172 x 37 x 273 mm). • Desk construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. • Desk permanently attaches to work top and folds flat when not in use. Cymbal Cradle

Suspended Cymbal Holder • 147H014 2 lbs. (0.9 kg). • Adjustable vinyl-coated holder clamps to cabinet edge.

Suspended Cymbal Holder

Cymbal Cradle • 147H012 7 lbs. (3 kg). • Holds up to 22" (559 mm) cymbals in ready-to-use position. • Vinyl-coated cradle, which protects and holds cymbals quietly, clamps to the cabinet edge. 36-1/2" (927 mm)

" /2 ) -1 m 24 2 m 2 (6

48-1/8"m) (1222 m

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 20

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Tuba/Sousaphone Mobile Storage Rack • • • • • • • • •

Wood parts are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) industrial grade composite wood with no formaldehyde added. Polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Adjustable instrument cradles are constructed of padded steel weldments that can be positioned left or right to hold instruments. Cradles are adjustable by hand, no tools required. Racks are adjustable vertically and horizontally to hold a combination of different sized and shaped tubas and sousaphones. Racks have four swivel, hard rubber casters with two front locking, 4" (102 mm) in diameter. Top cross member is constructed of 14-gauge tubular steel. Bottom cross member supports are covered with flexible PVC to protect instruments. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Assembly required. 3-Unit Tuba/Sousaphone Mobile Storage Rack • 148J007 - 121 lbs (55 kg). • Unit is configured to hold: Three tubas or three sousaphones or a combination of three total tubas and sousaphones. 4-Unit Tuba/Sousaphone Mobile Storage Rack • 148J008 - 143 lbs (65 kg). • Unit is configured to hold: Four tubas or four sousaphones or a combination of four total tubas and sousaphones. 22-3/4" (578 mm)

Accessories • 148J015 Accessory Cradle Kit It may be possible to store an additional tuba when only tubas, not a combination of tubas and sousaphones are being stored.

44" (1118 mm)

Smallest Adjustable Rack Position

73 -1 97 /8" (1 " (2 85 46 7 m 4m m m) ) 34-U Uni nit t Mo Mo de de l l Tuba/Sousaphone

29" (737 mm)

Mobile Storage Rack (4-Unit Model Shown)

-3/

3 " (8

Largest Adjustable Rack Position

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 21

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Tuba/Sousaphone Wall Bracket • • • • • • •

• • • •

049E100 15 lbs (6.8 kg). Durable design gently cradles and protects instruments. Mounts easily on sheet rock or masonry to save valuable floor space. Adjusts five ways to hold tuba or sousaphone. Height adjusts from 22-1/2” min. to 35” max (572 to 889 mm). Width adjusts from 13-1/2” min. to 22” max (343 to 559 mm). Does not fit Miraphone Tubas, Baritone Horns, or Rotary Valve Tubas. Note: The upper bracket fits through the tubing on the upper part of the Tuba. Rotary Valve Tubas or Tubas constructed without any space for the bracket to fit through, will not fit with this bracket. Recommended to NOT double-stack. Assembly required: mounting hardware not included. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Five year warranty. 5 1/2” min. 11 1/2” max. 10” 8” 6”

13 1/2” min.

22” max.

4'-0"

22 1/2” min. 35” max.

3'-0" min. Typical on Center

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Interiors Binder | 02.f. 22

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Stringed Instrument Storage Cabinet (#42)

85-5/8" (2175 mm)

• 250A942 or 255A942 (AcoustiCabinet) - 425 lb (193 kg) • Overall dimensions: 85-5/8" height x 60-1/2" wide x 39-1/4" depth (2175 x 1537 x 997 mm) • Standard configuration includes hardware for the following instrument capacities: sixteen to twenty violins/violas/vihuelas, two to three basses, four to five cellos/guitarrons, or fourteen to eighteen guitars • Adjustable internal components to fit a variety of instrument sizes - with or without cases • Padded rails to protect instruments and cases • High-pack options available • Additional conversion kits are available to store a variety of instruments • Cabinet construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Optional hangers and cable lock kit available for instruments without cases • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC • Available in all core substrates • Attractive, durable construction resists chipping and looks new years longer than other laminates • Bolt-through construction maintains the condition of the door and hardware year after year • Removable, replaceable components ensure improved service life • Load-tested hinges and lock assemblies stand up to institutional use m) • Choice of solid doors, straight grille doors or no doors 7m 99 ( Waterfall grille doors avaliable for an extra charge. 4" -1/ 39 • Acoustic option available • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Ten-year warranty • Ships ready-to-assemble

-1/

(15

)

See the following page for configuration examples.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 23

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Typical Configurations

Bass

Cello / Guitarron

Guitar

Violin / Viola / Vihuela

Combination High-Pack Options

Combination - Cello / Guitarron & Violin / Viola / Vihuela

Combination - Violin / Viola / Vihuela

2019-05

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 24

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Guitar Storage Rack

• • • • • • • • • •

148J006._, Guitar Storage Rack, 147 lbs (67 kg). Designed to transport and store up to 20 acoustic or electric guitars. Stores up to 10 mariachi guitars and guitarrons. Can store cased and uncased guitars. Adjustable height upper cross supports to fit 3/4 to full size guitars. Adjustable yokes to accommodate various styles and are removable to accommodate cased guitar storage. Optional security cables help prevent instrument theft using standard padlocks with 3/8" (10 mm) maximum diameter x 1-3/8" (35 mm) wide shackle. (padlocks not included) Four swivel, hard rubber casters, with two front locking, 4" (102 mm) in diameter. Fits through 33" (838 mm) wide door opening. End panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC. Lower cross supports are plywood core laminated panels with flexible soft PVC edging to protect instruments. Dimensions: 65-3/4" long x 29-1/2" deep x 72" high (1670 x 750 x 1829 mm). UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Assembly required. Five-year warranty.

29-1/2" (749 mm)

72" (1829 mm)

• • • • • • •

69-3/16" (1757 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 25

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Stringed Instrument Mobile Storage Racks

String Bass and Cello Racks • Three-unit String Bass Rack: 148J003._ 73 lbs (33 kg). • Four-unit String Bass Rack: 148J004._ 83 lbs (38 kg). • Four-unit Cello Rack: 148J001._ 55 lbs (25 kg). • Six-unit Cello Rack: 148J002._ 66 lbs (30 kg). • Lower cross supports are plywood core laminated panels with flexible soft PVC edging to protect instruments. • Upper cross supports are plywood core laminated panels with PVC bonded edging to protect instruments. • All racks include brass bow pegs. • Holds uncased instruments 1/2 sized and up.

61" (1549 mm)

• End panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. • Edging is 1/8" (3mm) radiused PVC. • Racks have 2-1/2" (64 mm) swivel casters in yellow zinc finish for easy transport. Front casters are locking. 3-Unit • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for String Bass Rack low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Assembly required.

Violin/Viola Rack • 148J005._ 92 lbs (42 kg). • Double-tiered rack moves and stores up to sixteen cased instruments. • Cross supports are constructed of plywood core laminated panels with PVC bonded edging on top and bottom supports. • Holds cased instruments 1/2 size and up. • Spacer pegs are solid wood.

26" (660 mm)

mm) ) 1549 61" ( 2061 mm k c a "( it R e-un ck 81-1/8 e r h T Ra -unit Four

4-Unit Cello Rack

47-1/2" (1207 mm)

50-3/4" (1289 mm)

Violin/Viola Rack

24" (610 mm)

) 4 mm (125 3/8" 857 mm) 9 4 Rack 3-1/8" (1 7 -unit Four nit Rack u ix S

33" (838 mm)

)

61" (1549 mm

2018-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 26

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Rack 'n Roll®

Accessories • 028B007 • 028B013 • 210B230 • 028B014 • 028B015 • 028B016

Additional Folding Basket, 4.1 lbs (1.9 kg). Costume Divider Tags, pack of 25. Hanger Retainer Clips, pack of 40. 4' (1219 mm) Dust Cover. 6' (1829 mm) Dust Cover. Privacy Screen.

70-1/2" (1791 mm)

• 028B001 4' (1219 mm) Rack 'n Roll 140 lbs (63.5 kg) including one basket. • 028B002 6' (1829 mm) Rack 'n Roll 163 lbs (74 kg) including one basket. • Load Capacities • 4' (1219 mm) Rack 'n Roll total load capacity - 200 lbs (91 kg), includes top shelf load capacity of 25 lbs (11 kg) and hanger bar load capacity of 100 lbs (45 kg). • 6' (1829 mm) Rack 'n Roll total load capacity - 300 lbs (136 kg), includes top shelf load capacity of 25 lbs (11 kg) and hanger bar load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg). • Ideal for transporting props, costumes, or other garments. • Equipped with full-length hanger bar with space for full-length costumes. • Folding basket organizes smaller items and stores compactly when not in use. • 14-gauge bottom shelf protects longer garments from dragging on the floor. • 16-gauge top shelf is ideal for lightweight items. • Fits through standard 32" (813 mm) door. • 4' (1219 mm) model is designed for use in passenger elevators. Minimum elevator size: 5' (1524 mm). • 4' (1219 mm) model designed for one-person operation. Two people required for 6' (1829 mm) model. • Assembles without the use of tools (1/2" wrench required for initial caster assembly only). • Durable black powder-coat paint finish. • Hanger bar constructed of 1-1/4" 11-gauge tubing. • Uprights constructed of 13-gauge, 1-1/2" inch outside diameter (38 mm) round tubing. • 5" (127 mm) swivel, locking, non-marking casters provide easy maneuverability. • Basket is 20-7/8" x 14" w x 10-7/8" h (530 x 356 x 276 mm) when open; 20-7/8" x 14" w x 2-5/8" h (530 x 356 x 67 mm) when folded. • 4' (1219 mm) model stores compactly in 24" x 48" (610 x 1219 mm) floor space. Allow 70-1/2" (1791 mm) for height (unloaded). • 6' (1829 mm) model stores compactly in 24" x 72" (610 x 1829 mm) floor space. Allow 70-1/2" (1791 mm) for height (unloaded) plus 3/8" (9.5 mm) brake protrusion on one side. • Top of hanger bar to top of bottom shelf is 5' 1" (1550 mm). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Dust Covers have security straps and two zippers on one side. Constructed with 600 Denier material. Black in color. • Five-year warranty.

72" f 48" or 6' (1 for 4 8 ' (12 29 mm 19 m ) un m) u it nit

24" m) 0m

(61

Multiple Rack 'n Roll units can be stored stacked as shown. It is recommended that the maximum number of stacked units do not exceed four. It is also recommended that two people stack the units for storage. Not intended to be moved when stacked.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 27

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

UltraStor® Storage Cabinets

Performance Requirements

• Choice of solid doors, straight grille doors or no doors • Optional waterfall grille doors available • Polyester laminate and industrial grade composite wood core resists chipping and looks new years longer than other laminates • Shelves feature patented ventilation ridges and rounded front edges, improving airflow crucial to musical instrument, equipment, and garment longevity • Load-tested hinges and lock assemblies stand up to institutional use • Standard 27-1/2" (699 mm) wide and 21" (533 mm) narrow widths available • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

Construction

• Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Available in several core substrates to meet your specific needs: no formaldehyde added industrial grade composite wood (standard), fire-rated, moisture-resistant, FSC certified and Vencore (plywood) • Available with right- or left-hinged (standard) doors for easy access • Bolt-through construction maintains superior door and hardware condition, year after year • Seismic-compliant bracing available upon request as a special order

Cabinet #32 without doors

Cabinet #31 with full-length wood door

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 28

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Cabinet Specifications - UltraStor Storage Cabinets #31 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 239 lb (108 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 11-1/4"h (648 x 695 x 286 mm) 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 65-3/8"h (648 x 695 x 1661 mm) Stores: 11 uniforms or robes Upper shelf for additional storage

#32 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 233 lb (106 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 77-7/8" h (648 x 695 x 1978 mm) Stores: 22 uniforms

#33 Cabinet size: 27-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (699 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 252 lb (114 kg) Compartment sizes: 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 11-1/4"h (648 x 695 x 286 mm) 25-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 39-5/8"d (648 x 695 x 1007 mm) Stores: 11 uniforms and 12 hats

#34 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 454 lb (206 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 10-1/4"h (1181 x 695 x 260 mm) 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 63-5/8"h (1181 x 695 x 1616 mm) Stores: 20 robes or uniforms Upper shelf for additional storage

#35 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 445 lb (202 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 76-1/2"h (1181 x 695 x 1943 mm) Stores: 40 uniforms

#36 Cabinet size: 48-1/2"w x 29-1/4"d x 85-5/8"h (1232 x 743 x 2175 mm) Weight: 479 lb (217 kg) Compartment sizes: 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 10-1/4"h (1181 x 695 x 260 mm) 46-1/2"w x 27-3/8"d x 38-3/8"h (1181 x 695 x 975 mm) Stores: 20 uniforms and 24 hats

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 29

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Music Library System

• Available in 6-shelf unit or 7-shelf-unit • 173G700._ Standard width 7-shelf unit 274 lb (124 kg), Oversized width 7-shelf unit 313 lb (142 kg) • 173G600._ Standard width 6-shelf unit 243 lb (110 kg), Oversized width 6-shelf unit 278 lb (126 kg) • Overall Dimensions: Closed position: 16" wide x 44" deep x 92-1/2" high (406 x 1118 x 2350 mm) 7-shelf unit Open position: 16" wide x 80" deep x 92-1/2" high (406 x 2032 x 2350 mm) 7-shelf unit. 6-shelf unit is 82" (2081 mm) high Oversized units are 19" (483 mm) wide NOTE: Add 3" (80 mm) to overall width of set for installation rough opening.

Overall Width 16" (406 mm) Standard 19" (483 mm) Oversized Compartment Width 12" (305 mm) Standard 15" (381 mm) Oversized

• Pull-out design, equally spaced shelves provide 10-1/2" (267 mm) of available height per shelf Standard width units have 12" x 34-1/2" x 10-1/2" (305 x 876 x 267 mm) of shelf space available Oversized width units have 15" x 34-1/2" x 10-1/2" (381 x 876 x 267 mm) of shelf space available

44"

• On the 7-shelf unit, four shelves are adjustable and three shelves are fixed (upper fixed shelf can be repositioned in five different locations for greater flexibility) On the 6-shelf unit, four shelves are adjustable and two shelves are fixed

(11 18

)

• Units are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Shelves are reinforced with an aluminum extrusion that includes a slot with vinyl material for labeling with dry-erase markers • Frame is 16-gauge, 1" (25 mm) square tubular steel, painted black 92-1/2" (2350 mm) 7-shelf unit 82" (2083 mm) 6-shelf unit

• Back panel is designed to fit on either side of unit for left or right hand use • Includes four 8" (203 mm)-diameter casters for easy movement of unit • 173G011._ End Cover, 7-shelf unit, Oyster 71 lb (33 kg) 173G010._ End Cover, 6-shelf unit, Oyster 63 lb (29 kg) • Each unit contains bumpers for control of side and outward movement

Fix

elf

• Unit requires anchoring to floor and wall • Weight Capacities: Each shelf is rated at 100 lb (45 kg) maximum capacity 7-shelf unit = 700 lb (318 kg) total unit capacity 6-shelf unit = 600 lb (272 kg). total unit capacity • Sheet Music Capacity (approximate): 7-shelf unit = 190 titles at 1-1/4" (32 mm) spacing/title. 240 titles at 1" (25 mm) spacing 300 titles at 3/4" (19 mm) spacing 6-shelf unit = 160 titles at 1-1/4" (32 mm) spacing/title 200 titles at 1" (25 mm) spacing 260 titles at 3/4" (19 mm) spacing • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

34-

1/2 "( Up dee 876 m to p 80" m) (20 32 mm )d ee

elf

7-shelf unit is shown

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 30

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Installation Requirements • Top Closures must be used if installing less than four Shelf Units or if not attaching less than four Shelf Units to a side wall (peninsula type installation). • The installation site must be level - no more than 1/4" variation in a 6' distance (in both directions). • Music Library Systems should be installed on concrete or epoxy coated concrete flooring. Not recommended for installation on padded carpeting or vinyl flooring. Floor point load for a 7-shelf unit is at rated load is 800 psi (5516 kpa) per caster. Floor point load for a 6-shelf unit is at rated load is 700 psi (4826 kpa) per caster.

Accessories • Top Closure Kit Accessory is constructed of particleboard that matches the end covers. Supports up to 50 lb/lin ft (74 kg/m) loading. • Oblique File System Accessory is available on standard 12" (305 mm) shelf widths. • Latch Kit Accessory helps keep shelf units closed on uneven floors. • Lock option (padlocks not included).

How to determine the number of units needed: 1. Measure your current library of sheet music in inches. Filing cabinets: Measure the depth of the music in each drawer. Do not add empty space. Total depth is the total inches of all your individual drawers combined (music only). If your cabinets are all the same depth and all full, you can arrive at total depth by multiplying the common drawer depth by the number of drawers. For instance, the total depth of forty 24"-deep drawers would be 960". Open shelving: Measure the total lineal inches of sheet music on each shelf. Music must be stacked standing up. Add the total of each shelf to arrive at total depth. 2. Divide total depth by the total capacity of the 6- or 7-shelf unit.

7-shelf unit total capacity = 241-1/2" 6-shelf unit total capacity = 207" For instance, 960" divided by 241-1/2" equals 3.98, or four 7-shelf units. 960" divided by 207" equals 4.64, or five 6-shelf units.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 31

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Music Sorting Rack • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • •

173E050._ 165 lbs. (74 kg). Contains 46 vertical slots for individual parts. Slot dimension: 1" thick x 10-1/2" deep x 9" high (25 x 267 x 229 mm). 1/8" (3 mm)-hardboard dividers keep individual parts separated. Cabinet construction is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. 1/8" (3 mm) thick PVC edgebanding. Instrumentation label provided for each slot. Includes four swivel casters. Includes two lower storage compartments for additional music. Cabinet is shipped assembled. Overall dimensions: 49-5/8" wide x 25-1/4" deep x 35-1/16" high (1260 x 641 x 891 mm). Optional full-length wood door - same construction as wall panels. - Doors must be included at the time of ordering as they can not be installed later. - Doors include heavy-duty 5-knuckle institutional ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 hinge, through - bolted to cabinet wall. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Ten-year warranty.

Accessories • 173A052 25 lbs. (11 kg) lockable industrial grade composite wood doors.

49-5

/8" (1

mm)

35-1/16" (891 mm)

260

)

1 mm

" (64

/4 25-1

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 32

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Tall Folio Cabinets

• Wall panels and optional lockable doors are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Shelves are 1/8" (3 mm) thick tempered hardboard • Available in 1", 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", and 3" (25, 38, 51, 63, and 76 mm) shelf height openings to accommodate various thicknesses of folios • Shelf support columns are extruded aluminum, black powder-coat paint finish • Optional lockable doors are made of thermofused composite wood with polyester laminate finish • Cabinet includes four levelers to level and square cabinet • Number strips included for all shelf spacing options • Cabinets are shipped fully assembled • Wall mounting bracket included • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Ten-year warranty

Tall Choral Folio Cabinet

• Cabinet only: 196 lb (89 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet with doors: 238 lb (108 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 26-11/16" wide x 19-1/4" deep x 84-1/4" high (678 x 489 x 2140 mm). • Shelf openings are 11-5/8" wide x 12-3/8" deep (295 x 314 mm). • Shelf spacing can be adjusted in 1/2" (13 mm) increments from 1" to 3" (25 to 76 mm).

Tall Band/Orchestra Folio Cabinet

• Cabinet only: 230 lb (105 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet with doors: 281 lb (128 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 32-13/32" wide x 19-1/4" deep x 84-1/4" high (823 x 489 x 2140 mm). • Shelf openings are 14-7/16" wide x 13-7/8" deep (367 x 353 mm). • Shelf spacing can be adjusted in 1/2" (13 mm) increments from 1" to 3" (25 to 76 mm).

26 (67 -11/1 8 m 6" m)

" 1/4 ) 19- 9 mm (48

Choral Folio Cabinet

1" (25 mm) 1-1/2" (38 mm) 2" (51 mm) 2-1/2" (64 mm) 3" (76 mm)

144 96 72 56

84-1/4" (2140 mm)

Shelf Spacing Capacity

32 (82 -13/3 3 m 2" m)

" 1/4 ) 19- 9 mm (48

Choral Folio Cabinet

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 33

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Mobile Folio Cabinets

51-3

/4" (

1315

mm)

50-7/8" (1292 mm)

• Wall panels and optional lockable doors are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors. • Shelves are 1/8" (3 mm) thick tempered hardboard. • Choral shelves are 11-1/2" wide x 12-1/2" deep (292 x 318 mm) and Band/Orchestra shelves are 14-1/4" wide x 14-1/2" deep (362 x 368 mm). " • Available in 1", 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", and 3" (25, 38, 51, 63, and 76 mm) /8 ) -5 m shelf height openings to accommodate various thicknesses of folios. 17 8 m 4 • Shelf support columns are extruded aluminum with black powder-coat (4 paint finish. • Each cabinet includes four 3" (76 mm) swivel casters (two locking) to make transport easy. Four column choral cabinet contains six swivel casters for added support when transporting. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Number strips included for all shelf spacing options. • Cabinets are shipped fully assembled. • Wall mounting bracket included for tall folio cabinets. • Ten-year warranty. Mobile Choral Folio Cabinets: 146M022, Two-column Choral Folio Cabinet: • Cabinet only 125 lbs. (57 kg), with doors: 149 lbs. (68 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 26-3/4" wide x 17-5/8" deep x 50-7/8" high (679 x 448 x 1292 mm). 146M023, Three-column Choral Folio Cabinet: • Cabinet only 169 lbs. (77 kg), with doors: 205 lbs. (93 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 39-7/16" wide x 17-5/8" deep x 50-7/8" high (1002 x 448 x 1292 mm). 146M024, Four-column Choral Folio Cabinet: • Cabinet only 216 lbs. (99 kg), with doors: 298 lbs. (135 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 51-3/4" wide x 17-5/8" deep x 50-7/8" high (1314 x 448 x 1292 mm).

4-Column Choral Folio Cabinet

" /8 ) -5 m 17 8 m 4 (4

47-3

/4" (1

214

mm)

146M033, Three-column Band/Orchestra Folio Cabinet: • Cabinet only 205 lbs. (93 kg), with doors: 250 lbs. (114 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 47-3/4" wide x 17-5/8" deep x 50-7/8" high (1213 x 448 x 1292 mm). Shelf Spacing Capacity

Cabinet 2-Column Choral 3-Column Choral 4-Column Choral 2-Column Band/Orchestra 3-Column Band/Orchestra

1" 84 126 168 84 126

Shelf Spacing 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 56 42 34 84 63 51 112 84 68 56 42 34 84 63 51

50-7/8" (1292 mm)

Mobile Band/Orchestra Folio Cabinets: 146M032, Two-column Band/Orchestra Folio Cabinet: • Cabinet only 147 lbs. (67 kg), with doors: 178 lbs. (81 kg) (based on 1-1/2" shelf spacing). • Cabinet is 32-7/16" wide x 17-5/8" deep x 50-7/8" high (824 x 448 x 1292 mm).

3" 28 42 56 28 42 3-Column Band/Orchestra Folio Cabinet

2018-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 34

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Fixed Media Storage Cabinets

1-Column Fixed Media Storage Cabinet

85-5/8" (2175 mm)

• Cabinets are constructed 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Edging is 1/8" (3mm) radiused PVC • Available in one column or two column sizes: • - 1 column 21-1/2" w x 24"d x 85-5/8" h (546 x 610 x 2175 mm) • - 2 column 42" w x 24"d x 85-5/8" h (1067 x 610 x 2175 mm) • Full locking wood doors with 270 degree hinges to swing door open flush with side panel • Each column of the cabinet is available in three types: • - Standard – allows for addition of shelves and drawers (includes one fixed shelf). • - Rack mount – Steel 7-unit rack mount section with one mounted power strip included and cage nuts to attach electronic components. Unit folds down on hinge for access to cords in back. Additional space can be configured for drawers and shelves (fixed shelf above and below rack mount). • - Organizer – Includes one steel organizer grid with black power-coated finish mounted to inside of door and one mounted to back of cabinet. Accessories sold separately and fits standard 3" (76 mm) on center slatwall parts (one fixed shelf above height of organizer grid). • Top venting holes allow ventilation • Wire management clips to hold wires • Steel pilaster rail allows for mounting of shelves, slide-outs and drawers with ability to reposition along the length at 1/2" (13 mm) increments • Cabinets have adjustable steel leveling glides for uneven floors ) • Drawers and slide-outs are preinstalled but can mm 0 1 2142" be repositioned (6 1/2 (10 ) 24" " Adjustable shelves are packaged loose m 67 ( 546 m 0 mm 1 for customer preferred installation m 6 ( ) m " ) 4 2 • Wall and floor mounting brackets included • Four 5-knuckle steel hinges per door with powder-coated paint finish, through-bolted to door and side panels • Keyed lock comes standard or may be substituted for a programmable digital lock • Cabinets are shipped assembled • Ten-year warranty Optional power strips, digital locks and other electronic equipment are covered by the individual manufacturer's warranty

2-Column Fixed Media Storage Cabinet

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 35

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Optional Interiors

• Adjustable shelves, notched to allow space for cords • Slide out shelves, can be repositioned along pilaster • 4" drawer is constructed of steel • File drawer is constructed of steel and includes adjustable mounting bar for hanging file folders, standard or legal sized • 19" Steel 7-unit rack mount section with one rack mounted power strip • Steel organizer grid with black power-coated finish fits standard 3" (76 mm) on center slatwall parts

Accessories Organizer Grid Accessories • Individual Hook (3-pack) • Cable Minder (1-pack) – (holds six cables) fits three down per grid • CD holder – (holds thirty CD's) fits five down per grid • Mic Stand Holder (1-pack of three pieces) – holds one folding microphone stand, fits four across per grid • Basket (1-pack) – 12" x 8" x 4" (305 x 203 x 102 mm) – fits five down per grid Depth will not accommodate baskets on both door and interior

Compartment Dimensions: 19-7/8" (505 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 23" (584 mm) high

Clear Storage Bins • Small. • Medium. • Medium Divided.

Compartment Dimensions: 19-7/8" (505 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 23" (584 mm) high

Compartment Dimensions: 19-7/8" (505 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 54-3/4" (584 mm) high

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 36

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Mobile Media Storage Cabinets

• Cabinets are constructed 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Bottom is constructed of Vencore plywood for extra strength • Edging is 1/8" (3mm) radiused PVC • Available in one column or two column sizes: - 1 column 32" w x 24-5/8"d x 43" h (813 x 625 x 1092 mm) - 2 column 48-1/4" w x 24-5/8"d x 43" h (1226 x 625 x 1092 mm) • Full locking wood doors with 270 degree hinges to swing door fully open • Each column of the cabinet is available in two types: - Standard – allows for addition of shelves and drawers. - Rack mount – Steel 7-unit rack mount section with one mounted power strip included and cage nuts to attach electronic components. Unit folds down on hinge for access to cords in back (fixed shelf above and below rack mount). Two column has space above and below for storage. One column has space to add 4" (102 mm) drawer, slide out shelf or both. • Two column cabinet includes full width slide out shelf width 39-1/2" wide x 16" deep (1003 x 406 mm) • Cable management with clips, cable pass through and cord wrap • Steel pilaster rail allows for mounting of shelves, slide-outs and drawers with ability to reposition along the length at 1/2" (13 mm) increments • Work surface top is constructed of thermofoil wrap over composite panel for high wear resistance It includes an integrated handle and cup holder • 4" (102 mm) durable, smooth rolling swivel casters • Drawers and slide-outs are preinstalled but can be repositioned Adjustable shelves are packaged loose for customer preferred installation • Two 5-knuckle steel hinges per door with powder-coated paint finish, through-bolted to door and side panels • Front keyed lock comes standard or may be substituted for a programmable digital lock Rear keyed lock allows additional access to components • Cabinets are shipped assembled • Ten-year warranty Optional power strips, digital locks and other electronic equipment ) mm are covered by the individual manufacturer's warranty 5 2 6 5/ 24-

25 " (6

) mm

19"

(48

(81

/8"

(

48-

20" mm) 8 (50

39"

(99

1/4

" (1

226

)

1-Column Mobile Media Storage Cabinet

43" (1092 mm)

20" mm) 8 (50

32"

5 24-

2-Column Mobile Media Storage Cabinet

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 37

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information Optional Interiors

• Adjustable shelves, notched to allow space for cords • Slide out shelves, can be repositioned along pilaster • 4" drawer is constructed of steel • File drawer is constructed of steel and includes adjustable mounting bar for hanging file folders, standard or legal sized • 19" Steel 7-unit rack mount section with one rack mounted power strip Compartment Dimensions: 40-1/2" (1029 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 6" (152 mm) high

Compartment Dimensions: 19-7/8" (505 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 30-1/4" (768 mm) high

Compartment Dimensions: 19-7/8" (505 mm) wide 22" (559 mm) deep 37" (940 mm) high

Rear Access Door

Typical Interior Configuration

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 38

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

UltraStorÂŽ and AcoustiCabinetsÂŽ Storage Cabinets Color Sample Card

Color Combination Options Laminate Color

Edge Banding Hardware, Painted Grille & Fasteners Laminate Color

Edge Banding Hardware, Painted Grille & Fasteners

Laminate Color

Wenger Maple

Edge Banding

Oyster

Laminate Color

Pebble

Edge Banding

Oyster

Hardware, Painted Grille & Fasteners

Oyster

Laminate Color

Oyster

Edge Banding

Oyster

Hardware, Painted Grille & Fasteners

Oyster

Fusion Maple

Almond Almond

Solar Oak

Black Black

Exterior and interior finish of all cabinets shown is Oyster. Examples shown with optional end cover panels on right side. Colors contained in this card are approximations. Actual colors may vary slightly. Contact your Sales Representative for a physical sample.

Cherry

Black

Pepper Dust

Hardware, Painted Grille & Pepper Dust Fasteners

Oyster

Cherry

Evening Tigris

Optional end cover panels will match laminate color Cabinet exteriors and interiors are Oyster

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 39

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

UltraStor® and AcoustiCabinets® Storage Cabinets Work Surface Laminate Colors Laminate Color

Graphite

Rehearsal Resource Centers and Select Lab Workstations are available with the same laminate colors as the other cabinets. The horizontal work surface laminate is Graphite with black edge banding only. Hardware and Fasteners are black only.

Rehearsal Resource Center (shown in Cherry)

Edge Banding

Black

Hardware, Painted Grille & Fasteners

Select Lab Workstation – Fixed and Adjustable Height Models

(shown in Cherry)

Black

Horizontal Surfaces

Essential Lab Workstation

(shown in Cherry)

Hardware and Fasteners are black only.

Laminate Color

Grey Nebula

Edge Banding

On 38” high cabinets with work surface tops, the work surface laminate is Grey Nebula with black edge banding only.

38” High Cabinet

(shown in Solar Oak)

Work Surface

Black

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 40

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

Application Information

Media Storage Cabinets

Standard Laminates

Color Sample Card Color Combination Options Laminate Color

Cherry

Solar Oak

Fusion Maple

Wenger Maple

Edge Banding

Cherry

Black

Almond

Oyster

Hardware & Fasteners

Black

Graphite

Evening Tigris

Pebble

Oyster

Edge Banding

Black

Pepper Dust

Oyster

Hardware & Fasteners

Black

Laminate Color

Colors contained in this card are approximations. Actual colors may vary slightly. Contact your Sales Representative for a physical sample. Top work surface is available in Shark Grey color only.

Mobile Media Storage Cabinet shown in Solar Oak Fixed Media Storage Cabinet shown in Cherry WENGER CORPORATION 555 Park Drive, PO Box 448 Owatonna, MN 55060-0448 Phone 800.4WENGER (493-6437) Fax 507.455.4258 Parts & Service 800.887.7145

WENGER CORPORATION CANADA OFFICE Phone 800.268.0148

WORLDWIDE Phone 1.507.455.4100 Fax 1.507.774.8576

WEB SITE www.wengercorp.com

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.f. 41

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Storage

OnBoardÂ® INTERIORS BINDER

OnBoard

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

OnBoard® Cargo Cart

OnBoard® Field Podium

OnBoard® Auxiliary Podium

OnBoard® Timpani Cart

OnBoard® Percussion Cart

OnBoard® Bass Drum/Gong Cart

OnBoard® Speaker Cart

OnBoard® Keyboard Cart

OnBoard

OnBoard® Uniform Cart

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Uniform Cart 210A007 OnBoard Uniform Cart, 56 lbs. (25 kg). Ideal for transporting marching band uniforms in the storage compartments of a coach bus. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers and trucks. Equipped with two 16-gauge, 1-1/4" (32 mm) round steel tubing with steel end plates for labeling. Frame is constructed of 14-gauge 1-1/4" (32 mm) round tubular steel in black powder-coat paint finish. Back and bottom tray constructed of black ABS plastic for superior strength and durability. Fits through standard 32" (813 mm) door. Includes built-in handholds for tilting and sliding cart into storage compartment - no lifting involved. Glides included on back of cart for sliding into compartment. Capacity for twenty-four marching band uniforms. 28 hanger retainer clips included with cart. All-swivel, non-marring solid polypropylene 4" dia. (102 mm) casters provide easy maneuverability. Dimensions: 48" (1219 mm) long x 23" (584 mm) deep x 43" (1092 mm) high. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Shipped fully assembled.

45-1/2" (1156 mm)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(12 48 19 " mm

) " 23 mm) 4 8 (5

2018-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Cargo Cart • • • • • • • • • • • •

210A003 6' (1829 mm) OnBoard Cargo Cart, 130 lb (59 kg) with hard casters. 210A004 6' (1829 mm) OnBoard Cargo Cart, 130 lb (59 kg) with pneumatic casters. Ideal for transporting marching band uniforms, hats, garments, and musical instruments. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers and trucks with minimum 6' (1829 mm) door height. Fits through standard 3’ (914 mm) door. Equipped with removable full-length garment bar and forty hanger retainer clips. Up to three adjustable height shelves can be installed (sold separately). Bottom shelf stores and transports hats, flags (under 6' [1829 mm] in length) and instruments. Capacities: thirty-five marching band uniforms on garment bar, twenty-one hats on bottom shelf. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Garment Bar constructed of 12-gauge 1-1/4" (32 mm) round tubing with load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Uprights constructed of 16-gauge 1-1/4" (32 mm) round tubing; include slots for adding additional shelves. • Bottom shelf is constructed of 16-gauge steel construction with black powder-coat paint finish. • Top of garment bar to top of bottom shelf is 5' 1-1/2" (1562 mm). • All-swivel, non-marking solid or pneumatic casters provide easy maneuverability.

jus

tab

Range of 13 to 19" (330 to 483 mm)

igh

lf (

jus

tab

Range of 13 to 19" (330 to 483 mm)

Range of 15-3/4 to 18-3/4" (400 to 476 mm)

lf (

jus

tab

tio

igh

70-1/2" (1791 mm)

lf (

tio

elf

• UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Shipped unassembled.

igh

(In

clu

(1872-1 42 /2" mm ) 2" -1/ ) 31 0 mm 0 (8

Accessories • 210A002 - Adjustable Shelf, 50 lb (23 kg). • 210B230 - Hanger Retainer Clip (Bag of 40). • 210A220 - Protective Cover.

2018-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Field Podium

•

72" (1829 mm)

• • •

210C018 OnBoard 72" (1829 mm) Field Podium, 263 lbs. (119 kg). 46" x 60" (1168 mm x 1524 mm) deck size designed to accommodate up to two Drum Majors, 600 lbs. (272 kg) maximum. Easy fold design allows two people to set up unit in less than one minute. Full 40" (1016 mm) wide ladders on both sides for fast and easy access with 2" (51 mm) wide rungs for stepping ease. Sturdy 3/4" (19 mm) deck with lightweight 3" (76 mm) aluminum frame. Quadripple anti-slip deck surface. All steel frame for maximum durability. Includes two gas assist springs for easy lift. Folds flat onto 8" (203 mm) wheels for compact storage and rolls easily into trailers and trucks. Podium locks into set up position on four wheels. Four non-marring, durable rubber wheels for ease of handling on multiple surfaces. Two 1-1/8" (29 mm) tubular, 16-gauge removable boundary rails can be positioned front or back with simple see through design. Tow bar included for pulling by hand or by small garden tractor. Can be used as a cart for transporting items while in the collapsed position with a load capacity of 300 lbs (136 kg). Dimensions: - Performance Position - with rail - 46-1/4" wide x 96" long x 110" high (1175 x 2438 x 2794 mm). - without rail - 46-1/4" wide x 96" long x 72" high (1175 x 2438 x 1829 mm). - Stored Position - 46-1/4" wide x 96" long x 21-1/2" high (1175 x 2438 x 546 mm). Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Shipped ready to assemble. Five-year warranty.

110" (2794 mm)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

96" (2438 mm

) 46-1/2" (1181 mm)

21-1/2" (546 mm)

46 (118 -1/2" 1 mm

96" ) (2438 mm )

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 3

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Auxiliary Podium • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210C019 OnBoard 42" (1067 mm) Auxiliary Podium, 81 lbs. (37 kg). 28" x 32" (711 x 813 mm) deck size designed to accommodate one person. Easy fold design allows one person to set up unit in less than one minute. Full 23" (584 mm) width ladder for fast and easy access with 2" (51 mm) wide rungs for stepping ease. Sturdy 3/4" deck with lightweight 3" (76 mm) aluminum frame. Quadripple anti-slip deck surface. All steel frame for maximum durability. Folds flat onto 6" (152 mm) wheels for compact storage and rolls easily into trailers and trucks. Two locking pins to secure unit in performance position and storage position. Two non-marring, durable rubber wheels for ease of handling on multiple surfaces. One 1-1/8" (29 mm) tubular, 16-gauge removable boundary rail can be positioned front or back. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Dimensions: - Performance Position: - with rail - 32" wide x 72" long x 80" high (813 x 1828 x 2032 mm). - without rail - 32" wide x 72" long x 42" high (813 x 1828 x 1067 mm). - Stored Position - 32" wide x 54" long x 8" high (813 x 1372 x 203 mm). • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Shipped fully assembled. • Five-year warranty.

80" (2032 mm)

42" (1067 mm)

72" (1828 mm)

32" (813 mm)

8" (203 mm)

32" (813 mm)

54" (1372 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 4

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Timpani Cart • 210B016 OnBoard Timpani Cart, 180 lbs. (82 kg). • Ideal for transporting timpani onto field for marching band competitions. With one turn, cart places timpani in proper performance position. • Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers and trucks. • Fits all five sizes of timpani, 20", 23", 26", 29", and 32" (508, 584, 660, 737 and 813 mm) diameters. • Holds up to four drums of any size. • Cart deck is constructed of 3/4" (2 mm) thick plywood with non-skid, textured polypropylene surface, edging is 1/8" (3 mm) beveled PVC. • Load capacity of 200 lbs. (91 kg). • Drop down stabilizer bars are included on front of cart and player platform. • Carts can separate and be used individually. • Fold down player platform quickly locks into performance position. • Tie down rings allow timpani to be secured in place for storage and transport. • Tow Bar included for pulling carts by hand or by small garden tractor. • Durable black powder-coat paint finish. • Each cart includes four rigid 10" (254 mm) diameter pneumatic wheels for easy maneuverability. • Dimensions: Towing Position - 34-1/2" wide x 149" long x 12" high (876 x 3785 x 305 mm) Performance Position - 90" wide x 90" long x 12" high (2286 x 2286 x 305 mm). • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Patent Pending. • Shipped ready to assemble.

Cart shown in Towing Position 12" (305 mm)

14 (3785 9" mm)

/2" ) -1 m 34 6 m 7 (8

90" (2286 mm)

Top View

Cart shown in Performance Position

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 5

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Percussion Cart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210C006 OnBoard Percussion Cart, 90 lbs. (41 kg). Ideal for transporting small percussion equipment onto the field for marching band competitions. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers and trucks. Fits through standard 32" (813 mm) door. Ergonomic curved design with all instruments within arm’s reach for easy playing ability. Tow bar included for pulling additional carts or with small garden tractor or Gator™. Includes four accessory mounts for attaching small percussion instruments. Additional accessory mounts are available. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Top curved bar constructed of durable 0.125" (3 mm) thick wall x 2" (51 mm) square aluminum extrusion. Bottom curved bar constructed of 14-gauge, 1" (25 mm) x 1-1/2" (38 mm) steel tubing. Upright tubes constructed of 14-gauge 1-3/4" (45 mm) round tubing. Attractive aluminum extrusion includes pocket for storage of mallets and drumsticks. Two swivel and two rigid 8" (203 mm) diameter pneumatic casters provide easy maneuverability on all surfaces. Dimensions: 72-1/4" (1835 mm) long x 31" (787 mm) deep x 49-1/2" (1257 mm) high. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. Five-year warranty. Shipped fully assembled.

49-1/2" (1257 mm)

(1872-1 35 /4" mm )

" 31 mm) 7 8 7 (

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 6

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Bass Drum/Gong Cart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210B013 OnBoard Bass Drum/Gong Cart, 81 lbs. (37 kg). Ideal for rolling bass drum or gong onto field for competitions or indoor concerts and rehearsal. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers, and trucks. Dual-purpose use for both bass drum and gong. Elastic suspension system designed to easily hold the weight of a large bass drum or gong up to 40" (1016 mm) in diameter. Loop tube constructed of 16-gauge, 1" (25 mm) square tubing with steel eyebolts included. Drum rotates into performance position in 15-degree increments and locks. Fits through 28" (711 mm) door opening. Only 25-1/2" wide (648 mm) base for easy playing ability. Rolls on two rigid and two swivel 8" (203 mm) pneumatic wheels. Tow bar included for pulling by hand or by small garden tractor. Mallet storage included on both sides of cart. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Dimensions: 25-1/2" wide x 64" long x 57-1/2" high (648 x 1626 x 1461 mm) UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Shipped unassembled.

57-1/2" (1461 mm)

" 1/2 25- mm) 8 (64

6 (162 4" 6 mm

)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 7

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Speaker Cart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210A017 OnBoard Speaker Cart, two-pack, 174 lbs. (79 kg). Ideal for transporting speakers onto field for marching band competitions. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers, and trucks. Moves heavy-duty speakers up to 14" deep x 24" wide (356 x 610 mm). Supports one speaker up to 50 lbs (23 kg). Cart tilts speakers into performance position at 0, 15, 30, and 45 degree angle. Support tray constructed of 1/4" (6 mm) thick steel plate with 14-gauge, 1-1/2" (38 mm) round steel tubing. Fits through 28" (711 mm) door opening. Rolls on two rigid and two locking swivel 8" (203 mm) pneumatic wheels. Tow bar included for pulling by hand or by small garden tractor. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Available with optional battery tray to hold power packs. Dimensions: 25-1/2" wide x 39" long x 27" high (648 x 991 x 686 mm). UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Shipped unassembled. Accessories • 210A015 Battery Tray, 8 lbs. (3.6 kg). • Holds battery power packs. • Dimensions: 16-1/4" wide x 13-1/2" deep x 1-1/4" high (413 x 343 x 32 mm). 27" (686 mm)

OnBoard Speaker Cart shown with Optional Battery Tray.

(99 39" 1m m

) 2" -1/ ) 25 8 mm 4 (6

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 8

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

OnBoard® Keyboard Cart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

210C005 OnBoard Keyboard Cart, 150 lbs. (68 kg). Ideal for transporting electronic keyboard equipment onto the field for marching band competitions. Designed to fit into trailers, semi-trailers and trucks. Fits through standard 32" (813 mm) door. Bottom shelf stores audio components, cables, and small speakers. Top shelf rotates (10 degrees maximum), and includes adjustable clamps for holding keyboard in place. Top shelf adjusts vertically in 1-1/2" (38 mm) increments, allowing 3" (76 mm) of total adjustment. 100’ (30480 mm) capacity power cord reel included. Tow bar included for pulling additional carts or with small garden tractor or Gator™. Accommodates up to 88-key keyboards. Optional shelf extensions available for placement of small speakers or small mixer. Durable black powder-coat paint finish. Upright tubes constructed of 14-gauge 1-3/4" (45 mm) round tubing, with aluminum extrusion. Two swivel and two rigid 8" (203 mm) dia. pneumatic casters provide easy maneuverability on all surfaces. Top and bottom shelf constructed of 16-gauge steel with black powder-coat paint finish. Dimensions: 68-3/4" (1746 mm) long x 31" (787 mm) deep x 41" to 44" (1041 to 1118 mm) high. UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. • Ships fully assembled. Accessories • 210A008 - Shelf Extensions, 2-pack, 25 lbs (11kg)

31" m) m (787

41" to 44"" (1041 to 1118 mm)

68 (174 -3/4" 6m m)

OnBoard Keyboard Cart shown with optional shelf extensions.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.g. 9

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS OnBoard

Acoustical Shells INTERIORS BINDER

Acoustical Shells

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Legacy® Basic Acoustical Shell

Travelmaster™ Acoustical Shell

Acoustical Shells

Legacy® Classic Acoustical Shell

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

LEGACY® BASIC ACOUSTICAL SHELL

With the Legacy® Basic Acoustical Shell, setting up great acoustics is easier than ever. Creating acoustical shells that meet your needs is part of Wenger’s tradition. The Legacy Basic Acoustical Shell continues to set the standards for ease of setup, acoustical effectiveness and flexibility at your most affordable price. In its storage position, Legacy Basic Shells move through standard doorways and will roll around your facility with ease. To set it up, all it takes is one person and six rotations of a handle. The canopy locks into one of four different angles. This provides adjustable acoustics, which benefits all types of performances from choral to instrumental. Considering the acoustical performance, ease of use, aesthetics, Wenger customer service and the five year warranty, Legacy Basic Acoustical Shells are a great value.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

LEGACY® BASIC ACOUSTICAL SHELL LEGACY SHELL SETS Legacy can be configured to accommodate virtually any size performing group. Please call your Wenger rep for help finding the perfect set for your ensembles. Available in tapered and rectangular canopy options.

Simple, safe one-person setup.

Rollaway line art 7/95

Legacy Choral Sets 42'-wide (12802 m m) Legacy Units: 7 Risers: 4-foot=10 or 6-foot=7 Group Size: 84-112

Rollaway line art 7/95

Adjust snap-in pins for desired canopy angle.

Lift canopy to presetRollaway lineTurn handle of lift art angle for optimum 7/95 mechanism to set sound projection. shell height into performance position.

36'-wide (10973 mm) Legacy Units: 6 Risers: 4-foot=8 or 6-foot=6 Group Size: 72-96

Rollaway line art 7/95

Chor al

Easy-to-turn

30'-wide (9144 mm)

Band/Or chestra Rollaway line art handle on the 7/95

Legacy Units: 3 Chor al Risers: 4-foot=4 or 6-foot=3 Group Size: 36-48

Legacy Band/Orchestra Sets Rollaway line art 7/95

)

48' (14630 mm)

Legacy Units: 16 Group Size: 100-110

)

Rollaway line art 7/95

(73

42' (12802 mm)

Rollaway line art 7/95

Band/Or chestra

Legacy Units: 13 Group Size: 85-96

Legacy Basic, Tapered Canopy, 296 lbs (134 kg) Legacy Basic, Rectangular Canopy, 304 lbs (138 kg)

Chor al

) mm 86 (54

' 18

• Upper panels are flat in standard 1" (25 mm) thick. Lower panel is 3/4" (19 mm) thick. All are 6' (1829 mm) wide Band/Or chestra • Lower fixed panel is constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) thick composite laminated wood with edgebanding • Easy, intuitive lift mechanism for raising and lowering shell • Canopy folds flat for storage, and middle panel overlaps bottom panel • Legs protrude in front of shell to provide counterweighted base design • No kicker panel, bottom panel rests 6" (152 mm) from floor • Canopy is 36" (91 cm) high providing less coverage than Legacy Classic model • Fully extended height is 13' 3" (4039 mm) • Ships fully assembled • Available in Oyster finish only Oyster • Canopy adjusts to 45, 60, 75 and 90 degree angles • Tapered Canopy: 296 lbs (134 kg). Rectangular Canopy: 304 lbs (138 kg) • In storage position, unit fits through a standard 36" x 80" (914 x 2032 mm) door opening • Folded dimensions are 6' 6"h x 31.5"d (1981 x 800 mm). When multiple units are nested together for storage each additional shell adds 10" (254 mm) 186J052 186J053

18'-wide (5486 mm)

Band/Or chestra

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Band/Or chestra

A continuous hinge allows canopy to fold and raise easily.

Guides allow for smooth height adjustment and stop panel at full height.

Chor al

24'-wide (7315 mm) Legacy Units: 4 Risers: 4-foot=5 or 6-foot=4 Group Size: 48-64 Chor al

(73

Snap-in pin sets canopy to any of 4 preferred angles.

Legacy Units: 5 Chor al Risers: 4-foot=7 or 6-foot=5 Group Size: 60-80

frame raises the shell to the Band/Or maximum chestra height in just six turns.

Roll shell into place.

(54 18 86 ' mm )

Shells nest together for compact storage.

Chor al

Band/Or chestra

) mm 86 (54

PURCHASE ONLINE!

' 18

(54 18 86 ' mm )

36' (10973 mm)

Legacy Band/OrUnits: chestra 12 Group Size: 60-75

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 2

Chor al

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Legacy® Basic Acoustical Shell • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

186J052, Tapered Canopy, 296 lbs. (134 kg). 186J053, Rectangular Canopy, 304 lbs. (138 kg). 6' (1829 mm) wide panels. Canopy and Middle Panels are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) honeycomb core with 0.10" (2.54 mm) thick laminated hardboard skin on front and back. Overall panel thickness is 1" (25 mm). Fixed Bottom Panel is constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) laminated particleboard Canopy with grey 1/8" (3mm) edgebanding. The Canopy Panel may be set at 45, 60, 75, and 90 degree angles using gas assists to hold the Canopy at the desired angle. Base and Shell Frame are constructed of black power-coat painted steel. Base includes protruding legs at the front of the shell. Lift mechanism includes a crank handle with a pulley design assisted by a Middle Panel torsion spring to raise and lower the shell. The shell is fully deployed into its Performance Position with just six turns. The Middle Panel overlaps the Bottom Panel in the Performance Position. Canopy Panel dimensions are 6' wide x 36" high (1829 x 914 mm). Includes four 3" dia. (76 mm) swivel, non-marring thermoplastic casters for easy movement. Fits through a standard 36" (914 mm) door opening in the Storage Position. Bottom panel rests 7" (178 mm) from floor. 2 2 Overall shell surface coverage is 78 ft . (7.2 m ). Fully extended height is 13' (3962 mm). Lower Panel Front panel color is a neutral Oyster that allows the shell to be placed almost anywhere. Shells nest compactly at 10" (254 mm) per unit. Shipped assembled. Five-year warranty. Set up videos are available at www.wengercorp.com. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative.

6' (18

Base

29 mm

)

Legacy Basic Acoustical Shell

approx. from 8'9" to 13'6" (2667 to 4115 mm)

approx. from 7'11" to 12'4" (2413 to 3783 mm)

approx. 6'4" (1930 mm)

10" (254 mm) 31.5" (800 mm)

50" (1270 mm)

Nesting

31.5" (800 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information Easy Set-Up Instructions General Setup includes: 1. Roll the tower as close to the final Performance Position as possible.

4. Turn the Crank clockwise to raise the panels. The Crank will stop when the panels reach the maximum Performance Position.

2. Insert a Pin into both of the Brackets to set the Canopy Panel Performance Angle.

3. Raise the Canopy Panel until it contacts the Stop Pins. The Panel will hold itself in place. 90째 75째 60째 45째

Legacy Basic Acoustical Shell Data: Max Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13'6" (4115 mm) Storage Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6'4" (1930 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6'0" (1829 mm) Storage Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1/2" (800 mm) Nesting Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10" (254 mm) Canopy Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36" (914 mm)

2018-02

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

LEGACY® CLASSIC ACOUSTICAL SHELL

With the Legacy® Classic Acoustical Shell, setting up great acoustics is easier than ever. Creating acoustical shells that meet your needs is part of Wenger’s tradition. The Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell continues to set the standards for ease of setup, acoustical effectiveness and flexibility. In its storage position, Legacy Classic Shells move through standard doorways and will roll around your facility with ease. To set it up, all it takes is one person and six rotations of a handle. The large canopy locks into one of four different angles. This provides adjustable acoustics, which benefits all types of performances from choral to instrumental. Considering the acoustical performance, ease of use, aesthetics, Wenger customer service and the five year warranty, Legacy Classic Acoustical Shells are a great value.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

LEGACY® CLASSIC ACOUSTICAL SHELL LEGACY SHELL SETS Legacy can be configured to accommodate virtually any size performing group. Please call your Wenger rep for help finding the perfect set for your ensembles. Available in tapered and rectangular canopy options.

Simple, safe one-person setup.

Rollaway line art 7/95

Roll shell into place. Lower its kick panel and raise and set the canopy.

Use tool to adjust canopy angle for optimum sound projection.

Turn handle of lift mechanism to set shell height into performance position.

Legacy Choral Sets 42'-wide (12802 mm) Legacy Units: 7 Risers: 4-foot=10 or 6-foot=7 Group Size: 84-112

Rollaway line art Position 7/95 panels

together to create your finished shell. Rollaway line art 7/95

36'-wide (10973 mm) Legacy Units: 6 Risers: 4-foot=8 or 6-foot=6 Group Size: 72-96

“I cannot believe the in sound when the Legacy shell is up. Our gym has very Rollaway line artbut I can clearly good acoustics, 7/95 tell whether or not the shell is chestra up. The Legacy shellsBand/Or are very easy to work with – my kids and I can easily handle them.” Rollaway line art 7/95difference

Chor al

30'-wide (9144 mm)

Legacy Units: 5 Chor al Risers: 4-foot=7 or 6-foot=5 Group Size: 60-80

Band/Or chestra – Cydney Dixon, Band Director, Lower Lake High School, Lower Lake, California

Chor al

24'-wide (7315 mm)

Legacy Units: 4 Risers: 4-foot=5 or 6-foot=4 Group Size: 48-64 Chor al

Band/Or chestra

18'-wide (5486 mm)

Legacy Units: 3 Chor al Risers: 4-foot=4 or 6-foot=3 Group Size: 36-48

Band/Or chestra

) '

(73

Legacy Units: 16 Group Size: 100-110

)

42' (12802 mm)

(54 18 86 ' mm )

Rollaway line art 7/95

’

186L054 Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell, Tapered Canopy, 434 lbs (197 kg) 186L055 Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell, Rectangular Canopy, 446 lbs (202 kg)

Rollaway line art 7/95

Legacy Units: 13 Band/Or chestra85-96 Group Size:

Chor al

36' (10973 mm) Band/Or chestra

) ’ 18 mm 86 (54

Panels are flat in standard 1" (25 mm) thick construction, 6' (1829 mm) wide Oyster Improved lift mechanism to raise and lower shell Canopy folds flat for storage and is adjustable to 45, 60, 75 and 90 degree angles Additional Kicker panel provides coverage within 2" (51 mm) of floor, and folds up for storage Charge for: All panels fit flush with no overlap shadows Harvest Maple No unsightly exposed fasteners Fully extended height is 15' 2" (4623 mm) Canopy is 54" (1372 mm) high and available in tapered or rectangular design In storage position, unit fits through a standard 36" x 80" (914 x 2032 mm) door opening Available in Oyster solid color or Harvest Maple woodgrain finish Includes counterweighted base system, with no legs protruding in front of shell Tapered Canopy: 434 lbs (197 kg). Rectangular Canopy: 446 lbs (202 kg) Folded dimensions are 6' 6"h x 34.5"d (1981 x 876 mm). When multiple units are nested together for storage each additional shell adds 10.625" (270 mm)

48' (14630 mm)

) ’ 18 mm 86 (54

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Standard Color:

Legacy Band/Orchestra Sets

Rollaway line art 7/95

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Legacy Classic is available with a rectangular or tapered canopy.

Easy-to-turn handle on the frame raises the shell to the maximum height in just six turns.

Panels fit together when in performance position without overlapping.

(54 18 ’ 86 mm )

Canopy locks in the desired position.

(73

Magnetic latch holds panels in performance position.

Legacy Band/OrUnits: chestra 12 Group Size: 60-75

PURCHASE ONLINE!

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 6

Chor al

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Legacy® Classic Acoustical Shell • 186L054._, Tapered Canopy, 434 lbs. (197 kg). • 186L055._, Rectangular Canopy, 446 lbs. (202 kg). • 6' (1829 mm) wide panels are constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) honeycomb core with 0.10" (2.54 mm) thick laminated hardboard skin on front and back. Overall panel thickness is 1" (25.4 mm). • The Canopy Panel may be set at 45, 60, 75, and 90 degree angles. • Base and Shell Frame are constructed of oyster powder-coat painted steel. • Lift mechanism includes a crank handle with a pulley design assisted by a torsion spring to raise and lower the shell. The shell is fully deployed into its Performance Position with just six turns. • The Upper Panel aligns over the Lower Panel using magnets and lowers over locking pins to hold the shell in the Performance Position. • The Canopy Tool is included to raise and lower the Canopy Panel. • Includes four swivel, non-marring rubber casters for easy movement. Front Casters are 4" dia (102 mm) and Back Caster are 3" dia (91 mm). • In the storage position, unit fits through a 36" (914 mm) wide by 80" (2032 mm) high door opening. • Lower Filler Panel rests a maximum of 1" (25 mm) from floor for superior acoustical performance and folds for storage and transport. • Overall shell surface coverage is 90 ft2 (8.4 m2). • Fully extended height is 15'2" (4623 mm). • Panel finishes are available in: - Solid color laminate: Oyster - Wood grain laminate: Harvest Maple • Shells nest compactly at 10-5/8" (270 mm) per unit. • Some assembly is required. • Five-year warranty. • Set up videos are available at www.wengercorp.com. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative.

Canopy Panel

Upper Panel

Lower Panel

Base Filler Panel

6' (1829 m

Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell

approx. 15'2" (4623 mm)

approx. 13'11" (4242 mm)

approx. 6'6" (1981 mm)

Nesting

10-5/8" (270 mm) 34-1/2" (876 mm)

70-1/2" (1791 mm)

30" (762 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information Easy Set-Up Instructions 1. Roll the tower as close to the final Performance Position as possible. 2. Pull out on the bottom of the Upper Panel and unfold the Filler Panel.

5. Turn the Crank clockwise to raise the panels. The Crank will stop when the panels reach the tower's maximum height.

3. Move the Canopy Lock Knob to the "Raise Canopy" Position.

4. Lift the Canopy Panel and use the Canopy Tool to raise it to one of the four set position angles.

90째=0" (0 mm) Deep 75째=14" (356 mm) Deep III IIII 60째=27" (686 mm) Deep II 45째=38.5" (978 mm) DeepI

" (1

6. Push the Upper Panel against the magnets. Turn the Crank in the opposite direction to lower the Upper Panel until it rests on the Lower Panel in the Performance Position.

Legacy Classic Acoustical Shell Data: Height Canopy at 45 degrees . . 13'11" (4242 mm) Max Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15'2" (4623 mm) Storage Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6'6" (1981 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6'0" (1829 mm) Storage Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5/8" (880 mm) Nesting Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5/8" (270 mm) Canopy Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38" (965 mm) Panel Weight (approx.) . . . . . . . 1.3 lbs. (0.59 kg) per square foot

2018-02

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

TRAVELMASTER™ ACOUSTICAL SHELL

Consistent acoustics wherever you go. When you’re out on tour, even your finest performances can suffer from poor acoustic venues. But Travelmaster Acoustical Shells allow you to take a familiar acoustical environment with you wherever you go. The sound reflection helps musicians hear themselves — and the rest of the group — so tone, timing and balance can be perfect in any environment. Plus, Travelmaster Shells are easy to transport and set up is simple, so they go just about anywhere. And they store in an extremely small space.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information

TRAVELMASTER™ ACOUSTICAL SHELL TRAVELMASTER ACOUSTICAL SHELL SETS A Travelmaster Acoustical Shell Set can fit the needs of any size group. For groups on the go we recommend using them with Tourmaster Choral Risers. Shown here are some of the most common sets for band/orchestra and choral, but we recommend calling a Wenger representative before ordering to ensure you get what you need. Travelmaster Band/Orchestra Sets Trav elmaster line art 7/95

Trav elmaster line art 7/95

' 7" 22 m) 3m 88 (6

22 ' 7" (6 88 3m m)

48'3" (14707 mm) Trav elmaster line art 7/95

16 Base Panels 13 Filler Panels Group Size: 100-110 Trav elmaster line art Trav elmaster lineProduct art Number: L785 7/95 7/95

Trav elmaster line art

7/95 41'10" (12751 mm)

Band/Or chestra

'7" 22 m) 3m 88 (6

Travelmaster Acoustical Shells are designed to work perfectly with Wenger Seated Risers, as well as Wenger Signature® and Tourmaster™ Choral Risers. The arrangement shown here features a classic semicircle configuration of five seamless Tourmaster choral risers.

22 '7" (6 88 3m m)

Trav elmaster line art 7/95

Band/Or chestra 15 Base Panels Trav elmaster line art 12 Filler7/95 Panels Group Size: 85-96 Band/Or chestra Product Number: L775

Band/Or chestra

• The most convenient, cost-effective and reliable way to ensure consistent acoustics within any environment. • Durable, lightweight and easy-to-handle. • Compact, with three easy storage options: 1. Store in the standing/nested position with fillers on the side. 2. Store flat in a stack. 3. Store on the specially designed Move & Store Cart. • Stackable to fit in a van, SUV, trailer or bus. • Oyster color. • Patented design. L015 Travelmaster Base Panel, 87 lbs (39 kg) L035 Travelmaster Filler Panel, 20 lbs (9 kg)

'2" 8m m)

92 (4

) '2" 16 mm 8 92

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

35'5" (10795 mm)

The Travelmaster Move & Store Cart was specially designed to make moving Travelmaster easy for just one person. The safe, smooth-rolling cart holds five base panels with legs and four filler units, typical for a 60- to 80-member choir or a small ensemble. And it requires only 6'7"w x 2'5"d x 3'11"h (2007 x 737 x 1194 mm) of storage space.

Band/Or chestra

12 Base Panels 9 Filler Panels Band/Or chestra Group Size: 60-75 Product Number: L745Band/Or chestra

Travelmaster Choral Sets 41'10" 7 Base Panels (12751 mm) 6 Filler Panels Risers: 4-foot=10 or 6-foot=7 Group Size: 82-112 Product Number: L555 35'5" 6 Base Panels (10795 mm) 5 Filler Panels Risers: 4-foot=8 or 6-foot=6 Group Size: 72-96 Chor al Product Number: L545 Chor al 29' 5 Base Panels (8839 mm) 4 Filler Panels Chor al Risers: 4-foot=7 or 6-foot=5 Group Size: 60-80 Product Number: L535 Chor al Chor al 22'7" 4 Base Panels (6883 mm) 3 Filler Panels Risers: 4-foot=5 or 6-foot=4 Group Size: 48-64 Chor al Product Number: L525 Chor al 16'2" 3 Base Panels (4928 mm) 2 Filler Panels Chor al Risers: 4-foot=4 or 6-foot=3 Group Size: 36-48 Product Number: L515

Travelmaster sets consist of alternating Base Panels and Filler Panels. The Base Panels – large, reflective, geometric shapes with folding legs – interlock with the Filler Panels for consistent sound and stability.

TRAVELMASTER MOVE & STORE CART • The safe, easy way to move Travelmaster. • Holds five base panels with legs and four filler units, typical for a 60- to 80-member choir or a small instrumental ensemble. • Requires only 6'7"w x 2'5"d x 3'11"h (2007 x 737 x 1194 mm) of storage space. • Built-in steering handle. • Two locking swivel casters facilitate moving. • Easy to assemble. 064A170 Travelmaster Move & Store Cart, 75 lbs (34 kg)

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Travelmaster™ Portable Acoustical Shell • • • • • • • • •

Standard: L015 87 lbs. (39 kg) Filler: L035 20 lbs. (9 kg). Panels are designed to control and reflect vocal and instrumental frequencies. Shell panels are constructed of contoured ABS plastic in oyster color. Shell consists of standard panels with legs and filler panels. Shells can be adjusted from heights of: 9'4" to 12'2" (2845 mm to 3708 mm). Durable lightweight Travelmaster Shell units are easy to setup and compact to store. Ideal for traveling. Features adjustable canopy for fine tuning. Patented. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. 40" (1016 mm) 36" (914 mm)

27" (686 mm)

40" (1016 mm)

37" (940 mm)

40" (1016 mm)

12'2" (3708 mm)

40" (1016 mm) 40" (1016 mm)

3'11" (1194 mm)

9'4" (2845 mm)

8'11" (2718 mm) Contracted

10'10" (3302 mm)

007 m

6'7" (2

9'9" (2972 mm) Expanded

72" (1829 mm)

Travelmaster Shell Accessories Storage Cart • 064A170 75 lbs (34 kg). • Transport Storage Cart holds five standard panels, four fillers and legs. • When filled, cart dimension is 6'7" long x 2'5" wide x 4'11" high (2007 x 737 x 1499 mm) of storage space.

Transport Storage Cart

9' 4-1/32" (2845 mm)

9' 11-7/16" (3032 mm)

10' 5-1/16" (3176 mm)

12' 2" (3708 mm)

2'5 " (7 37 mm )

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.h. 11

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Acoustical Shells

Standing Choral Risers INTERIORS BINDER

Standing Choral Risers

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

Signature® Choral Risers

Tourmaster™ Choral Risers

Tourmaster™ Storage & Transport Cart

Standing Choral Risers

flipFORMS®

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

SIGNATURE® CHORAL RISER

Proud Sponsor of Disney Performing Arts

The riser you’ve always wanted. Wenger has reinvented the choral riser with every advantage you can imagine in a single, striking, easy-to-handle design. Classic black styling. Simple setup. Lightweight construction. Superb stability. Smooth mobility that fits through standard doorways. Quick step reversibility. Available in a 3-step or 4-step design with permanent backrail and an optional side rail set (2) for added security. A compact footprint for less storage space. All backed by Wenger’s fifteen-year warranty. Wenger Signature Choral Risers – now you can have it all.

4-step Signature Riser shown with optional side rail

3-step Signature Riser shown with optional side rail

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

SIGNATURE® CHORAL RISER Step supports are welded steel for maximum stability and strength. Backrails are permanently attached for maximum safety.

Both the 3and 4-step models have a compact footprint. They tuck away into tiny areas, saving you precious storage space. And both Signature models fit through standard doorways.

Signature is easy for one person to roll and control.

Signature is designed from top-rail to floor to ensure flawless operation and long-lasting good looks. The level of detail is exquisite, with carpet edges protected by structural aluminum extrusions for a finishing touch that adds both distinction and stability.

Just maneuver it into place and unfold with a single fluid motion.

It sets up without tools to provide excellent stability.

Optional siderails provide additional security for performers of all ages.

Horseshoe

Winged

RISER STEP REVERSIBILITY Wenger makes it easy to change riser arrangements. Simply switch the position of the steps on the frame and reverse the horizontal back rail components on the vertical supports.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• Patented fold-down design is easy for one person to set up. • Steel construction for unparalleled stability and quiet performance. • Formal black styling is attractive and appropriate for any performance or venue. • 3-step riser is 6' (1829 mm) wide at back of third step. • 4-step riser is 6'-6 1/4" (1988 mm) wide at the back of fourth step. • Both 3- and 4-step models fit through standard doorways. • Both models feature a compact footprint for easier storage. • Sturdy backrail with child-height crossbar. • Option Siderail Set (2) for additional security is available as an accessory.

• • • •

Straight

Semicircular

Steps are 18" (457 mm) deep. Fifteen-year warranty. Assembly required. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance can be found at www.wengercorp.com/green-initiatives.php or by contacting your Wenger representative.

098G053 098G054 098G541

3-step Signature Riser, 227 lbs. (103 kg) 4-step Signature Riser, 316 lbs. (143 kg) Siderail (set of 2), 62 lbs. (28 kg)

PURCHASE ONLINE!

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Signature® Choral Risers • 3-Step 098G053 227 lb (103 kg) 4-Step 098G054 316 lb (143 kg) • Load rating of 150 lb live load capacity per ft2 (732 kg capacity per m2) • Steel construction for unparalleled stability and quiet performance • Portable units are designed for one-person mobility and setup • 3-Step Riser storage depth is 31" deep x 68" high x 72" wide (787 x 1727 x 1829 mm) 4-Step Riser storage depth is 31" deep x 77-1/4" high x 78" wide (787 x 1962 x 1981 mm) Nesting of additional units reduces storage depth • Both the 3-Step and 4-Step models have a 42” (1067 mm) high back rail that meets OSHA standards Risers fold with the back rail attached • Riser frame, back rails and side rails have a black powder-coat paint finish for maximum safety and durability • Steps are 18” (457 mm) deep and the rise of each step is 8” (203 mm) Steps are covered with manufacturer’s standard grey carpet • Built-in reversibility allows for straight or semi-circular configuration • Designed for in-facility use and easily fits through standard doorways Units have built-in swivel action wheels for maneuvering in tight spaces • Optional Side Rail Accessory (set of 2) 098G541 62 lb (28 kg) attaches to the riser and back rail Side Rail can be removed with the mounting brackets left attached during storage • Assembly is required, approximate assembly time is 45 minutes for the first unit and 30 minutes for each additional unit Assembly videos are available at www.wengercorp.com • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Fifteen-year warranty • Patented design

" (1

" 18 mm) 7 5 (4

8" (203 mm)

3-Step Riser with Optional Side Rail

66-1/2" (1689 mm)

42" (1067 mm)

" 18 mm) 7 5 (4

8" (203 mm)

4-Step Riser with Optional Side Rail

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 3

74-1/4" (1886 mm)

" (1

42" (1067 mm)

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

6' 6-1/4" (1988 mm)

6' (1829 mm)

18" (457 mm)

6' (1829 mm)

4' 5-1/2" (1358 mm)

3-Step Riser 9-1/2°

4' 5-1/2" (1358 mm)

4-Step Riser 12-3/8°

Risers nest together in the storage position, minimizing required storage space.

77-1/4" (1962 mm)

68" (1727 mm)

22" (559 mm)

31" (787 mm)

53" (1346 mm)

3-Step Risers Nested

25" (635 mm)

31" (787 mm)

56" (1422 mm)

4-Step Risers Nested

2019-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

TOURMASTER® CHORAL RISER

The perfect riser for choirs on the go. Tourmaster is the only choral riser truly designed to go where choirs go. Whether it’s up stairs or around tight corners, each Tourmaster choral riser folds up flat and rolls with the stability and ease of a two-wheel cart. They’re easy for anyone to maneuver, transport and set-up. Once in place, it takes just 10 seconds to unfold and lock into the upright position. And the Tourmaster Cart is the ideal tool for moving and storing multiple risers. Each cart holds up to four Tourmaster choral risers, backrails and 4th-step additions - the perfect solution for choirs that travel across the hall or across the country. No other comparable riser sets up so easily or stores in less space. Tourmaster steps come in either 18" or 24" (457 or 610 mm) depths for performers of all ages. Optional backrails and siderails provide added security and a refined look. And like all Wenger products, Tourmaster is built extremely tough to ensure solid performances, year after year.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

TOURMASTER® CHORAL RISER

18” (457 MM ) 3-STEP 6’ (1829 MM) TOURMASTER SETS

18” (457 MM ) 3-STEP 4’ (1219 MM) TOURMASTER SETS

24” (610 MM) 3-STEP 4’7” (1397 MM) TOURMASTER SETS

GROUP CAPACITY*

UNITS NEEDED

SPACE REQUIRED

8-12

8’6”w x 5’d (2591w x 1524d mm)

4’7”w x 6’2”d (1397w x 1880d mm)

16-24

12’7”w x 5’4”d (3835w x 1626d mm)

9’2”w x 6’6”d (2794w x 1981d mm)

24-36

32-48

16’8”w x 6’1”d (5080w x 1854d mm)

13’6”w x 6’10”d (4115w x 2083d mm)

32-48

26’10”w x 9’d (8179w x 2743d mm)

40-60

20’4”w x 6’8”d (6198w x 2032d mm)

17’10”w x 7’7”d (5436w x 2311d mm)

40-60

30’7”w x 10’10”d (9322w x 3302d mm)

48-72

23’10”w x 7’8”d (7264w x 2337d mm)

21’10”w x 8’2”d (6655w x 2489d mm)

48-72

84-112

33’6”w x 12’9”d (10211w x 3886d mm)

56-84

27’w x 8’8”d (8230w x 2642d mm)

25’8”w x 9’3”d (7823w x 2819d mm)

56-84

96-128

35’5”w x 15’d 10795w x 4572d mm

64-96

30’w x 9’11”d (9144w x 3023d mm)

29’2”w x 10’2”d (8890w x 3099d mm)

64-96

32’3”w x 11’6”d (9804w x 3505d mm)

GROUP CAPACITY*

UNITS NEEDED

SPACE REQUIRED

GROUP CAPACITY*

UNITS NEEDED

SPACE REQUIRED

12-16

6’w x 4’10”d (1829w x 1473d mm)

8-12

4’3”w x 4’8”d (1295w x 1422d mm)

24-32

11’10”w x 6’4”d (3607w x 1930d mm)

16-24

36-48

17’5”w x 6’3”d (5309w x 1905d mm)

24-36

48-64

22’5”w x 7’7”d (6833w x 2311d mm)

60-80

72-96

18”, 4' (457, 1219 mm ), 4th-step addition will add space for 3-4 performers per unit. 24” (610 mm), 4th-step addition will add space for 3-4 performers per unit. 18”, 6’ (457, 1829 mm), 4th-step addition will add space for 4-5 performers per unit.

* First number indicates how many performers will fit on a riser set if all performers stand shoulder to shoulder. Second number indicates how many performers will fit on a riser set if they are all facing center with shoulders overlapping. Numbers include a row of performers standing on the floor. Adult groups should use the lower capacity number.

Numbers vary depending on the physical size of members, overlapping shoulders and the use of the ground as an additional row. As a general rule, adult choirs should work with the smaller capacity number. Note: Choral risers are not designed for dance or active choreography.

The 6' x 18" (1829 x 457 mm) Tourmaster accommodates 12 - 16 choir members.

The 4' x 18" and 24" (1219 x 457 and 610 mm) Tourmaster accommodates 8 - 12 choir members.

Tourmaster Backrails and Siderails Optional backrails and siderails are recommended for added security. They attach quickly and securely with swing brackets and without the need for tools.

Tourmaster 4th-Step Addition An optional 4th-step addition is available for all Tourmaster Choral Risers. The 4th-step addition attaches to each corresponding Tourmaster Riser with integral leg clamps, without the need for tools.

Backrail Swing Bracket Siderail Swing Bracket

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 6

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

Pops up in just 10 seconds.

Four-foot Tourmaster rolls smoothly and securely down the hall, around tight corners, even down stairs.

For set-up, Tourmaster unfolds easily like an accordion.

Just step on the frame and lift. The Lift Assist mechanism helps you raise the riser and lock it into the upright position.

Once set up, Tourmaster is as solid and stable as heavier fold-and-roll risers.

Take down is just as easy. Just activate the foot-pedal release, push and let down.

Tourmaster Cart Perfect for moving and storing in your facility or traveling across the country.

Tourmaster carts are available for 4' and 6' (1219 and 1829 mm) 18" (457 mm) steps, as well as the 24" (610 mm) step Tourmaster riser.

Backrails nest together on Backrail Supports for storage or transport.

The Tourmaster cart holds up to four risers including four backrails and four 4th-step additions.

Carts have heavy-duty swivel casters for easy maneuverability and four pairs of Swing Arms that pivot outward for loading risers.

Risers stack easily, by alternating the direction of the riser positioning wheels.

Each Swing Arm lifts upward and pivots outward for stacking each riser then inserts into holding sockets for a secure fit.

Four 4th-step additions can be stacked on top of the fourth Swing Arm then attached securely to the cart frame with buckled straps.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com www.wengercorp.com â&#x20AC;˘ 1.800.4WENGER Interiors Binder | 02.i. 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information

TOURMASTER® CHORAL RISER

COLORS

Grey

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

PURCHASE ONLINE!

• • •

One-piece design makes set-up extremely fast (10 seconds) Easily travels up and down stairs and around tight corners Foot pedal activated cross brace locks or releases leg structure automatically One person set-up for four-foot model; two people recommended for six-foot model Quality construction stands up to years of rough treatment Narrow footprint for compact storage Heavy-duty wheels and built-in stair glides Grey metallic powder-coat finish Carpet available in Grey Steps are bolted to understructure for maximum security and reduced riser noise 3-step/18"-deep (457 mm) model available in 4' and 6' (1219 and 1829 mm) lengths, both with optional 4th-step addition 3-step/24"-deep (610 mm) model available in 4'7" (1397 mm) length with optional 4th-step addition Swing brackets attach the 4th-step addition to each choral riser without the need for tools Steps can be removed and reversed to create semi-circular or straight arrangements as group size changes Optional backrail and siderail available for all models Backrails comply with OSHA standards and can extend the full riser width to create a continuous backrail when multiple units are placed side-by-side 15-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship

TOURMASTER CART SPECIFICATIONS: • Cart holds up to four Tourmaster risers, four backrails and four 4th-step additions • Buckled straps attach 4th-step additions securely to cart frame • Backrails nest together on backrail supports • 6" (152 mm) diameter casters, all 4 casters swivel • Cart is steel construction with black baked on powder paint • Lift and rotate swing arms move out of the way to allow risers to be easily loaded and unloaded • Three cart sizes: Cart for 6' (1839 mm) Tourmaster risers with 18" (457 mm) steps, Part number: 024F950 Cart for 4' (1219 mm) Tourmaster risers with 18" (457 mm) steps, Part number: 024F951 Cart for 4'7" (1397 mm) Tourmaster risers with 24" (610 mm) steps, Part number: 024F952 • Fits through a standard 36" (914 mm) doorway – 24" (610 mm) riser requires 40" (1016 mm) doorway

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Tourmaster® Choral Risers • 6' x 18" (1829 x 457 mm) unit 130 lb (59 kg). 4' x 18" (1219 x 457 mm) unit 103 lb (47 kg). 4'7" x 24" (1397 x 610 mm) unit 127 lb (58 kg). • Load rating at 125 lbf/ft2 (6 kN/m2) • Portable 3-step unit, accordion style design folds compactly. • Ideal for groups that travel. • Frame is 7/8" (22 mm) 14-gauge square tubing. • Steps are 19/32" (16 mm) plywood covered with manufacturer’s standard grey carpet. • Step edging is Grey powder-coat paint finish. • Foot-pedal activated cross brace locks leg structure automatically. • Built-in reversibility allows for straight or semi-circular configuration. • Units have 3" (76 mm) non-marring rubber casters, built-in stair glides, two 4" (102 mm) wheels for positioning. • Available in 4' (1219 mm) and 6' (1829 mm) lengths with 18" (457 mm) usable step depth and 24” (610 mm) usable step depth. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Fifteen-year warranty.

" (1

66" (1676 mm)

32" (813 mm)

NOTE: Shown with optional back and side rail. 5' 1" (1549 mm) Riser Optional 4th-step

24" (610 mm)

4' 7" (1397 mm)

6-1/4°

3' 3" (991 mm)

4' (1219 mm) Riser

6' (1829 mm) Riser

16" (406 mm)

42" (1067 mm)

Accessories • 4th Step Addition: - 6' x 18" (1829 x 457 mm) unit 55 lb (25 kg). Storage dimensions 5” deep x 22” wide x 94” long (127 x 559 x 2388 mm) - 4' x 18" (1219 x 457 mm) unit 45 lb (20 kg). Storage dimensions 5” deep x 22” wide x 70” long (127 x 559 x 1778 mm) - 24" (610 mm) unit 55 lb (25 kg). • 4th Step Addition attaches to corresponding Tourmaster Riser with integral leg clamps, no tools needed. Must be removed prior to folding for storage. • Back rails have positioning wheels so that backrail support bar does not encumber moving riser in setup position. Back rails break down without tools for easy travel. • Back rails are Grey metallic powder-coat paint finish with quick and easy clamp attachment to 3-step unit or 4th step addition. 42" (1067 mm) height meets OSHA standards. • 4' (1219 mm) Back rail 24 lb (11 kg). 6' (1829 mm) Back rail 31 lb (14 kg). • Optional Side rails 8 lb (22 kg) are Grey metallic powder-coat paint finish and clamp to both the Back rail and the Riser. • Optional side rails are designed for risers set-up in the standard configuration. They do not fit on units set up in the reverse configuration.

24" (610 mm)

4' 7" (1397 mm) Optional 4th-step

6' 6-1/4” (1988 mm) Optional 4th-step

8" (203 mm)

Shown with Optional 4th-Step

6' (1829 mm)

6' x 18" (1829 x 457 mm) Riser = 83-1/4" (2115 mm) long x 20.5" (521 mm) wide 4' x 18" (1219 x 457 mm) Riser = 65-1/4" (1657 mm) long x 20.6" (523 mm) wide 24" (610 mm) Riser = 67" (1702 mm) long x 26.8" (681 mm) wide Optional 4th-Step must be removed prior to folding for storage.

4' 3" (1295 mm)

18" (457 mm)

14-3/4” (375 mm)

Folded Storage Position

9-1/2° 4' 5-1/2" (1359 mm)

6-1/4° 3' 3" (991 mm)

2019-05

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 9

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Tourmaster™ Storage and Transport Carts Cart for 6' Tourmaster® Risers with 18" steps • Part number: 024F950. • Weights and dimensions: Empty: 66" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (1676 x 768 x 1975 mm), 166 lb (75 kg). With 3-step risers and back rail: 84" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (2134 x 768 x 1975 mm), 800 lb (363 kg). With 3-step risers, back rail, and 4th step additions: 106" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (2692 x 768 x 1975 mm), 1012 lb (459 kg). • 6" (152 mm) diameter casters, all four casters swivel. • Cart is steel construction with black baked on powder paint. • Lift and rotate swing arms out of the way to allow risers to be easily loaded and unloaded. • Fits through a standard 36" (914 mm) doorway. • Cart is designed to carry four risers, four rails (back, side or a combination) and four optional 4th-steps. Cart for 4' Tourmaster® Risers with 18" steps • Part number: 024F951. • Weights and dimensions: Empty: 51" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (1295 x 768 x 1975 mm), 160 lb (73 kg). With 3-step risers and back rail: 68" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (173 x 768 x 1975 mm), 670 lb (304 kg). With 3-step risers, back rail, and 4th step additions: 87" long x 30-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (2210 x 768 x 1975 mm), 850 lb (386 kg). • 6" (152 mm) diameter casters, all four casters swivel. • Cart is steel construction with black baked on powder paint. • Lift and rotate swing arms out of the way to allow risers to be easily loaded and unloaded. • Fits through a standard 36" (914 mm) doorway. • Cart is designed to carry four risers, four back rails and four optional 4th-steps.

773/4" (198cm)

Cart for Tourmaster® Risers with 24" steps • Part number: 024F952. • Weights and dimensions: Empty: 51" long x 36-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (1295 x 921 x 1975 mm), 166 lb (77 kg). With 3-step risers and back rail: 68" long x 36-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (1727 x 921 x 1975 mm), 760 lb (345 kg). With 3-step risers, back rail, and 4th step additions: 87" long x 36-1/4" wide x 77-3/4" high (2210 x 921 x 1975 mm), 975 lb (442 kg). • 6" (152 mm) diameter casters, all 4 casters swivel. • Cart is steel construction with black baked on powder paint. • Lift and rotate swing arms out of the way to allow risers to be easily loaded and unloaded. • 40" (1016 mm) doorway required. • Cart is designed to carry four risers, four back rails and four optional 4th-steps.

Empty Cart

5 or 1" (1 66 30 " (1 cm 67 ) cm )

Loaded Cart ) cm ) (77 2cm " 9 4 1/ ( 30 61 /4" 3 or 2018-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

flipFORMS®

12" (305 mm)

" (1

2-Step Tiered Seating Capacity

3-Step Riser Capacity*

Grades 1-3

8 students/unit

16 students/unit

Grades 4-6

6 students/unit

12 students/unit

*Capacity using the floor as the front row.

" (7

24" (610 mm)

Grade Level

12" (305 mm)

Two Tier Back hinged section flips onto core unit. - Classroom Seating

)

1 " (1

" 15 m) 1m 8 (3 Units roll, nest and store in an upright position.

" 15 m) 1m

Wheels and recessed handles make it easy to transport flipFORMS.

" 15 m) 1m 8 (3

24" (610 mm)

(38

8" (203 mm)

Three Tier Back and front sections flip onto core unit. - Standing Risers - Stairs

)

1 " (1

2018-05

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 02.i. 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Standing Choral Risers

Staging and Seated Risers INTERIORS BINDER

Staging and Seated Risers

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

StageTek® Staging System

ADA Ramp

Trouper® Staging

StageTek® Seated Risers

Universal Storage Cart

Trouper® Seated Risers

Trouper® Storage Cart

Stagehand® Staging

Staging and Seated Risers

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Overview Standard Options Elevation (fixed legs) Elevation (adjustable legs) Top Material Frame

Standard Deck Sizes

StageTek速 Staging System

STRATA速 Staging

8" (203 mm) increments up to 40" (1016 mm) Custom heights available

7" (178 mm) up to 10' (3048 mm)

16" - 28" (406 - 711 mm) 24" - 40" (610 - 1016 mm) 30" - 54" (762 - 1372 mm)

6" - 48" (152 - 1219 mm)

Black textured, grey carpet, wood-tone hardboard or unfinished plywood

Black or sand polyglass, hardwood or unfinished plywood

4" (102 mm) extruded aluminum

Extruded aluminum

3' x 3' (914 x 914 mm) 3' x 6' (914 x 1829 mm) 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm) 4' x 4' (1219 x 1220 mm) 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm) 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) International Deck Sizes: 1x1 meter and 1x2 meters

4' x 2' (1219 x 610 mm) 4' x 4' (1219 x 1219 mm) 6' x 2' (1829 x 610 mm) 6' x 4' (1829 x 1219 mm) 8' x 2' (2438 x 610 mm) 8' x 4' (2438 x 1219 mm)

Pie shaped and custom decks are available

Custom Options Shapes

StageTek速 Staging System

STRATA速 Staging

Available

Tops

Available

Finishes

Available

Elevations

Available

Adjustable Legs

Available

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 1

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Typical Unit

• International deck sizes: 1 x 1 meter: 17 kg 1 x 2 meter: 39 kg

• StageTek is a highly flexible design and can be used to accommodate many unique and custom applications • Five-year warranty

(

) ' r 4 mm 3' o 1219 or 914

(91

121 3', 4 9, ', 6' 182 , o 9, r 8' or 243 8

)

Extruded Aluminum (Support Frame)

8", 16", 24", 32", 40" (203, 406, 610, 813,1016 mm) or telescopic Custom Heights are available

• Decks are available in the following sizes: 3' x 3' (914 x 914 mm): 37 lb (17 kg) 3' x 6' (914 x 1829 mm): 65 lb (29 kg) 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm): 87 lb (39 kg) 4' x 4' (1219 x 1220 mm): 59 lb (27 kg) 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm): 85 lb (39 kg) 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm): 107 lb (49 kg)

• Pie Shaped and Custom Decks are available

StageTek Seated Riser Configuration with Guardrails and Closure Panels StageTek Seated Riser Configuration with Pie Shaped Decks and Closure Panels

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 2

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Typical Unit (continued)

• Platform Decks are 3/4" (19 mm) thick and constructed of Group I veneer plywood with a protective laminate on both sides • Surface options: Black Standard (Cracked Ice Polypropylene): A slip resistant overlay recommended for general multipurpose Black Versalite-Match (Moroccan): A slip resistant overlay that will match Wenger Versalite decks Black Heavy-Duty (Quadripple): An aggressive textured overlay for applications requiring greater slip resistance Natural Hardboard: A 1/2" (13 mm) plywood bonded between two faces of 1/8" (3 mm) tempered hard-ply Carpeted: Manufacturer's standard grey carpet over a 5/8" (16 mm) plywood core (contact Wenger for a sample) Carpet Ready: A 5/8" (16 mm) plywood core ready to receive carpet surface • StageTek Load Ratings as measured on a 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) Rectangular Deck: Standard Uniform Load: 125 lbf/ft2 (6 kN/m2) Heavy-Duty Uniform Load: achieved with center leg or smaller decks, 200 lbf/ft2 (9.6 kN/m2) Dynamic Live Load: Side load of 15% of total Uniform Live Load which equals 600 lbf ( 2.7 kN) side load on a platform under a total Uniform Live Load of 4,000 lbf (17.8 kN) Point Load: 1,500 lbf (6.7 kN) applied via 1" (25 mm) diameter pin

• Standard rectangular decks feature spaces under each platform unobstructed by folding frames or braces allowing for easy storage/stowage space under the system • The Frame and edging are fabricated from 4" (102 mm) thick aluminum extrusion The extrusion is designed with a slight recess for hook and loop skirting attachment and also features notches hidden on the inside of the frame to accept accessory attachments • An aluminum extrusion center support rail is featured on deck sizes 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm), 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm) and 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm) • The frame is designed for safer, easier handling and features rounded contours ergonomically sized for a secure power grip (closed grip) • Standard unit-to-unit connectors are 2" (51 mm) wide, heavy-duty hook-and-loop staps with a metal D-Ring Two are provided with each rectangular deck to connect unit legs together

StageTek Typical Staging Unit

Optional Retention Clips for Leg Storage under the Deck Surface

2-1/2" (64 mm) Diameter Extruded Aluminum Leg

Die Cast Aluminum Leg Sockets Extruded Aluminum Center Support Rail

Tightening Knob

Extruded Aluminum Support Frame

Leg and Socket Detail

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 3

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Typical Unit (continued) Leg Options

• Available leg options include Fixed Height, Adjustable Height and Telescopic • Standard rectangular decks have four die cast aluminum leg sockets Legs are quickly secured with the rotation of the knob • Standard legs are fabricated from 2-1/2" (64 mm) diameter aluminum extrusions and are finished with non-marring cap Available in lengths that result in the following deck heights: 8" (203 mm), 16" (406 mm), 24" (610 mm), 32" (813 mm) and 40" (1016 mm) • Adjustable telescopic legs feature a threaded leveling foot finished with a rubber pad and non-rattling telescopic adjustment secured with a quick-release pin Available in lengths that result in the following deck heights: 16"-28" (406-711 mm), 24"-40" (610-1016 mm) and 30"-54" (762-1372 mm) • Custom leg sizes are available

Fixed Height Leg

Adjustable Height Leg

Telescopic Leg

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 4

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Accessories StageTek Horizontal Storage Cart

• Four casters and one handle are included • Two brackets have fixed casters and two have swivel casters with brakes • Casters are 600 lb (270 kg) capacity each • Cart is rated up to ten 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) platforms with legs • Tie-down strap provided • Removable handle provided on swivel end to allow pushing, pulling and turning • Handle and caster units are heavy gauge steel welded with black powder-coat paint finish • Requires double doorway with center post removed. Minimum width: 50" (1270 mm) • We recommend platforms be stacked face to face to prevent scratching • Five-year warranty Tie-Down Strap Included

Kit requires one deck (sold separately)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 5

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Accessories (continued) Universal Deck & Rail Cart

• 85 lb (38 kg). Fits through a 32" (813 mm) door) • Holds 6 StageTek Rectangular Decks or 6 StageTek Guardrails • Decks and guardrails can be mixed on the same cart • Ideal for non-rectangular units such as pie shapes used in seated risers and oversize units • Heavy-duty, non-marring locking casters. Ratcheting nylon safety strap Universal Deck & Rail Cart Loaded With 6 Rectangular Decks

14" (356 mm)

65" (1651 mm)

Universal Deck & Rail Cart Loaded With 6 Guardrails

(76 30" 2m m)

Stairways – Fixed Height and Adjustable • Fixed Height Stairways are available in 2-step: 55 lb (25 kg), 3-step: 76 lb (34 kg) and 4-step: 94 lb (43 kg) models • Adjustable Stairways are ideal for custom-height systems and for systems that are frequently set up at different heights • Adjustable Height Stairways are available in 3-step, 4-step, 6-step and 8-step models • Load rating of 500 lb (227 kg) per stair tread • Stairways feature a hook bracket that will work with StageTek, Versalite, Trouper and Type-C stage systems from Wenger • Stairs feature aluminum extruded treads and include permanent handrails on both sides

Fixed Height Stairway 4-Step Model

" 1/2 ) 40- 9 mm 2 (10

Adjustable Height Stairway 4-Step Model

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 6

" 1/2 ) 41- 4 mm 5 (10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

StageTek Staging System Accessories (continued) Guardrails

Guardrail with Optional Infill Panels

• Guardrails comply with IBC code requirements for loading • Guardrails feature two uprights and two cross bars Optional infill panels can be added that complies with the IBC 4" (102 mm) sphere code Guardrails can function as a chair stop • Guardrails are 42" (1067 mm) high with a black powder-coat paint finish • Guardrails clamp to the stage deck without the need for tools

Clamps, Connectors and Braces • Optional Retention Clips for leg storage mount under the deck to provide retained leg storage • A variety of metal leg to leg, leg to deck, overlap and anchor brackets are available • Stabilizing braces are recommended for heights 40" (1016 mm) and above • Optional deck-to-deck cam locks are built into the deck frame Cams can be locked or opened via a small tool access hole on top of the platform

Drapery and Closure Panels • Drapery is available in heights to match the staging elevation and in a wide variety of colors. 100% fire retardant woven polyester Attaches with hook and loop fastening strips

Backdrop

• Backdrop frame attaches to guardrails and positions a drapery 8' (2438 mm) above the stage Available in 4' (1219 mm), 6' (1829 mm), and 8' (2438 mm) widths • Solid side and front closures are ideal for seated riser systems Constructed of the same material as the deck with the same surface options Edges are finished in a thermofused black edge band Connects to the rail without tools via an extruded PVC clip running the length of the closure

Closure Panels

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 7

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information Seated Riser Sections

Seated Riser Shapes

Rectangular Section

A riser set may consist of any number of rectangular sections, as well as two or four pie-shaped sections. The sections can be arranged in a variety of ways to provide flexibility in fitting different room dimensions.

• Consists of three or four individual platforms and three or four elevations • Platform sizes are 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) or 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm) for band/orchestra, and 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm) or 3' x 6' (914 x 1829 mm) for choral • Each elevation detaches for relocating or re-configuring at user's option Pie-Shaped Section • 4' (1219 mm) depth platforms for band/orchestra, 3' (914 mm) depth platforms for choral • When combined with rectangular sections, pie sections allow you to configure sets of risers in a number of ways, as shown Optional Seated Riser Accessories • Transport carts • Stairways • Front and end closure panels • Drapery closures • Ramps • Guardrails

Risers can also be configured primarily with rectangular units and tri-corners to "round out" the corners as shown below. Typically, these are used only for band risers, using 4' (1219 mm) wide units. They usually provide greater seating capacity per square foot of floor area used.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 8

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information Example of Choral Seated Risers Typical Choral Seated Riser with chairs. All choral riser set capacities are estimated using 26" (660 mm) spacing per student. This spacing allows for adequate access to fresh air during active choral rehearsal.

24" (610 mm) El. 16" (410 mm) El. 8" (200 mm) El.

The 3' (914 mm) riser depth is sufficient for traffic needs ans seating comfort where music stands are not required. The 4' (1219 mm) riser depth allows for music stands and instrument use on the risers.

Example of Band/Orchestra Seated Risers Typical Band/Orchestra Seated Riser with chairs and music stands. All band riser set capacities are estimated using 32" (813 mm) spacing per student. The back row of the riser is often used for large percussion instruments, or string bass in orchestras, and thus the total seating capacities may be less than the quantities given. It is advisable to allow extra space for larger instruments, such as percussion or bass, at the back of the riser. This can be accomplished as shown below by adding a second row of units to the highest elevation to provide an 8' (2438 mm) deep area.

24" (610 mm) El. 16" (406 mm) El. 8" (203 mm) El.

8' (2438 mm)

24" (610 mm) El. 16" (406 mm) El. 8" (203 mm) El.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 9

8' (2438 mm)

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

StageTek Seated Risers Typical Unit Plan View

24" (610 mm) Elevation

12' (3.7 m)

16" (406 mm) Elevation

8" (203 mm) Elevation

12' (3.7 m)

4' (1.2 m)

8' (2.4 m)

End View

46" (1168 mm) 70" (1778 mm)

8" (203 mm)

24" (610 mm)

Note: Stabilizers are not shown but are required for elevations greater than 40" (1016 mm). Frame to leg clamps are not shown.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 10

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings Rectangular Seated Band/Orchestra Riser Configurations SEATS 45 (48 W/FLOOR)

SEATS 33 (36 W/FLOOR) 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) 16' (4.9 m)

4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m)

24" (610 mm) El. 16" (406 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El.

16' (4.9 m)

8" (203 mm) El.

24" (610 mm) El.

8" (203 mm) El.

32' (9.8 m)

24' (7.3 m)

SEATS 54 (61 W/FLOOR)

SEATS 54 (60 W/FLOOR) 24" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (610 mm) El.

24" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (610 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El.

16' (4.9 m)

8" (203 mm) El.

20' (6.1 m)

40' (12.2 m) 32' (9.8 m)

SEATS 63 (72 W/FLOOR) 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m)

20' (6.1 m)

SEATS 66 (76 W/FLOOR) 24" (610 mm) El.

24" 4' x 6' (1.2 x 1.8 m) (610 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El.

8" (203 mm) El.

4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m)

8" (203 mm) El.

24' (7.3 m)

40' (12.2 m) 36' (11 m)

Notes: • All band riser set capacities are estimated using 32" (813 mm) spacing per student. • Additional sets and custom sizes/configurations are available; please call for details. • Drawings not to scale.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 11

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings Rectangular Seated Band/Orchestra Risers SEATS 72 (84 W/FLOOR)

SEATS 72 (75 W/FLOOR)

24" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (610 mm) El.

32" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (813 mm) El. 24" (610 mm) El. 20' (6.1 m)

16" (406 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El. 20' (6.1 m)

8" (203 mm) El.

48' (14.6 m)

40' (12.2 m)

SEATS 96 (105 W/FLOOR)

SEATS 75 (88 W/FLOOR) 24" 4' x 6' 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (1.2 x 1.8 m) (610 mm) El.

32" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (813 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El.

24" (610 mm) El.

8" (203 mm) El.

24' (7.3 m)

16" (406 mm) El.

24' (7.3 m)

8" (203 mm) El.

48' (14.6 m)

44' (13.4 m)

SEATS 84 (90 W/FLOOR)

SEATS 81 (96 W/FLOOR) 24" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (610 mm) El.

32" 4' x 8' (1.2 x 2.4 m) (813 mm) El.

16" (406 mm) El.

24" (610 mm) El.

8" (203 mm) El.

24' (7.3 m)

20' (6.1 m)

16" (406 mm) El. 8" (203 mm) El.

48' (14.6 m) 48' (14.6 m)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information Seated Riser Building Blocks Each riser set combines some, or all, of the "building blocks" shown here. The number of building blocks and the number levels determines the final size of the riser and its capacity. Creating different shapes with one seated riser set Pie sections are the key to creating different shaped configurations. As illustrated here, one seated riser set can be arranged in several different shapes by changing the position of the pie section. This seated riser set is made up of five straight sections and four pie sections

Horseshoe

Winged

Arc

3' (914 mm) Risers: Platforms are 3' (914 mm) deep and seating capacity is based on 26" (660 mm) chair spacing. 4-level seats

4-level seats

12 people

16 people

10 people

3-level seats

9 people

12 people

6 people

2-level seats

6 people

8 people

3 people

3' (914 mm)

3' (914 mm) 6' (1829 mm)

3' (914 mm) 8' (2438 mm)

4' (1219 mm) Risers: Platforms are 4' (1219 mm) deep and seating capacity is based on 32" (820 mm) chair spacing.

4' (1219 mm)

4-level seats

8 people

12 people

7 people

3-level seats

6 people

9 people

4 people

2-level seats

4 people

6 people

2 people

4' (1219 mm) 6' (1829 mm)

4' (1219 mm) 8' (2438 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 13

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information

ADA Ramp

• Ramp design meets all guidelines of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) according to the 2015 International Building Code (IBC) - Section 1012 - Slope is not steeper than one unit vertical in twelve units horizontal (1:12) - Hand rails are continuous throughout ramp - Clear width on ramp is a minimum of 36" (914 mm) - Landings are a minimum of 60" x 60" (1524 x 1524 mm) at any direction change - Railings extend 12" (305 mm) at end of handrails - Contrasting color indications designate any elevation changes

• Ramp design allows for different ramp configurations depending upon your needs • Compact storage is ideal for facilities that have limited storage space • Parts are labeled for quick set-up • Ramp surface comes standard with slip-resistant Quadripple surface. Additional surfaces are available by request • Adjustable legs are provided for easy leveling on uneven surfaces • Ramp design and brackets allow for attachment to StageTek or Versalite stages • Five-year warranty • Optional mid-rails are available

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 14

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

16" ELEVATION RAMPS

Typical Drawings

8" (203 mm) Elevation Ramp 8" ELEVATION RAMP 4' (1219 mm)

10' 1-3/16" (3078 mm)

282A010 282A010 - 8" (203 mm) Elevation Only

Note: Additional options and custom configurations are available, contact Wenger.

282A011

282A012

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 15

282A013

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

16" (406 mm) Elevation Ramps

ELEVATION RAMPS 16"16" ELEVATION RAMPS 5' 6-3/4" (1695 mm)

5' 6-3/4" (1695 mm)

16" ELEVATION RAMPS

8" ELEVATION RAMP " ELEVATION RAMP 4' (1219 mm)

ATION RAMP

82A010

22' 3/16" (6710 mm)

282A010 282A010

18' 7/8" (5509 mm)

282A011 282A011

282A011 282A011 - 16" (406 mm) Elevation Only

282A012 -282A012 16" (406 mm) 282A012 Elevation with Right Hand Landing

Note: Additional options and custom configurations are available, contact Wenger. 282A012

282A013 - 16" (406 mm) 282A013 282A013 Elevation with Left Hand Landing 282A013

282A01 282A014

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 16

282A014

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

24" (610 mm) Elevation Ramps (continued on the following pages) 5' 6-3/4" (1695 mm)

5' 6-3/4" (1695 mm)

24" 24"24" ELE 4' (1219 mm)

29' 11-13/16" (9139 mm)

26' 1/2" (7938 mm)

282A013 282A013282A013

2 282A015 - 24" (610 mm) Elevation with 282A014 - 24" (610 mm) 282A014 282A015 282A014 Right 282A015 Hand Landing 282A014 282A015 Elevation Only

282A016 - 24" (610 mm) Elevation with 282A016 282A016 282A016 Left Hand Landing

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 17

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

24" ELEVATION RAMPS 24" ELEVATION RAMPS

24" (610 mm) Elevation Ramps (continued) 8' 1-3/8" (2473 mm)

8' 1-3/8" (2473 mm)

22' 1/4" (6712 mm)

282A017 - 24" (610 mm) 282A017 Elevation with Left Hand Switch

282A018 - 24" (610 mm) 282A017 282A018 282A018

282A019 282A019

Elevation with Right Hand Switch

282A016 282A016

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 18

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS

Staging and Seated Riser Systems NAMPS RAMPS Typical Drawings

8 82A018

24" (610 mm) Elevation Ramps (continued)

21' 8-1/16" (6606 mm)

9' 8-1/8"

9' 8-1/8" (2950 mm)

(2950 mm) 282A019 282A019 282A019 - 24" (610 mm) Elevation with Right Hand Switch and Left Hand Landing

282A020 282A020

282A020 - 24" (610 mm) Elevation with Left Hand Switch and Right Hand Landing

Note: Additional options and custom configurations are available, contact Wenger.

282A021 282 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 19

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

A019 282A020

32" (813 mm) Elevation Ramps (continued on the following page)

32" ELEVATION RAMPS 32" ELEVATION RAMPS RAMPS 5' 6-3/4" 32" ELEVATION 5' 6-3/4" (1695 mm)

(1695 mm)

4' (1219 mm)

43' 2" (13157 mm)

39' 2-11/16" (11955 mm)

282A020

282A024

282A021 282A021 - 32" (813 mm) Elevation Only

282A025 282A024

282A022 - 32" (813 mm) Elevation282A022 with 282A023 - 32" (813 mm) Elevation with 282A022 282A023 282A021 282A022 282A023 282A021 282A023 Right Hand Landing Left Hand Landing

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 20

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Typical Drawings

32" (813 mm) Elevation Ramps (continued)

26' 1-13/16" (7971 mm)

9' 8-1/8" (2950 mm)

282A024 282A024

282A024 - 32" (813 mm) Elevation with Right Hand Switch and Left Hand Landing

9' 8-1/8"

(2950 mm) 282A025 282A025 282A025 - 32" (813 mm) Elevation with Left Hand Switch and Right Hand Landing

Note: Additional options and custom configurations are available, contact Wenger.

282A023 282A023

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 21

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

StageTek® Roll-A-Deck® Kit • 280B550 Each kit contains four legs and one connection bracket • Designed for rectangular StageTek decks (ordered separately) • Standard deck finished height elevations are between 12-1/4" and 24" (311 and 610 mm) Higher elevations require the use of stabilizers (ordered separately) • 9" (229 mm) minimum elevation is possible if the decks have cam locks, connector brackets are not used at this elevation • Tubular aluminum legs with steel inserts and four easy-rolling, lockable casters • 5" (127 mm) diameter polyolefin casters are rated for 700 lb (317 kg) each All casters lock both the wheel and swivel for added stability • Maximum load capacity is 1600 lb (726 kg) per deck • Guardrails are recommended for elevations over 16" (406 mm) • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty Optional Accessories • Chair stops and backdrops are available

Kit is shown with two decks (decks are sold separately)

2019-07

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 22

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Trouper® Platforms • Decks are available in the following sizes: 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm), 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm), 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm), 3' x 6' (914 x 1829 mm), choral pies-3' (914 mm) depth, band/orchestra pies-4' (1219 mm) depth. • Rectangular decks are available in the following heights: 8" (203 mm) fixed height, 16" (406 mm) fixed height, 24" (610 mm) fixed height, 32" (813 mm) fixed height, 16"/24" (406/610 mm) dual height, 24"/32" (610/813 mm) dual height. Folds flat to a storage height of 2-5/8" (67 mm). • Decks are available in the following surfaces: Black: 3/4" (19 mm) 7-ply plywood with a black slip resistant thermally fused overlay. Grey carpet: 3/4" (19 mm) 7-ply plywood with 1/8" (3 mm) (approximate pile height) manufacturer's standard grey carpet. • Legs are one-piece, 16-gauge, 1-1/4" (32 mm) tubular steel with a reinforcing cross member. Legs are designed to open in one motion and are automatically locked in place by a spring-loaded clip. • Wrap around 16-gauge steel provides strength and protects the deck edge from damage. • Frame clamps are a quick cam-type lock for positive locking to the frame of the adjacent unit. One clamp per side of each stage unit, which provides two clamps per side when units are locked together. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five year warranty.

3' or 4' m or 12 19

(914 m

8' 6' or 438 mm) or 2 9 mm

mm) 8", 16", 24", 32" (203, 406, 610,813 mm)

(182

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 23

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information Accessories Transport Carts • 6-, 8-, and 12-unit storage/transport carts are available. • 12-unit cart suggested when storing/transporting non-rectangular units. • 3-, 6-, and 12-unit carts fit through a 36" (914 mm) door; eight-unit cart requires a double door. Stairways • 2-step 113B016 68 lbs (31 kg)/3-step 113B026 88 lbs (40 kg). • Stairways include permanently attached handrails for safety and non-slip safety treads. • Steps measure 39" (991 mm) long x 11" (280 mm) wide. Rails • Guardrails comply with many building code requirements for loading. • Guardrails are available with either two cross bars or an infill panel that complies with the 4" (102 mm) sphere rule that appears in many building codes. Both designs incorporate a chair stop. • Guardrails are 42" (1067 mm) high with a black powder-coat paint finish. 6- and 8-Unit Cart Chair stop has a dark grey powder-coat paint finish. (8-Unit Cart shown) • Guardrails clamp to the stage without the need for tools. • Guardrail Cart: 011D800 91 lbs (41 kg) stores up to eight Trouper guardrails. Drapery and Backdrop • Drapery closures are available in heights to match the staging elevations. • Dual height drapery is available for the dual height stages. Loaded 8-Unit Cart • Drapery available in a wide variety of colors. 100% fire retardant woven polyester. • Drapery attaches with hook and loop fastening system. • Backdrop frame attaches to guardrails for safety. When installed backdrop is 8' (2439 mm) above the stage. Available in 4' (1219 mm), 6' (1829 mm), and 8' (2439 mm) widths. Guardrail, Stairway, Backdrop and Drapery Drapery and Backdrop Guardrails

12-Unit Cart

Stairway

Side Closures

Loaded Guardrail Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 24

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Trouper® Seated Band/Orchestra Risers • System consists of individual Trouper staging units, combined to create a multi-level seating arrangement. • Platforms are available in 4' x 6' (1219 x 1829 mm) and 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) surface dimensions and in standard heights of 8" (203 mm), 16" (406 mm), 24" (610 mm), and 32" (813 mm). Pie-shaped units are also available. Percussion extensions available for the 24" (610 mm) elevation. • Decks are available in the following surfaces: Black: 3/4" (19 mm) 7-ply plywood with a black slip resistant thermally fused overlay. Grey Carpet: 3/4" (19 mm) 7-ply plywood with 1/8" (3 mm) (approximate pile height) manufacturer's standard grey carpet. • Legs are one-piece, 16-gauge, 1-1/4" (32 mm) tubular steel. Legs are designed to open in one motion and are automatically locked in place by a spring-loaded clip. • Wrap around 16-gauge steel provides strength and protects the deck edge from damage. • Frame clamps are a quick cam-type lock for positive locking to the frame of the adjacent unit. One clamp per side of each stage unit, which provides two clamps per side when units are locked together. Wood spacers securely hold the units of different heights together. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty. Guardrail

Side Closure Panel

Front Closure Panel

4 (12 8" 2m m

6' or 8' mm) or 2438

)

m (1829 m

(12 48" 19 mm

24" (610 mm)

) (12 48" 19 mm

)

8" (203 mm)

16" (406 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 25

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information Accessories • Side Closure Panels – Close each end of the riser arrangement. • Front Closure Panels – Closes the gaps between elevations. Gives a finished-off, built-in look. • Guardrails – Provide a measure of protection while adding a professional appearance. • Transport Carts – Move units from one location to another. Enables efficient two-person handling. • Guardrail Carts – Move guardrails from one location to another. Guardrail, Stairway, Backdrop and Drapery Drapery and Backdrop Guardrails

Side Closures Stairway

Loaded 8-Unit Cart

6- and 8-Unit Cart (8-Unit Cart shown)

12-Unit Cart

Loaded Guardrail Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 26

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Trouper® Seated Choral Risers • System consists of individual Trouper staging units, combined to create a multi-level seating arrangement. • Platforms are available in 3' x 6' (914 x 1829 mm) and 3' x 8' (914 x 2438 mm) surface dimensions and in standard heights of 8" (203 mm), 16" (406 mm), 24" (610 mm), and 32" (813 mm). Pie-shaped units are also available. • Decks are available in the following surfaces: Black: 3/4"(19 mm) 7-ply plywood with a black slip resistant thermally fused overlay. Grey Carpet: 3/4" (19 mm) 7-ply plywood with 1/8" (3 mm) (approximate pile height) manufacturer's standard grey carpet. • Legs are one-piece, 16-gauge, 1-1/4" (32 mm) tubular steel. Legs are designed to open in one motion and are automatically locked in place by a spring-loaded clip. • Wrap around 16-gauge steel provides strength and protects the deck edge from damage. • Frame clamps are a quick cam-type lock for positive locking to the frame of the adjacent unit. One clamp per side of each stage unit, which provides two clamps per side when units are locked together. Wood spacers securely hold the units of different heights together. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. Guardrail

Side Closure Panel

Front Closure Panel

6' or 8' mm) m or 2438 (1829 m

3 (91 6" 4m m)

3 (91 6" 4m m

24" (610 mm)

) 3 (91 6" 4m m

)

8" (203 mm)

16" (406 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 27

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Side Closures Stairway

Loaded 8-Unit Cart

6- and 8-Unit Cart (8-Unit Cart shown)

12-Unit Cart

Loaded Guardrail Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 28

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Trouper® Storage Carts 6-Unit Storage Cart • 130C001 91 lbs (41 kg). • All steel construction. Zinc plated. • Dimensions: Empty: 30" wide x 55" long x 59-1/4" high (762 x 1397 x 1505 mm) Loaded: 30" wide x 96" long x 59-1/4" high (762 x 2438 x 1505 mm). • 8" diameter casters. two swivel and two rigid. Swivel casters lock for safety. • Stage unit is simply rotated off cart and into position. • Fits through standard 36" (914 mm) doorway. 8-Unit Storage Cart • 130C002 99 lbs (45 kg). • All steel construction. Zinc plated. • Dimensions: Empty: 37-1/2" wide x 54" long x 60-1/2" high (953 x 1372 x 1537 mm) Loaded: 37-1/2" wide x 96" long x 60-1/2" high (953 x 2438 x 1537 mm). • 8" (203 mm) diameter casters. two swivel and two rigid. Swivel casters lock for safety. • Stage unit is simply rotated off cart and into position. • 40" (1016 mm) doorway required. 12-Unit Storage Cart • 2289004 156 lbs (71 kg). • All steel construction. Zinc plated. • Dimensions: Empty: 32" wide x 99-1/4" long x 47-1/4" high (813 x 2521 x 1200 mm) Loaded with 36" units: 32" wide x 99-1/4" long x 47-3/4" high (813 x 2521 x 1213 mm). Loaded with 48" units: 32" wide x 99-1/4" long x 59-3/4" high (813 x 2521 x 1518 mm). • Stage unit is simply rotated off cart and into position. • Fits through standard 36" (914 mm) doorway. Guardrail Cart • 011D800 (91 lbs) (41 kg). • Stores up to eight Trouper guardrails. • Dimensions (loaded or unloaded): 27" w x 99" l x 59" h (686 x 2515 x 1499 mm) • Ideal for space efficient storage of guardrails. Five-year warranty on storage carts. Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative.

6- and 8-Unit Cart (8-Unit Cart shown)

12-Unit Cart

Loaded 8-Unit Cart

Guardrail Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 29

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Stagehand® Staging • Decks are available in 4' x 8' (1219 x 2438 mm) sizes in the following heights: 16" (406 mm) fixed height, 24" (610 mm) fixed height, 16"/24" (406/610 mm) dual height, and 24"/32" (610/813 mm) dual height. • Each deck is equipped with pneumatic springs to assist in setup and takedown, allowing one-person ease of use. • Decks are constructed of solid core 3/4" (19 mm) plywood. Top surfaces available are: black slip resistant or grey carpet. • Legs are one-piece 16 gauge 1-1/4" (32 mm) steel tubing with a reinforcing cross brace. Locking angle-braces allow for easy set-up and sure stability. Legs have an electrostatically applied black epoxy paint finish. • Frame and edging are fabricated from 16 gauge steel with a grey powder-coat painted finish. • Unit-to-unit frame clamps have a cam-action for easy positive locking to the frame of the adjacent unit. One clamp per side of each stage unit, provides two points of connection when units are locked together. • Units nest for compact storage. The first stagehand unit needs 27" (686 mm) and each additional unit only adds 12" (305 mm). When stored, units are 61-1/2" (1562 mm) high and 96" (2438 mm) long. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty. Accessories Include: • Two- or three-step stairways include attached handrails for safety and non-slip step treads. Steps measure 39" (991 mm) wide by 11" (279 mm) deep. Black finish. • Guardrails comply with most building code requirements for loading. Guardrails are 42" (1067 mm) high and come with either two crossbars or an infill panel that comply with the 4" (102 mm) sphere requirements of some building codes. • Drapery closures and backdrops are available to give stage a finished look. Stage and backdrop drapery available in a wide variety of colors. Drapery is 100% fire retardant polyester woven fabric. Straight Forward, Simple Operation

Step on foot-release and the pneumatic springs slowly and safely lower deck surface.

Dual Height Leg Adjustment

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 30

2017-12

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Versalite® Storage Carts Universal Deck & Rail Cart Universal Deck & Rail Cart • 113J001 (85 lbs) (38 kg). • All steel construction. Black powder-coat painted finish. • Dimensions: Empty: 30" wide x 40-1/2" long x 48-3/4" high (762 x 1029 x 1238 mm) Loaded: 30" wide x 96" long x 62-1/2" high (762 x 2438 x 1588 mm) Folded: 43-1/2" wide x 40-1/2" long x 18-1/2" high (1105 x 1029 x 470 mm). • 8" (203 mm) diameter casters, two swivel and two rigid. 62-1/2" • Stage unit is simply rotated off the cart and into position. (1588 mm) • Cart conveniently folds when empty for easy storage. • Fits through standard 36" (914 mm) doorway. • Ideal for non-rectangular units such as pie shapes used in seated risers or oversized units used in the Portable Disability Ramp. • This 8-unit cart is also used for the Wenger Pit Filler, but the capacity is reduced to 6-units. • Five-year warranty.

96" (2438 mm)

48-3/4" (1238 mm)

4 (10 0-1/2 " 29 mm )

10-Unit Transport Cart • 133A488 (68 lbs) (31 kg). • Transport cart is created by slipping a set of two 8" (203 mm) caster assemblies (two swivel and two rigid) onto a Versalite Stage Deck. Each cart can carry up to ten platforms plus legs. Pushrail inserts into caster assembly. Tie-down strap also included. • Floor area dimensions: Adds 1-1/2" (38 mm) both to the length and width of the loaded platform deck size. • Requires double doorway without center post. • Ideal for space efficient storage of rectangular units. • Five-year warranty.

10-Unit Transport Cart

42" (1067 mm)

Up 98 to (25 -1/2" 02 mm )

Up to 49-1/2" (1257 mm)

Guardrail Cart • 011D800 (91 lbs) (41 kg). • Dimensions (loaded or unloaded): 27"w x 99"l x 59"h (686 x 2515 x 1499 mm) • Ideal for space efficient storage of guardrails. • Five-year warranty.

(25 99" 15 mm

)

59" (1499 mm)

Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative.

" 30 m) 2m

(76

Guardrail Cart

" 27 m) 6m

(68

2017-12

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 31

MUSIC REHEARSAL AND PRACTICE ROOMS Staging and Seated Riser Systems

PERFORMANCE SPACES INTERIORS BINDER

PERFORMANCE SPACES

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

PERFORMACE SPACES

Rack ‘n Roll® Garment Racks

Studio® Makeup Station

Backstage® Makeup Station

flipFORMS®

Portable Audience Chairs

High-Density Portable Audience Chair by Clarin®

StageTek® Staging System

StageTek® Seated Risers

GearBoss® Shelving

GearBoss® Team Cart™

Stands

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Rack 'n Roll®

Accessories • 028B007 • 028B013 • 210B230 • 028B014 • 028B015 • 028B016

Additional Folding Basket, 4.1 lbs (1.9 kg). Costume Divider Tags, pack of 25. Hanger Retainer Clips, pack of 40. 4' (1219 mm) Dust Cover. 6' (1829 mm) Dust Cover. Privacy Screen.

70-1/2" (1791 mm)

72" f 48" or 6' (1 for 4 8 ' (12 29 mm 19 m ) un m) u it nit

24" m) 0m (61

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 1

2017-12

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

STUDIOÂŽ MAKEUP STATION

The best place to put on your best face. Untainted shadow-free light, large mirrors, plenty of counter and storage space - all the things you want and need to put on your best face for each and every performance. Illumination from a total of nine bulbs in wire cages on the 36" (914 mm) model and 8 bulbs on the 30" (762 mm) model combined with reflected light from the counter and overhead shelf creates exceptional untainted shadow-free light. And the unique design allows for a shared column of lights between adjacent makeup stations. The large mirror provides a full, unobstructed view of head and shoulders and the steel laminated construction keeps the mirror flat and true while preventing it from splintering if accidentally damaged. The 36" (914 mm) model comes with a convenient tackboard for attaching makeup designs, notes, and schedules. The distinctive concave counter shape lets you lean into the mirror for highly detailed makeup applications with plenty of space for makeup, hairdryers, wig stands and other accessories. The laminate overlay is highly resistant to stains from makeup and cleans easily. And the high weight capacity withstands heavy loads. Studio makeup stations come with built-in power outlets, an overhead shelf for props and supplies and an optional under-counter cage or sliding drawer for additional storage. And unlike custom built makeup stations that require costly carpentry and electrical work, Wenger Studio makeup stations are ready to be wall- mounted and hard-wired. The Studio makeup station from Wenger - As committed to the quality of our products as you are to your craft.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 2

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

STUDIO® MAKEUP STATION An overhead shelf improves lighting by reflecting untainted light in addition to providing storage for props and supplies. The makeup station’s steel frame easily mounts to an adjustable wall bracket (shown in black).

Openings in the cages allow for bulb removal and installation without removing the cages.

A rocker type light switch and 20 amp duplex outlet with built-in GFCI protection is mounted on the lower right side of the mirror frame. International Model: Rocker light switch with single outlet located on lower right side of mirror.

An optional under-counter cage provides convenient storage space. Available on 36" (914 mm) model only.

An integral molded-in pencil tray keeps small items from rolling.

An optional lockable sliding drawer for storage and securing of valuable items. Available on 36" (914 mm) model only.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• • • • • • • • •

• • • •

Wall mounting bracket has multiple holes for alignment with wall frame studs or mounts to masonry walls Makeup stations can be installed at any height - recommended height for counter is 29" (737 mm) from the floor Designed for a maximum 60 watt incandescent or 15 watt swirl fluorescent bulbs (bulbs not included) 3 /16" (5 mm) diameter steel wire light bulb cages are permanently mounted Makeup stations are equipped with leads for hard-wiring in accordance with NEC (National Electric Code) requirements - International models are equipped with leads for hard-wiring in accordance with UL DEMKO requirements Counter is 1" thick (25 mm) with medium density fiberboard with stain resistant, matte white laminate overlay 36" (914 mm) model: 36" wide x 20" deep (914 x 508 mm) 30" (762 mm) model: 30" wide x 20" deep (762 x 508 mm) Counter has a concave shape with the center front edge just 15" (381 mm) from the mirror Overhead top shelf 36" (914 mm) wide model: 36" wide x 12" deep (914 x 305 mm) 30" (762 mm) wide model: 30" wide x 12" deep (762 x 305 mm) Mirror 36" (914 mm) model: 28" (711 mm) square high quality mirror laminated to steel backer 30" (762 mm) model: 22" wide x 28" high (559 x 711 mm), high quality mirror laminated to steel backer Steel frame and unique aluminum light housing surrounding mirror Matte white tackboard can be attached to the sides, top or bottom of the mirror - Included with 36" (914 mm) model only Optional storage cage or sliding drawer can be easily mounted to the under side of the counter - Available on 36" (914 mm) model only Entire product UL and Canadian UL approved - International models UL DEMKO approved Patented © 2019 Wenger Corporation USA/7-19/200/W/LT0114G

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

ATHLETICS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 3

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

30" and 36" (762 and 914 mm) Studio® Makeup Stations

Wenger Studio Makeup Stations will provide performers with a correct and convenient environment for applying makeup and creating other visual effects. The Studio Makeup Station components include a generous counter, a large mirror, a reflective storage shelf, untainted lighting and electrical outlets. A tackboard is available on the 36" (762 mm) model. The Studio Makeup Stations are designed to be permanently attached to a wall and hard-wired and are covered with a five-year warranty.

The Counter

• Construction: Medium density fiberboard core and laminate overlay with a stain resistant surface and a matte white finish for light diffusion • Features: Rounded upper edges, integral pencil tray with a concave shape for mirror access. 15" (381 mm) from counter edge to mirror surface • Size: - 36" models - 36" wide x 20" deep (914 x 508 mm) - 30" models 30" wide x 20" deep (762 x 508 mm) • Work surface is recommended to be 29" (737 mm) from the floor, but can be positioned at any height

The Mirror

• Construction: High quality glass and silvering laminated to a steel backer to prevent separation of shards if broken • Size: - 36" models - 28" (711 mm) square - 30" models - 22" wide x 28" high (559 x 711 mm)

The Mirror Surround

• Construction: Extruded aluminum and sheet steel. Powder-coat paint with a matte white finish for light diffusion

The Storage Shelf

• Purpose: to provide uniform light reflection on the performer's face. Provides easy access for accessory storage • Construction: Medium density fiberboard core and laminate overlay with an easy to clean surface and a matte white finish for light diffusion • Size: - 36" models - 36" wide x 12" deep (914 x 305 mm) - 30" models - 30" wide x 12" deep (762 x 305 mm) • Storage surface is 69" (1753 mm) from floor, if hung at the recommended height

The Lighting

• 36" models - Nine medium base sockets provided for 60W incandescents or 15W swirl fluorescents 30" models - Eight medium base sockets provided for 40-60W incandescents or 10-15W swirl fluorescents • Bulbs are protected by wire cages made from 3/16" (5 mm) diameter steel wire Cages are permanently mounted and designed for easy bulb replacement (bulbs not included)

The Electrics

• A rocker type switch is mounted on the lower left side of the mirror surround. It controls the lights only • A 20 amp rated duplex outlet with built in GFCI protection is mounted on the lower right side of the mirror surround • 24" (610 mm) off flexible conduit and conductors exit the unit beneath the counter, next to the wall • NOTE: Separate black conductors are provided for lights and outlet to allow circuit design according to anticipated use and local codes. • Entire product is UL (underwriter laboratory) approved

The Tackboard (36" models only)

• Construction: White tackable surface mounted in a matte white frame • Shipped unmounted. May be attached to top, bottom, or side of the mirror • Size: 6" wide x 28" long (152 x 711 mm)

The Options

• 36" model is available with either under-counter storage cage or lockable sliding drawer, space allows for only one storage option per Studio Makeup Station

Installation

• Wall mounting brackets are included for easy attachment to permanent walls • Wall mounting brackets incorporate leveling and adjustment feature to aid alignment for multi-unit installation • When multiple units are installed, adjacent units share a vertical column of bulbs

Physical Dimensions:

• 36" models Overall width: 40-3/8" (1026 mm) (bulb cage-to-bulb cage) Overall height: 44" (1118 mm) Overall depth: 20" (508 mm) Multi-unit spacing: 36" (914 mm) center-to-center Weight: 75 lb (34 kg) • 30" models Overall width: 34-1/2" (876 mm) (bulb cage-to-bulb cage) Overall height: 44" (1118 mm) Overall depth: 20" (508 mm) Multi-unit spacing: 30" (762 mm) center-to-center Weight: 65 lb (29.5 kg)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 4

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information 36" (914 mm) Center to Center

36" (91 cm) Studio Makeup Station

28" (711 mm)

5' 8-1/2" (1740 mm) 12" (305 mm)

1' 8" (508 mm)

29" (737 mm) 2-1/4" (60 mm)

36" (914 mm)

30" (76 cm) Studio Makeup Station

2-1/4" (57 mm)

30" (762 mm) Center to Center

28" (711 mm) 22" (559 mm)

5' 8-1/2" (1740 mm) 12" (305 mm)

1' 8" (508 mm)

29" (737 mm) 2-1/4" (57 mm)

30" (762 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 5

2-1/4" (57 mm)

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

BACKSTAGE® MAKEUP STATION

Makeup on the move. Introducing the professional makeup station that’s portable. The Backstage Makeup Station from Wenger sets up anywhere - on tables, countertops, road cases, you name it. Weighing in at only 35 lbs (16 kg), it can be carried by one person yet it’s incredibly solid and well balanced. Now you can convert auxiliary rooms and backstage areas into makeup studios because you get features you’d expect from wall-mounted makeup stations. Six 60 watt incandescent bulbs (not included), or 15 watt full-spectrum swirl fluorescents bulbs (not included) give you excellent illumination for accurate reflection of skin tones and makeup colors. Openings in the cages allow for bulb removal and installation without removing the cages. The attractive white aluminum mirror surround positions lights for optimal shadow-free illumination. The large mirror provides a full, unobstructed view of head and shoulders for detailed makeup application. There’s even access for electric appliances such as hair dryers and curling irons. And makeup stations nest together for compact storage. The Backstage Makeup Station from Wenger As committed to the quality of our products as you are to your craft.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 6

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

BACKSTAGE® MAKEUP STATION Steel frame and unique aluminum light housing surround a large high quality mirror.

Openings in the cages allow for bulb removal and installation without removing the cages.

A rocker switch and single grounded outlet are mounted on the mirror surround.

Even though it’s portable, the makeup station is solid and well balanced so you can set it almost anywhere.

Optional Lightweight canvas padded Dust Cover protects the Backstage Makeup Station from damage and collection of dust.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

• • • • • •

• • • • •

Weighs 35 lbs. (16 kg) and can be carried by one person. Steel frame doubles as carrying handle. 33" wide x 331/4" high x 93/8" deep (838 mm x 845 mm x 238 mm) makeup station is well balanced and sets anywhere. Each 33" (828 mm) wide unit requires an incremental 61/2" (165 mm) of floor or shelf space for storage. Recommended GE Reveal® 60 watt incandescent bulbs (not included), or 15 watt full-spectrum swirl fluorescents (not included) for additional clarity and accurate reflection of skin tones and makeup colors. 3 /16" (5 mm) diameter steel wire light bulb cages, permanently mounted. 203/4" wide x 223/4" high (527 mm x 578 mm) high quality mirror laminated to a steel backer. Steel frame and unique aluminum light housing surround the mirror. Single outlet and rocker switch combination with built-in GFCI protection. Switch controls lights, allowing appliances to operate with lights off. - International model: Single outlet with rocker switch only. Switch controls lights, allowing appliances to operate with lights off. 10' (3048 mm) 12 gauge. 3-wire cord plugs into a standard 110 outlet. - International model: Wired per individual country cord plug requirements. Meets NEC (National Electric Code) requirements. - International model: Approved by UL DEMKO Entire product is UL (Underwriter Laboratory) approved. - International model: Approved by UL DEMKO Optional Dust Cover protects from damage and dust. PURCHASE ONLINE!

187A011 187A021

Backstage Makeup Station Dust Cover

WENGER CORPORATION

GEARBOSS

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.3440 | Fax 877.836.1885 Worldwide 315.451.1766 | Web jrclancy.com 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 7

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Backstage® Makeup Station The Backstage Makeup Station will provide performers with a correct and convenient tabletop environment for applying makeup and creating other visual effects. The Backstage Makeup Station includes a large mirror, shadow-free lighting, an electrical outlet, a carry handle, and a grounded power cord. • 187A011 Backstage Makeup Station with six lights and white accent panels.

The Mirror • Construction: High quality glass and silvering laminated to a steel backer to prevent separation of shards if broken. • Size: 20-3/4" wide x 22-3/4" high (527 x 578 mm). The Mirror Surround • Construction: Extruded matte white aluminum with white accents. Rugged powder-coat paint finish. Base is shaped for compact storage front-to-back. • Handle on top for transporting is part of mirror surround. The Lighting • Six medium base sockets provided for 60W incandescents or 15W swirl fluorescents. Bulbs are protected by wire cages made from 3/16" (5 mm) diameter steel wire. Cages are permanently mounted, but allow easy bulb replacement (bulbs not included). The Electrics • A rocker switch and grounded outlet are mounted on the lower right side of the mirror surround. • Switch controls lights only. • Attached power cord is 10' (3048 mm) long and stores itself. • UL® listed. Meets NEC (National Electric Code) requirements. The Options • 187A021 Lightweight canvas padded Dust Cover protects the Backstage Makeup Station from damage and collection of dust. Physical Dimensions • Overall Width: 33" (838 mm) (bulb cage-to-bulb cage). • Overall Height: 33-1/4" (845 mm). • Overall Depth: 9-3/8" (238 mm). • Storage Depth: 9-3/8" (238 mm) first unit, 6-1/2" (165 mm) each additional unit. • Weight: 35 lbs (16 kg). • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Five-year warranty.

22-3/4" (578 mm)

33-1/4" (845 mm)

20-3/4" (527 mm) 6-1/2" (165 mm)

33" (838 mm)

28-1/2" (724 mm) 9-3/8" (238 mm)

33" (838 mm)

Nested View

Front View

Side View

2018-08

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 8

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

flipFORMS®

12" (305 mm)

• 025D002 Blue/Grey, 025D003 Green/Grey, 025D004 Yellow/Grey, 025D005 Red/Grey, 025D027 Grey/Grey, 025D028 Black/Black (100 lbs) (45 kg). • Takes on three basic shapes for use as a one tier platform, two tier or three tier unit. • Has two moveable sections hinged onto a core unit. m) Flip larger back section onto core for two tiers. 4m 52 1 ( " Flip both back and front sections onto core unit for three tiers. 60 When both sections are down, flipFORMS can be used as a one tier raised platform. • Blow molded, high-density polyethylene plastic shell provides an easy-to-clean surface that’s super tough. • Shell has skid resistant texture molded into surface for added safety and surefootedness. • Replaceable tops. One Tier • Recessed, molded handholds on front and sides for easy Hinged sections positioning or carrying. in flat position. - Elevated Platform • Built-in wheels in reinforced wheel pockets provide one-person portability. • Units store in an upright position. • Twelve 1-1/2" (38 mm) square skid-resistant, non-marring glides m) positioned on the bottom of the unit. Secured by recessed screws. 1m (38 • Patented hinge design maintains flat surface in all positions. " 15 • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can 12" be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your (305 mm) Wenger representative. ) • Five-year warranty. mm

" (1

2-Step Tiered Seating Capacity

3-Step Riser Capacity*

Grades 1-3

8 students/unit

16 students/unit

Grades 4-6

6 students/unit

12 students/unit

*Capacity using the floor as the front row.

" (7

24" (610 mm)

Grade Level

12" (305 mm)

Two Tier Back hinged section flips onto core unit. - Classroom Seating

(1 5"

" 15 m) 1m

(38 Units roll, nest and store in an upright position. Wheels and recessed handles make it easy to transport flipFORMS.

" 15 m) 1m

(38

24" (610 mm)

" 15 m) 1m 8 (3

8" (203 mm)

Three Tier Back and front sections flip onto core unit. - Standing Risers - Stairs

(1 5"

2018-05

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 9

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

High-Density Portable Audience Chairs By Clarin® • 197B101._ • Expertly engineered for arenas, theaters, amphitheaters, performing arts venues, and any other facility that requires high capacity seating. • Durable X-Frame design prolongs chair life and enhances comfort. • Double tube and channel 19-gauge steel frame with 11-gauge front stretchers provide strength, durability and flexibility. • Duraflex action assures level seating, even on uneven surfaces. • K Brace for extra strength. • Frame is black powder-coat paint finish for maximum durability. • Grade 1 fabric or vinyl in black are standard. Other patterns and colors are available. • California Technical Bulletin 117 compliance is standard. California Technical Bulleting 133 compliant also available. • Rubber, non-marring feet formed over flat steel inserts help protect floors. • Uplift seat allows for safer, wider seating rows when unoccupied and easier passing when occupied. • Oval marking decal for flexibility in seat labeling. • Available in armless, 1-arm, and 2-arm versions. • Chair width – 18" (457 mm) or 19-1/2" (495 mm), add 2-1/4" (57 mm) per arm. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for these products can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • See http://www.clarinseating.com for warranty information.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 10

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information 4010 & 34010E with 1-1/2" Compact Seat and "B" Back

3" (76 mm)

18" 4010 - 19-1/2" 34010E (457 - 495 mm)

21-3/4" (553 mm)

38-1/2" (978 mm) 32" (813 mm)

17" (432 mm)

21-1/2" (546 mm)

4400 & 34400E with 3" Standard Seat and "B" Back

18" 4400 - 19-1/2" 34400E (457 - 495 mm)

4-3/4" (121 mm)

20-3/4" (527 mm)

39-1/2" (1003 mm)

32-3/4" (832 mm)

15-1/2" (394 mm)

20-3/4" (527 mm)

4400 & 34400E with Contour Seat and Tuck Back

6-1/4" (159 mm)

18" 4400 - 19-1/2" 34400E (457 - 495 mm)

21-1/2" (546 mm)

39-1/2" (1003 mm) 32-3/4" (832 mm)

15-1/2" (394 mm)

20-3/4" (527 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 11

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information Options Armrest Options Note: Add 2-1/4" (57 mm) to chair width per arm. - Armless chairs allow for the highest capacity. - Standard Upholstered Arm: add comfort and personal space. - Waterfall Poly Arm: add style, comfort and personal space - Waterfall Upholstered Arm: add style, additional comfort and personal space. - Cup Holder Poly Arm: add convenience, comfort and personal space. - Cup Holder Upholstered Arm: add convenience, additional comfort and personal space.

Standard Armrest

Waterfall Poly

Cup Holder Poly

Back Options - Classic "B" Back. - Contour Tuck Back.

Classic "B" Back

Contour Tuck Back

Seat Options - Compact Padded Seat: 1-1/2" (32 mm) padded seat has the smallest storage envelope for the highest density storage. Chair is only 3" (76 mm) thick when folded, requiring 30-40% less storage space than standard tubular frame folding chairs. - Standard Padded Seat: 3" (76 mm) padded seat provides exceptional occupant comfort. - Contour Padded Seat: Molded foam seat cushion for advanced occupant comfort.

Compact Padded Seat

Standard Padded Seat

Contour Seat

Ganging Options - 1/8" (3 mm) Ganging welded to the frame for connecting armless chairs. - 1/2" (13 mm) Ganging welded to the frame add personal space when ganging armless chairs. - 1" (25 mm) Ganging welded to the frame for connecting 1-arm chairs. - Hook and Loop Ganging welded to the armrest for connecting 2-arm chairs. - Temporary Ganging Devices allow ganging of chairs that weren't initially ordered with ganging brackets welded to the frame.

1/8" (3 mm) Ganging

1" (25 mm) Ganging

Arm Chair Ganging

Uplift Options - Manual: seat must be lifted and lowered manually. - Automatic: additional spring returns seat to the lifted position when unoccupied.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 12

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information Hanging Carts Hanging Carts

Storage Carts • Ease of transport. • Maximize storage space. • Heavy gauge steel construction.

Hanging Carts Great for lower chair quantities. - 197A104: Single level for easy access. Fits through a standard 32" (813 mm) door. Capacities: 30 chairs with compact seats, 18 chairs with standard padded seats, 12 chairs with contour padded seats. - 197A105: Double levels for additional storage. Fits through a standard 32" (813 mm) door. Capacities: 60 chairs with compact seats, 36 chairs with standard padded seats, 24 chairs with contour padded seats. - 197A106: Extra wide double levels for maximum storage. Does NOT fit through a standard 32" (813 mm) door. Capacities: 96 chairs with compact seats, 60 chairs with standard padded seats, 48 chairs with contour padded seats. Edge/Flat Stack Carts Works well in facilities that want to store chairs under a stage. - 197A204: Longest under stage cart. Capacities: 30 chairs with compact seats, 20 chairs with standard padded seats, 16 chairs with contour padded seats. - 197A205: Shorter under stage cart. Capacities: 23 chairs with compact seats, 16 chairs with standard padded seats, 12 chairs with contour padded seats. Studio Carts Works well for storing chairs in long, upright rows. Edge/Flat Carts Edge/Flat Carts - 197A304: Longest upright cart Capacities: 35 chairs with compact seats, 20 chairs with standard padded seats, 16 chairs with contour padded seats. - 197A305: Standard upright cart Capacities: 26 chairs with compact seats, 17 chairs with standard padded seats, 10 chairs with contour padded seats. - 197A306: Shortest upright cart Hanging Carts Capacities: 16 chairs with compact seats, 10 chairs with standard padded seats, 8 chairs with contour padded seats. Hanging Carts

Hanging CartsCart Hanging Carts Hanging

Studio Cart

Studio Carts Studio Carts

4' 5" (1346 mm)

1'-7-1/2" (495 mm)

6' 9" (2057 mm) 3' 3-7/8" (1013 mm)

6' 7" (2007 mm)

2' 7-1/4" (794 mm)

Edge/Flat CartCarts Edge/Flat Carts Edge/Flat 8' 6-1/8" (2594 mm)

Edge/Flat Carts Edge/Flat Carts

3' 2" (965 mm)

2' 2-1/3" (669 mm)

Studio Carts Studio Carts Studio Carts Studio Carts 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 13

2017-12

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Portable Audience Chair — Standard Model • Portable Audience Chair — Standard 23" (584 mm) (see chart below for other widths) Single 027A101._: 35 lb (16 kg) Double 027A102._: 55 lb (25 kg) Triple 027A103._: 82 lb (37 kg) • Freestanding, folding, audience seating chair with built-in ganging device • Steel chair frame is constructed with 16 gauge continuous electric welded 1" x 2" (25 x 51 mm) rectangular steel tube • Frame is finished with a durable black powder coat • Yellow birch hardwood arm rest in black lacquer finish with rounded corners for a stylish appearance • The chair folds for storage and transport on the accessory cart • Seat and back are upholstered with durable 100% Polypropylene fabric (Sherpa and Shire Marquesa® Lana) Available in standard Absecon Mills, Sherpa and Shire fabrics 17-1/2" • Seat cushion is 2-1/2" (64 mm) thick, high-resiliency polyurethane foam (445 mm) with a 5 ply-3/8" (10 mm) contoured hardwood plywood substrate • Back cushion is 1-1/2" (38 mm) thick, high-resiliency polyurethane foam with a 5 ply-3/8" (10 mm) contoured hardwood plywood substrate Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort • Chair seat is spring-loaded and returns to a folded position when not occupied • Overall chair height is 32" (813 mm) with a seat height of 17-1/2" (445 mm) Chair depth (back of chair to front edge of seat in the "down" position) is 26" (660 mm) • When the seat automatically returns to the "up" position, the chair depth is 20" (508 mm) • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002 • ASTM F851-87 (2000) • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty

Single Chair Chair Size "Arm Rest" Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 21" (533 mm) 19" (483 mm)

Double Chair Chair Size Arm Rest Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 40" (1016 mm) 19" (483 mm)

32" (813 mm)

20" (508 mm) 26" (660 mm)

Common Dimensions Single, Double and Triple Chairs

Triple Chair Chair Size Arm Rest Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 59" (1499 mm) 19" (483 mm)

22" (559 mm)

20" (508 mm)

42" (1067 mm)

20" (508 mm)

62" (1575 mm)

20" (508 mm)

23" (584 mm)

21" (533 mm)

44" (1118 mm)

21" (533 mm)

65" (1651 mm)

21" (533 mm)

24" (610 mm)

22" (559 mm)

46" (1168 mm)

22" (559 mm)

68" (1727 mm)

22" (559 mm)

25" (635 mm)

23" (584 mm)

48" (1219 mm)

23" (584 mm)

71" (1803 mm)

23" (584 mm)

26" (660 mm)

24" (610 mm)

50" (1270 mm)

24" (610 mm)

74" (1880 mm)

24" (610 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 14

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information Options • • • • •

Number/Letter sets are magnetic or self-adhesive in brushed gold with black lettering Blank donor plates in brushed gold for engraving by the customer Armrest relief to accept donor plates Drink holder California Technical Bulletin 133 compliant

Storage/Transport Cart • • • •

027A036 150 lb (68 kg) Rack, move, and store up to 24 Wenger portable audience seating chairs Steel construction with easy-roll casters Overall cart dimensions: 72" high x 82" wide x 42" deep (1829 x 2083 x 1067 mm) Cart will NOT fit through a standard 32" (813 mm) door • Overall cart dimensions with stored chairs: 81" high x 82" wide x 42" deep (2057 x 2083 x 1067 mm) • Five-year warranty • Assembly required

Dust Cover • 027A037 • Vinyl Coated Polyester • For use with chairs stacked on cart

" 38 mm) 5 6 9 (

81" (2057 mm)

72" (1829 mm)

(20 82 83 " mm )

" ) 42 mm 67 0 (1

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 15

2019-09

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Portable Audience Chair — Premier Model • Portable Audience Chair — Premier 027A201._ 38.5 lb (17 kg) • Freestanding, folding, audience seating chair with built-in ganging device • Steel chair frame is constructed with 16-gauge continuous electric welded 1" x 2" (25 x 51 mm) rectangular steel tube • Frame is finished with a durable black powder coat • Yellow birch hard wood back, bottom, and arm rests for stylish appearance Finish Options: Black Lacquer, Black Cherry, and Caramel • The chair folds for storage and transport on the accessory cart • Seat and back are upholstered with durable 100% Polypropylene fabric Available in standard Absecon Mills, Sherpa and Shire fabrics • Seat cushion is 2-1/2" (64 mm) thick high resiliency polyurethane foam with a 5 ply-3/8" (10 mm) contoured hardwood plywood substrate 17-1/2" • Back cushion is 1-1/2" (38 mm) thick, high-resiliency polyurethane (445 mm) with a 5 ply-3/8" (10 mm) contoured and exposed hardwood plywood substrate. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort • Chair seat is spring-loaded and returns to a folded position when not occupied • Overall chair height is 32" (813 mm) with a seat height of 17-1/2" (445 mm) • Chair depth (back of chair to front edge of seat in the "down" position) is 26" (660 mm) • When the seat automatically returns to the "up" position, the chair depth is 20" (508 mm) • ANSI/BIFMA x 5.1-2002 • ASTM F851-87 (2000) • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative • Five-year warranty

32" (813 mm)

20" (508 mm) 26" (660 mm)

Common Dimensions Single, Double and Triple Chairs

Single Chair Chair Size "Arm Rest" Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 21" (533 mm) 19" (483 mm)

Double Chair Chair Size Arm Rest Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 40" (1016 mm) 19" (483 mm)

Triple Chair Chair Size Arm Rest Model Outside to Outside Center to Center 21 59" (1499 mm) 19" (483 mm)

22" (559 mm)

20" (508 mm)

42" (1067 mm)

20" (508 mm)

62" (1575 mm)

20" (508 mm)

23" (584 mm)

21" (533 mm)

44" (1118 mm)

21" (533 mm)

65" (1651 mm)

21" (533 mm)

24" (610 mm)

22" (559 mm)

46" (1168 mm)

22" (559 mm)

68" (1727 mm)

22" (559 mm)

25" (635 mm)

23" (584 mm)

48" (1219 mm)

23" (584 mm)

71" (1803 mm)

23" (584 mm)

26" (660 mm)

24" (610 mm)

50" (1270 mm)

24" (610 mm)

74" (1880 mm)

24" (610 mm)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 16

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information

Options • • • • •

Storage/Transport Cart • • • •

Dust Cover • 027A037 • Vinyl Coated Polyester • For use with chairs stacked on cart

" 38 mm) 5 6 (9

81" (2057 mm)

72" (1829 mm)

(20 82 83 " mm )

" ) 42 mm 7 6 (10

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 17

2019-09

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Shelving GearBoss® Shelving

GearBoss Shelving is designed for needs all over the facility from athletics to fine arts to general storage areas. The unique design provides cantilevered shelves keeping areas underneath free from supports and available for carts and mobile storage. The system is easily installed and shelves and accessories can be adjusted quickly without tools. GearBoss Shelving comes in standard bays that are 4' wide and 8' high (1219 x 2438 mm) and can be mounted on block wall and wood or metal stud walls. Intended Use • The GearBoss Shelving System is intended to maximize storage density in areas where there is storage need and space limitations. • The GearBoss Shelving System is intended for indoor use in normal ambient temperature and humidity conditions components must not be exposed to prolonged outside weather conditions. Specifications • Galvanized 2" square 12-gauge steel uprights with galvanized 14-gauge shelf support bracket and 14-gauge tube support brackets. • Durable silver powder-coat paint finish. • Each bay section measures approximately 4' wide x 8' high (1219 x 2438 mm). • Each 4' (1219 mm) wide bay is rated for 1000 lbs (454 kg) evenly distributed. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Shipped ready-to-assemble with detailed instructions. Wenger assembly and installation is optional. • Product Numbers: 241C025 - GearBoss Shelf Starter Bay, 241C026 - GearBoss Shelf Add-On Bay. • Patent and Patents Pending. • Ten-year warranty.

17-1/2" Shelf

Garment Bar Work Surface Panel

30-1/2" Shelf

Drawer

Lock Box

Accessories continued on next page.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 18

PERFORMANCE SPACES Application Information Accessories Shelves, 30-1/2" and 17-1/2"

• 30-1/2" (775 mm) cantilevered shelf with 4 support tubes spaced 5-1/4" (133 mm). • 17-1/2" (445 mm) cantilevered shelf with 2 support tubes spaced 5-1/4" (133 mm). • Shelves can be mounted and adjusted in 1" (25 mm) increments without tools. • Both shelves fronted with a contoured aluminum extrusion with a 3/8" (9 mm) lip to retain a hardboard insert if necessary. • Each shelf is rated for 250 lbs (113 kg) evenly distributed, not to exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg) per bay. • All steel parts have a durable silver powder-coat paint finish. • Shelf brackets are formed 12-gauge steel. • Shelf support are 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubes. • Product Number: 241C001 for 30-1/2" (775 mm) shelf and 17-1/2" (445 mm) shelf. Work Surface Panel • 29-1/4" (743 mm) x 44-3/4" (1137 mm) panel lays directly inside a 30-1/2" shelf. • 1-1/8" (29 mm) graphite polyester laminated partical board with PVC edgebanding - black only. • Product Number: 241B030. Drawer • Mounts to underside of a work surface panel accessory for a 30-1/2" shelf. • 14-gauge steele construction. • Durable black powder-coat paint finish. • Rated for 100 lbs (45 kg) evenly distributed. • Product Number: 241A049. Garment Bar/Hanging Bar • 48" (1219 mm) x 14-gauge x 1-1/2" (38 mm) round steel tube. • All steel parts have a durable black powder-coat paint finish. • Durable black powder-coat paint finish. • Mounts to underside of shelves without tools. • Rated for 100 lbs (45 kg) evenly distributed. • Product Number: 241C004. • Interchangeable companion products: 240B056.1 - Football helmet hanger, 1510902 - Shoulder pad hanger - long, 1510901 - Shoulder pad hanger - short. Lock Box • Door is hinged at the bottom so it may drop and stay open for easy access. • Sides, top and bottom panels are 16-gauge steel. • Features upper and lower contoured aluminum extrusions, a key tab-lock and laminated wood door. • Door is 5/8" (16 mm) graphite pebble polyester laminated board with PVC edgebanding - black only. • Rated for 100 lbs (45 kg) evenly distributed. • Mounted and adjustable without tools. • Dimensions: 16" x 18" x 46" (406 x 457 x 1168 mm). • Product Number: 241A007. Peg Board Back • Mounts directly onto existing shelf banks. • Rated for 40 lbs (18 kg) evenly distributed. • Product Number: 241A079. • The 1/4" thick peg board material is not supplied by Wenger and must be purchased separately.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 19

2018-09

PERFORMANCE SPACES Notes: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 03.a. 20

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE INTERIORS BINDER

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE

800.4WENGER (493.6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE

GearBoss® Team Cart™

GearBoss® X-Cart™

GearBoss® Sport Cart™

GearBoss® II High-Density Storage

GearBoss® Workstation

GearBoss® Shelving

Customizable Wood™ Lockers

Rival™ Athletic Lockers

AirPro® Lockers

Mobile Kiosk

TranSPORT Cart

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss® by Wenger is a complete, state-of-the-art system designed to help with all aspects of your athletic program. From lockers, to storage, to equipment transport and fund-raising solutions, GearBoss products save you time, space, and effort. They're flexible and customizable so your system can change as your needs change. Plus, we'll work with you every step of the way to make sure you get exactly the right system–nothing more, nothing less. GearBoss innovations are driven by these key principles: Mobility – Haul equipment and apparel wherever you need it, without hassle Flexibility – Storage systems and custom lockers that adapt to your changing needs Organization – Keep track of your equipment and apparel easily with storage and locker rooms that get in order and stay in order Sanitation – Superior ventilation and anti-microbial surfaces help equipment stay clean, dry and germ-free Space – High-Density storage and room design services for maximizing every inch of space Security – Lockable doors and side panels keep apparel and equipment safe and secure Pride – Equipment and locker rooms that set you apart and reflect your team spirit Featured Components Include: GearBoss® Team Lockers • Rival™ Athletic Lockers • Elite™ Wood Lockers • Customizable Wood™ Lockers • AirPro® Lockers UltraStor® Custom Casework and Pass-Through Cubby Lockers GearBoss® High-Density Storage • X-Cart™ • Team Cart™ • SportCart™ GearBoss® II High-Density Storage GearBoss® Shelving Mobile Specialties • TranSport™ Cart • Mobile Kiosk • Workstation

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 1

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® Rival™ Athletic Lockers

Our Rival lockers are bringing a durable, great-looking wood locker design to your team room. With the introduction of Rival, GearBoss now has a locker solution for any sport, any level and any budget. Rival lockers feature an open front design for your teams' athletic uniforms and equipment. With options like three widths, lockable cubby, padded seat cushion, foot locker shelf, nameplate housing, flip-down garment bar and a variety of color options, Rival gives you the flexibility to better fit your team needs.

Construction

• Locker is 72" (1829 mm) high x 20" (508 mm) deep Available widths are 18", 20" or 24" (457, 508 or 610 mm) • Can be installed in wall mount and island mount configurations • Constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) composite wood core • Polyester laminates available in Cherry, Graphite, Fusion Maple, Solar Oak, Evening Tigris and Oyster finishes. • Hardware is available in Black or Silver • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) beveled PVC

• Two 12-gauge, powder-coat painted garment hooks are included • Each garment bar and garment hook is rated for 50 lb (27 kg) • Fixed seat with open foot locker is standard • Optional hinged seat with enclosed vented foot locker is available • Each locker seat has a static load rating of 375 lb (170 kg) • Cubby shelf has a static load rating of 300 lb (136 kg) • Zinc-plated levelers • Low-profile, zinc-plated through-connectors • Shipped assembled with detailed installation instructions, Wenger installation is available • ADA-Compliant option • Five-year limited warranty

Options

• Available options are shown on the following page

Island Mount Configuration

Wall Mount Configuration

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 2

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Available Options

Helmet and Shoulder Pad Topper

Nameplate Housing

ADA Compliant Locker Includes two additional Garment Hooks

Cubby Compartment with Programmable Digital Lock

Cubby Compartment with Hasp Lock

Flip-down Garment Bar

Fixed Seat with Open Foot Locker

Hinged Seat with Enclosed Foot Locker

Padded Seat Cushion

Shelf is available for Open Foot Locker

Available for Fixed or Hinged Seats

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 3

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® Elite™ Wood Lockers

When it comes to building and maintaining a powerhouse tradition, everything matters. Attracting the staff, coaches and athletes that can take your program to the next level is a constant focus. Your facilities reflect tradition and the expectation for the future, and there is one area that will impact your players every day – the team room. The team room has evolved to be so much more than a locker room. It has to make a statement of excellence. It has to recruit. It has to function. GearBoss lockers will make a first-class statement that will set your program apart.

Performance Requirements

• Engineered with features that outperform and outlast wood veneers and cabinet-type construction • Modularity means you can make unlikely replacements without breaking glues, dowels, or adjacent components • Integrated bench seating eliminates the need for floormounted benches or folding chairs, saving valuable floor space • Open design promotes airflow to encourage drying and reduce mildew and odor buildup and can be enhanced with optional fans

Construction

• Locker sizes: Standard locker height is 78" (1981 mm), 90-1/2" (2299 mm) high with optional storage attic 18"-36" widths available in 2" increments x 24" deep

(457-914 mm widths available in 51 mm increments x 610 mm deep)

Depending on overall locker width, a hinged seat can be up to 29-1/2" (749 mm) deep • Side Profile options are Cut-Back, Straight, Concave or Lighted • Constructed of 3/4" (19 mm) composite wood core • Antimicrobial polyester laminates available in Cherry, Graphite, Pebble, Fusion Maple, Wenger Maple, Solar Oak and Oyster finishes • Hardware is available in Black or Silver

Cut-Back Side Profile

Contour Side Profile

• Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) beveled PVC • Each locker seat is rated for 500 lb (227 kg) • Each garment bar and garment hook is rated for 50 lb (27 kg) • 12-gauge, powder-coat painted garment hooks • Vented foot locker • Leveling powder-coat metal base raises unit from 1" to 2.5" (25 to 64 mm) off floor with zinc-plated levelers • 16-guage powder-coat painted floor plate • 16-guage steel or 3/4" composite wood core nameplate housing • Low-profile, zinc-plated through-connectors • Meets UL 65 / CSA C22.2 Electrical Standards Requires a 120V, 60 Hz, 15A circuit to be connected to the 4" x 4" (102 x 102 mm) electrical junction box of each locker • Available in four core substrates to meet your specific needs: fire-rated, formaldehyde free industrial grade composite wood (standard), moisture-resistant, and Vencore (plywood) • Shipped ready-to-assemble with detailed instructions, Wenger assembly and installation is optional • ADA-Compliant options • Ten-year limited warranty

Options

• More than one thousand ultimate configurations and the ability to coordinate the entire system to your school's colors and branding

Square Side Profile

Lighted Side Profile

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 4

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

Storage Area

Available Options

Garment Bar

Top Cubby Hinges and Programmable Digital Lock

LCD Screen Ready

Garment Hooks and Lights

Left Side Cubby Hinges and Hasp Lock

Cubby Shelf

Behind Seat Storage

Cubby with No Door and Cubby Outlets

Half Shelf with Half Garment Bar

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 5

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Available Options (continued)

Storage Attic with Acrylic Door

Hinged Seat, Seat Lock, Foot Locker Bar, Light Sensor and Outer Foot Locker Light

Fixed Seat and Foot Locker Shelf

Storage Attic with Wood Door

Football Shoulder Pad/Helmet Topper with Fans

Padded Seat and Passive Air Flow Vent

Storage Attic with No Door

Football Shoulder Pad/Helmet Topper and Lighted Marquee

Steel or Diamond Plate Seat Back and Foot Locker Fan

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 6

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Customizable Wood Locker - Sample Configuration Example of 83 Wood Locker Configuration - 36" (914 mm) wide Wood Lockers shown 54' 9-1/2" (16.7 m) 0

0 0

5' 6-1/4" (1.68 m)

5' 4" (1.63 m)

0 0

5' 3-5/8" (1.62 m) 0

6'8" (1.12 m)

29' 8-5/8" (9.06 m)

6'-9/16" (1.84 m)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 7

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

AirProÂŽ Lockers

GearBoss AirPro Lockers are a big part of creating a Team Room that stands apart. A room that gets away from the commercial look of sheet metal solutions. A room that is infinitely more cleanable and as a result, more sanitary, faster drying and better smelling. A team room that carries a high-end aesthetic reflecting your pride and traditions. A team room that saves on floor space with integrated benches that open up your rooms and provide for more effective team meetings.

Island Mount Installation

Wall Mount Installation

Double Tier Seated Configuration

Double Tier Non Seated Configuration

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 8

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Performance Requirements

• Highly durable and easily adaptable to reflect your school's athletic traditions • Open grid design promotes continuous airflow to encourage faster drying and keep contents free of mildew and odor buildup • Open design permits easy visual inspection of contents • Available in island mount and wall mount installations as well as double tier seated and non seated configurations • Shelf height can be varied specific to your installation with three garment hooks mounted under the shelf • Locker sizes:

Wall Mount and Double Tier Seated Lockers

15" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (381 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 74 lb (34 kg)

15" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (381 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 61 lb (28 kg)

18" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (457 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 82 lb (37 kg)

18" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (457 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 64 lb (29 kg)

21" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (533 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 86 lb (39 kg)

21" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (533 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 67 lb (30 kg)

24" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (610 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 90 lb (41 kg)

24" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (610 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 70 lb (32 kg)

27" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (686 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 94 lb (43 kg)

27" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (686 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 73 lb (33 kg)

30" wide x 70" high x 30" deep (762 x 1778 x 762 mm) - 98 lb (44 kg)

30" wide x 70" high x 14.875" deep (762 x 1778 x 378 mm) - 76 lb (34 kg)

Ideal mounting position of the Top Mounting Brackets adds 2" (51 mm), but can be inverted to add no height. 2" (51 mm)

2" (51 mm)

16.75" (425 mm)

16" (406 mm)

14.875" (378 mm)

70" (1778 mm)

Top of Bracket to Floor 79" to 81" (2007 to 2057 mm)

Hinged Seat

Top of Bracket to Floor 79" to 81" (2007 to 2057 mm) Stationary Seat

Seat Height 20" to 22" (508 to 559 mm)

16" (406 mm)

From Floor 5" to 7" (127 to 178 mm)

23.875" (606 mm)

16" (406 mm)

From Floor 5" to 7" (127 to 178 mm)

30" (762 mm)

Seat Height 20" to 22" (508 to 559 mm) 23.875" (606 mm)

30" (762 mm)

Floor

Full Length Compartment

Floor

Double Tier Compartment

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 9

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Construction

• Frame is constructed of 1-1/4" x 16-gauge steel tubing • 1/4" (6 mm) steel wire grille sides welded at all intersections with standard 2" x 2" (51 x 51 mm) wire grid pattern • Adjustable shelf and integrated hinged seat are 3/4" (19 mm) thick formaldehyde free industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish • Frame, wire grilles, legs and hardware standard finish is Black, additional options are available • Standard seat and shelf laminate in antimicrobial Graphite finish, other finish options are available • High-wear laminate is only available in Graphite • Steel nameplate housing accepts a 12" x 2" (305 x 51 mm) nameplate Nameplate is mounted to the top grille as standard and mounted to the top door on the double tier shelf configuration • Garment hooks: One 10-gauge center double hook Two 12-gauge side single hooks Two additional 12-gauge side single hooks on double tier configurations • Mounted 5" to 7" (127 to 178 mm) above floor with open cleanable space under each locker • Legs at predetermined intervals for additional load support • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Shipped ready-to-assemble with detailed instructions, Wenger assembly and installation is available • Ten-year warranty

50.125" (1273 mm)

Latch Plate and Door Pivot Locations for Door Ready Option

Note: Width dimensions are calculated from the center of each side tube, as a result 1-1/4" (32 mm) needs to be added to the required installation space for every run of lockers. Wall space must accommodate an extra 6" (152 mm) in addition to the width of lockers to allow room for installation. Wood Door

Grille Door

Door Ready

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 10

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Options

• Available in both Wall Mount and Island Mount installations • Double Tier Shelf configurations are available • Full Length Door options: - Lockable Wood Door is 5/8" (16 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish and set inside 1-1/4" (32 mm) x 16-gauge tube frame - Lockable Grille Door is 1-1/4" (32 mm) x 16-gauge tube frame and welded at all intersections with 1" (25 mm) wire grid pattern - Wood Door and Grille Door options have a hasp located at the top of the door ready to receive a padlock Door ready option has a hasp under the hinged seat ready to use with a padlock for footlocker content security Padlocks are not supplied • Double Tier Compartment Door options: - Lockable Wood Door is 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish • - Lockable Grille Door is welded at all intersections with 1" wide x 4-1/4" high (25 x 108 mm) wire grid pattern • - Wood Door and Grille Door options have a hasp located at the side of the door ready to receive a padlock Padlocks are not supplied

Accessories

• Wood Backer Panel and End Panels are 5/8" (16 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood Color to be selected from the manufacturer's standard color pallet • Security Box 18-gauge steel box is bolted to the locker 6" wide x 12" long x 11-1/4" high (152 x 305 x 286 mm) Powder-coat painted to match the frame Not available on Double Tier Configurations • Football Shoulder Pad and Helmet Topper 22" wide x 13-1/4" long x 18-3/4" high (559 x 337 x 476 mm) 3/8" (10 mm) diameter welded steel rod frame, does not fit on 15" (381 mm) wide lockers Color to be selected from the manufacturer's standard powder-coat paint pallet Black is standard if no color is selected Not recommended for Double Tier Configurations • ADA-Compliant configurations are available

(30 12" 5m m)

18.75" (476 mm)

22" (559 mm)

11.25" (286 mm)

6" m) 2m 5 (1

Five Sided Foot Locker Security Box

Football Shoulder Pad and Helmet Topper

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 11

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

40' 2" (12.24 m)

9' 8-1/16" (2.95 m)

AirPro Locker - Sample Configuration Example of 105 AirPro Locker Configuration - 18" (457 mm) wide AirPro Lockers shown

37' 3-11/16" (11.34 m)

Storage Room

7' 6-7/8" (2.31 m)

4' 5-11/16" (1.36 m)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 12

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information AirPro Locker - Sample Configuration (continued) Example of 80 AirPro Locker Configuration with Island - 24" (610 mm) wide AirPro Lockers shown

4' 1-3/4" (1.26 m)

38' 0" (9.04 m)

5' 2-9/16" (1.59 m)

32' 8" (9.96 m)

5' 1-1/4" (1.56 m)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 13

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

UltraStor® Custom Casework and Pass-Through Cubby Lockers

Wenger custom casework solutions bring a higher level of function and aesthetics to athletic spaces. From lockers to pass-through laundry cubbies, Wenger will customize casework to enhance your designs. All of our solutions begin with high-quality standards to provide an easy-to-clean surface and to enhance air-flow. Antimicrobial laminate options can add another line of defense against sanitation issues. Bolt-through construction means that doors and connection points will never pull out and replacement doesn't require breaking apart glue and dowel construction.

Construction

• Variety of styles tailored to different storage needs • Available in total cabinet heights from 15" to 95" (381 to 2413 mm) • Cubby sizing: Cubby rows Cubby widths

One to seven rows available (depending on cabinet height) 6" (152 mm)

8" (203 mm)

9-3/8" (238 mm)

12-3/8" (314 mm)

19-1/2" (495 mm)

25-1/2" (648 mm)

• Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors • Edging is 1/8" (3 mm) radiused PVC • Patented shelves are blow-molded polyethylene mounted with self-lock shelf supports • Grooved shelves allow air to circulate around items being stored • Ventilation holes in casework for circulation help dissipate moisture and aid air circulation • Door options: - Wood doors - same construction as wall panels - No door • Door lock options: - Programmable digital lock - Locking slide bolt with strike plate designed for padlocks with 3/4" (19 mm) maximum vertical shackle clearance • Doors include heavy-duty 5-knuckle institutional ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 hinge, through - bolted to cabinet wall • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 Custom Casework • Ten-year warranty

Pass-Through Cubbies

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 14

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Performance Requirements

• Verification of building dimensions to be confirmed by general contractor prior to construction. Product is prefabricated in standard sizes • Wall opening(s) for pass-through lockers must be a minimum of 1" (25 mm) wider than the pass-through locker banks (including end cover panels when applicable) and a minimum of 1" (25 mm) taller than the pass-through locker minimum height The wall opening size includes framing around the perimeter of the opening that will be used to shim/anchor the pass-through lockers horizontally and vertically Wall opening(s) and framing must be complete prior to pass-through locker installation • Finish trim to be provided & installed by others • Wall/floor area specified for pass-through locker installation must be free of surface mounted obstructions such as light switches, outlets, HVAC, pipes or conduit, window trim, clocks, signs, etc • End cover panels (at end of pass-through locker rows) and closure panels to be supplied as shown per drawing • Floor(s) must be cleared of debris or equipment prior to pass-through locker installation • Color combination to be selected 1/2" (13 mm) Clearance to Opening

Pass-Through Locker Bank Width

1/2" (13 mm) Clearance to Opening 1" (25 mm) Clearance to Opening

Minimum Pass-Through Locker Height 2" (51 mm) Standard Depth Available In Heights From 4"-12" (102-305 mm)

Toe Kick Side Detail

Wall Opening Detail

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 15

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Construction • Wall panels are 3/4" (19 mm) thick formaldehyde free industrial grade composite wood with polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard Wenger colors • Available with right- or left-hinged (standard) doors for easy access • Bolt-through construction maintains superior door and hardware condition, year after year • Seismic-compliant bracing available upon request as a special order • Available in several core substrates to meet your specific needs: fire-rated, formaldehyde free industrial grade composite wood (standard), moisture-resistant, FSC certified, and Vencore (plywood)

stenibaC eboR tsoC woL

• Ten-year warranty

033

002

032

003 133 034

103 Cabinet #4 shown without doors

Cabinet #12 shown without doors

Cabinet #15 shown without doors

Cabinet #35 53 shown without doors

See the "Instrument Storage" and "Robe and Uniform Storage" sections for more expansive coverage of storage cabinets.

stenibaC eboR erotstramS 433 703 303 403

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 16 383 483

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® High-Density Storage

GearBoss high-density storage carts create more room in less space – improving space efficiency by as much as 50% – by using an innovative system of tracks and rolling carts. X-Carts are designed to move laterally on the track and stay in your equipment room. Team Carts are portable and engineered with retractable track guides so you can move the equipment around the room or off campus. No more wasted time running back and forth to the storage room. Every cart can be reconfigured for maximum storage. The best solution includes a mix of X-Carts and Team Carts. Your Wenger representative will design the best solution for you. Bottom line — you'll get a flexible sports storage system engineered to meet every challenge.

Performance Requirements • Convert traditional storage area into organized, secure high-density space

Construction • Available in two widths 32" (813 mm) and 48" (1219 mm). • Roller guides follow the track keeping the units aligned and are made of glass-filled nylon • Intended for indoor use in normal ambient temperature and humidity conditions — must not be exposed to prolonged outside weather conditions • Welded chassis made from 16-gauge, 14-gauge and 12-gauge components • Upright support tubes constructed from large 2" (51 mm) diameter, 16-gauge steel tubing • Resistant-welded heavy-duty steel wire grille end frames • Durable powder-coat paint finishes • Variety of colors available for wire grille ends • Heavy-duty 6" (152 mm) wheels on the Team Cart or 8" (203 mm) wheels on the X-Cart provide easy movement • Roof panel constructed from solid 5/8" thermofused composite wood core with aluminum extrusions • Roof assembly and wire shelf load capacity is 150 lb (68 kg) each evenly distributed Total cart load capacity is 400 lb (181 kg) • 32" wide x 78" long x 79" high (813 x 1981 x 2007 mm) • 48" wide x 78" long x 79" high (1219 x 1981 x 2007 mm) • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818 • Five-year warranty

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 17

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Start here and Wenger will put together a proposal. Firm: ___________________________________________________________________________________ Name: __________________________________________________________________________________ Title: ___________________________________________________________________________________ Firm: ___________________________________________________________________________________ City/State/Zip: ____________________________________________________________________________ Phone: _____________________________________ Fax: _______________________________________ E-mail: _________________________________________________________________________________ Best time and method of contact: ____________________________________________________________ School/Project Name: ______________________________________________________________________ City: _______________________________________________________________ State: ______________ Estimated Delivery (quarter & year) ___________________________________________________________ Room Size: (Space #1) Dimensions: Height ____________ Length ____________ Width ____________ Room Size: (Space #2) Dimensions: Height ____________ Length ____________ Width ____________ To receive a site drawing with your proposal, include a copy of the prints, floor plan and elevation showing locations of windows, doors, ventilation, sprinklers and other permanent fixtures. For a Wenger representative to provide you with estimates and drawings, also fill out the following to the best of your ability. Number of Players

Number of Players

Football Male ________ Female ________ Number of Helmets: ________ Preference Hanging ________ Shelved ________ Number of Shoulder Pads: Preference Hanging ________ Stacked ________

Spirit Squad

Male ________ Female ________

Dance

Male ________ Female ________

Ice Hockey

Male ________ Female ________

Bball/Sball

Male ________ Female ________

Field Hockey

Male ________ Female ________

Soccer

Male ________ Female ________

Swim/Dive

Male ________ Female ________

Basketball

Male ________ Female ________

Tennis

Male ________ Female ________

Wrestling

Male ________ Female ________

Golf

Male ________ Female ________

Volleyball

Male ________ Female ________

Cross Country

Male ________ Female ________

Track

Male ________ Female ________

Lacrosse

Male ________ Female ________

Other ___________________________________ Male ________ Female ________ Other ___________________________________ Male ________ Female ________ Other ___________________________________ Male ________ Female ________

Please fax or email this form today. Attn: Athletic Specialist Fax: 507-455-4258 Phone: 800-493-6437 email: info@wengercorp.com Wenger Corporation, 555 Park Drive, P.O. Box 448, Owatonna, MN 55060 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 18

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBossÂŽ X-Cartâ&#x201E;˘

High density storage carts that maximize your space by sliding together and apart along a fixed aluminum track. Transforming your equipment room into an organized, clean, professional storage space is easy with GearBoss. Our rugged X-Carts create an efficient, smart system of storage that will save space, protect your equipment, and save you loads of time spent organizing. X-Carts roll laterally along a fixed aluminum track creating aisles between carts when you need to get at your equipment and closing back together when you don't. Carts can be configured with a full range of panels, doors and grilles coordinated with your team colors. You can also add accessories such as doors, helmet hangers, shoulder pad stackers, hanger bars, shelves, dividers, track locks and more. Select colors from the manufacturer's standard pallet. 48" X-Cart

32" X-Cart

79" (2007 mm)

78"

(19

78" mm

)

32" mm) 3 (81

(19

)

48" mm) 19 (12

Aluminum Track holds carts in place and guides them as they are moved.

Recessed Floor Track (New Construction Only)

Surface Mounted Floor Track

) mm 4 1 d 9 e 3' ( Aisl ende m com Re Floor Track Options

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 19

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss X-Carts Examples

48" wide X-Cart with four 24" wide Metal Wire Shelves and two Garment Bars. Commonly used to store uniforms (300 - 350 uniforms: jerseys hung; pants/shorts folded)

48" wide X-Cart with eight 24" wide Metal Wire Shelves. Commonly used for folded garment storage (960 - 1000 t-shirts and/or shorts)

48" wide X-Cart with four Garment Bars. Used for hanging garments (600 - 700 hung jerseys)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 20

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss X-Carts Examples (continued)

48" wide X-Cart with Short Attic and Helmet Hangers. Capacity for 154 helmets (112 helmets hung and 42 helmets in attic)

48" wide X-Cart with Tall Attic and Helmet Hangers. Capacity for 175 helmets (112 helmets hung and 63 helmets in attic)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 21

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® Team Cart™

High density storage carts that can leave the track and transport your gear wherever you need it. Now it's easy to get your equipment out of storage and to the gym, practice area, parking lot or sidelines – without breaking a sweat. GearBoss Team Carts retain all the convenient storage benefits of X-Carts but are engineered to leave the track. Imagine all your gear organized on one or two high-density storage carts, traveling wherever it needs to go – and back again. Or park and lock your equipment in a temporary space, instantly creating safe, secure storage anywhere. 48" Team Cart

32" Team Cart

79" (2007 mm)

78"

(19

78"

) (

32" mm) 813

(19

)

48" mm) 19 (12

Aluminum Track holds carts in place and guides them as they are moved.

m) 4m 1 d 9 e 3' ( Aisl ende m com Re

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 22

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss Team Cart Examples (continued)

32" wide Team Cart with two 32" wide Metal Wire Shelves and one Garment Bar. Commonly used to store uniforms (150 - 175 uniforms: jerseys hung; pants/shorts folded)

32" wide Team Cart with five 32" wide Metal Wire Shelves. Commonly used to store helmets (70 helmets on shelves)

32" wide Team Cart with seven Helmet Hangers. (8 helmets per hanger or 56 helmets)

32" wide Team Cart with four Shoulder Pad Stackers and one Free Standing Shoulder Pad Stacker. (18 - 25 pads per stacker or 100 pads) 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 23

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories

Truss Bar/Garment Bar • Designed to be installed into the GearBoss X-Carts or Team Carts using two accessory hanger brackets • The Truss Bar is designed to be used with shoulder pad hangers, helmet hangers • The double-bar construction reduces the swinging motion of hanging equipment

Truss Bar

• The Garment Bar is designed to be used with standard garment hangers, support up to 175 jerseys • Durable powder-coat paint finish, black Garment Bar

• Shipped ready to be installed, no tools required • Truss Bar, 1-1/2" x 4" x 75-1/2" long (38 x 102 x 1918 mm). 200 lb (90.7 kg) load rating • Garment Bar, 1-1/2" diameter x 75-1/2" long (38 x 1918 mm). 100 lb (45.4 kg) load rating

Hanger Bracket (included)

Metal Wire Shelves • Designed to be installed into the GearBoss X-Carts or Team Carts using four accessory hanger brackets per shelf

Metal Wire Shelves

• Resistant welded construction of 3/16" and 5/16" (5 and 8 mm) metal wires • Shipped ready to be installed, no tools required • The 24" (610 mm) wide shelf allows for shelving half of a 48" (1219 mm) cart or all of the cart with two shelves • Wire Shelf 24" (610 mm), dimensions 21-5/8" x 74-7/8" (549 x 1902 mm) • Approximate weight, 35 lb (15.9 kg) • Wire Shelf, 32" (813 mm), dimensions 27-5/8" x 74-7/8" (702 x 1902 mm) • Approximate weight, 40 lb (18.1 kg) • Rated for 150 lb (68 kg) evenly distributed

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 24

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories (continued) Soft Cart Divider • Mesh divider allows you to divide a 48" (1219 mm) wide GearBoss cart lengthwise. The mesh dividers allow visibility through the cart

Full Length Soft Cart Divider

Helmet Hangers • Designed to be used with the Truss Bar, 7 helmet hangers per Truss Bar • Accommodates 8 helmets • Welded construction using 5/16" and 1/4" (8 and 6 mm) steel wires • Powder-coat paint finish, black • Approximate Weight: 5 lb (2.3 kg)

Helmet Hangers

Shoulder Pad Hangers • Designed in short and long versions • Designed to be used with the Truss Bar, 15 shoulder pad hangers of each size per Truss Bar • Welded construction using 5/16" (8 mm) wire and 12 gauge formed plate • Powder-coat paint finish, black • Shoulder Pad Hanger, short. Approximate weight, 1 lb (0.5 kg)

Shoulder Pad Hanger

• Shoulder Pad Hanger, long. Approximate weight, 2 lb (0.9 kg)

Island Stop

Island Stop • Designed to be permanently installed as an end stop for the GearBoss Carts • Welded frame constructed of durable 2" (51 mm) diameter x 16 gauge steel tubing • Durable powder-coat paint finish, black • Dimensions are 9-5/8" wide x 42-3/4" long x 30-1/2" tall (244 x 1086 x 775 mm) • Approximate weight: 24 lb (10.9 kg) • Shipped fully assembled 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 25

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories (continued) Shelf Lip

Secures with the same knobs as the dividers and can be set up with the tall side out for a 4" (102 mm) lip or the short side out for a 2.5" (63 mm) lip

Full Length Shelf Lip

Bat Holder 32" Bat Holder holds up to16 bats 32" Bat Holder

Adjustable Track Lock Designed to prevent carts from rolling beyond the end of the tracks

Adjustable Track Lock

Adjustable Track Stop Bracket Designed to lock the carts into position along the track

Adjustable Track Stop Bracket

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 26

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories (continued) Shoulder Pad Stacker

• Designed to store and or transport approximately 18-25 shoulder pads depending on pad style • Support tubes constructed of durable 3/4" (19 mm) x 16 gauge steel tubing • Specially molded support preserves pad shape • The molded support is vertically adjustable to accommodate pads with shallow or deep chest protection • Durable powder-coat paint finish, color black • Equipped with wheels, for mobility, when used as a stand-alone device • Overall dimensions, 31-21/32" wide x 64-3/4" high (804 x 1645 mm) • Approximate weight, 31 lb. (14.1 kg) • Intended use is with the 32" (813 mm) X-Carts, Team Carts and GearBoss II or as a free standing shoulder pad storage and transportation device • Not intended to be used with and will not work with Carts equipped with the Side Closure Accessory or the Bypass Door Accessory Attic

Shoulder Pad Stacker

64-3/4" (1645 mm)

31 (80 -21/3 4 m 2" m)

14" mm) 6 (35

• Attics are available in two heights 25-5/8" (651 mm) and 37-5/8" (956 mm) • Welded end frames made from 2" (51 mm) diameter x 16 gauge steel tubing • Resistant welded heavy-duty steel wire grill end frames • Durable powder-coat paint finish • Roof panel constructed from solid 5/8" (16 mm) thermofused composite wood core with aluminum extrusions, the roof assembly is rated for 150 lb (68 kg) load • Designed to be accessorized with the 24" (610 mm) wide wire shelves • Approximate weights: Short attic, 115 lb (52 kg) Tall attic, 123 lb (56 kg) • Designed only to be used on the 48" (1219 mm) X-Cart Short Attic Tall Attic

37-5/8" (956 mm)

77-

1/4

" (1

962

) 47-

3/4

13 (12

77-

25-5/8" (651 mm)

1/4

" (1

962

) 47-

)

3/4

3 121

)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 27

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories (continued) Solid End Closure

• Made from solid 5/8" wood composite with polyester laminate finish and black heavy-duty PVC edge banding • Can be ordered in a variety laminate colors • Provides an excellent space for team logos • Adds a level of security to carts • Cart End Closure, 32" (813 mm) • Dimensions: 27-1/4" x 64-5/16" (692 x 1634 mm) Approximate Weight: 25 lb (11.3 kg) • Cart End Closure, 48" (1219 mm) • Dimensions: 43-1/4" x 64-5/16" (1099 x 1634 mm) Approximate Weight: 48 lb (21.8 kg)

Solid End Closure

Three Piece Solid Side Closure Accessory • Made from solid 5/8" wood composite with polyester laminate finish and black heavy-duty PVC edge banding • Can be ordered in a variety laminate colors • Securely closes one side of cart opposite open side or opposite a bypass door adding a level of security to carts • Shipped ready-to-assemble • Dimensions: 65" x 73" (1651 x 1854 mm) • Approximate Weight: 75 lb (34 kg)

Three Piece Solid Side Closure

Bypass Doors Accessory • Made from solid 5/8" wood composite with polyester laminate finish and black heavy-duty PVC edge banding • Can be ordered in a variety laminate colors • Easy glide aluminum track provides convenient access • Sliding doors lockable with padlock (not supplied) for added security • Shipped ready-to-assemble • Dimensions: 65" x 73" (1651 x 1854 mm) • Approximate Weight: 86 lb (39 kg)

Bypass Doors

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 28

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® SportCart™

Compact GearBoss SportCarts can be used as part of a larger GearBoss installation or as a mobile, stand-alone solution. They are designed for use in small spaces and for sports that require less storage. SportCart Four heavy-duty, 5" swivel casters make mobility a snap. The nimble SportCart will navigate narrow hallways, shorter door openings and most elevators. It's the small-space storage solution.

Performance Requirements

• High density storage on or off the track • Heavy-duty commercial-grade swivel casters for easy moving on hard surfaces such as concrete, gym floors, tile and low-pile unpadded carpet • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818

73" (1854 mm)

Construction

• Welded chassis made from 16-gauge, 14-gauge and 12-gauge components • Upright support tubes constructed from large 2" (51 mm) diameter, 16-gauge steel tubing • Resistant welded heavy-duty steel wire grille end frames 4 (1 1-3 • Variety of colors available for wire grille ends wit 060 m/4" hh m • Extra wide heavy-duty 5" (127 mm) swivel casters made from glass-filled and ) nylon with polyurethane non-marring outer roller guides le • Roof panel constructed from solid 5/8" thermofused composite wood core with aluminum extrusions • Roof assembly load capacity is 150 lb (68 kg) evenly distributed Total cart load capacity is 400 lb (181 kg) • 32" (813 mm) wide x 41-3/4" (1060 mm) long x 73" (1854 mm) high • Five-year warranty

32" mm) 3 (81

Accessories

Swing Door & Side Closure • Swing door lockable with padlock (not supplied) for added security • Made from solid 5/8" wood composite with polyester laminate finish and black heavy-duty PVC edge banding • Can be ordered in a variety laminate colors • Dimensions: Swing Door 34-1/8" x 63-1/2" (867 x 1613 mm) • Side Closure 34-7/8" x 65-5/8" (886 x 1667 mm) • Approximate Weight: Swing Door 52 lb (24 kg) • Side Closure 41 lb (19 kg) Garment Bar • Designed to be installed using two included hanger brackets • Designed to be used with standard garment hangers and supports up to 80 jerseys Garment Bar • Durable black powder-coat paint finish Accessory • Dimensions: 37-1/2" (953 mm) x 1-1/2" OD" • Rated for 100 lb (45 kg) weight evenly distributed Metal Wire Shelves • Designed to be installed using four included hanger brackets per shelf • Resistant welded construction of 3/16" and 5/16" (0.1875" and 0.3125") metal wires • Rated for 150 lb (68 kg) evenly distributed • Dimensions: 27-5/8" x 37" (702 x 940 mm) • Approximate Weight: 20 lb (9 kg)

Swing Door & Side Closure Accessory

Hanger Bracket (included)

Wire Shelf Accessory

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 29

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Sport Cart Examples

SportCart with three Metal Wire Shelves. Commonly used for folded garments (160 - 200 folded t-shirts and/or shorts)

SportCart with two Metal Wire Shelves and one Garment Bar. Commonly used for uniforms (80 uniforms: 80 hung jerseys; 80 folded pants/shorts)

SportCart with two Garment Bars. Commonly used for uniforms (160 hung jerseys; 1/2" spacing)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 30

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® II High-Density Storage System

The newest high-density storage system from Wenger joins our successful Team and X-Carts in creating athletic equipment storage rooms that make better use of available space. With this new system you get the same space-saving organization as our existing carts in a simplified system with a budget-friendly price. You will gain more control over the time and money lost to poor organization, lax security and misplaced inventory. This storage system is simply a better way to care for and secure your equipment investments.

Performance Requirements

79" (2007 mm)

• Convert traditional storage area into organized, high-density space • Fixed track system creates a movable aisle to maximize otherwise wasted space and allow interior access to the carts and surrounding area • Intended for indoor use in normal ambient temperature and humidity conditions — must not be exposed to prolonged outside weather conditions • Open grille design improves airflow and Shelf facilitates visibility

Construction

• Dimensions: 32.5"w x 79"h x 72.7"d (826 x 2007 x 1847 mm) • Welded chassis made from 16-gauge, 14-gauge and 12-gauge components • Upright support tubes constructed from large 2" (51 mm) diameter, 16-gauge steel tubing • Resistant-welded heavy-duty steel wire grille end frames with 3" (76 mm) grid spacing • Heavy-duty cast iron 6" (152 mm) wheels provide easy movement and keep the units aligned • Durable powder-coat paint finish. Black bases, shelves and garment bars Silver tubes and grille • Top shelf and adjustable shelf load capacity is 150 lb (68 kg) each evenly distributed Total cart load capacity is 500 lb (227 kg) • Five-year warranty

(18 72.7 47 " mm )

Standard Components

Track Stop

5" ) 32. mm 0 6 (82

Side Security Grid with Floor Lock

Cart includes a garment bar integrated into the top panel, one adjustable-height shelf and one 6' (1829 mm) floor track.

Accessories

• Additional adjustable shelves • Adjustable 12-gauge 1-1⁄2" diameter steel garment bars finished in black powder-coat paint • Side security grid is constructed of 14-gauge formed metal brackets, 3⁄16" and 5⁄16" steel wire grilles and finished with black powder-coat paint • Floor lock assembly holds carts together and is locked with a customer-provided lock for added security • Track stop 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 31

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss II Examples

GearBoss II standard components includes one Integrated Garment Bar and one Adjustable Height Shelf. Commonly used to store uniforms (140-150 hung jerseys on garment bar: pants/shorts folded)

GearBoss II with one Integrated Garment Bar, one Adjustable Height Shelf and three additional adjustable height shelves. Commonly used to store uniforms and helmets (8-10 helmets on cart floor, four and on cart roof or nested shoulder pads 8-10 per shelf. 48-60 helmets or shoulder pads or misc folded pants/shorts/pads)

GearBoss II with Integrated Garment Bar and six Helmet Hangers. Used for storing helmets (48 helmets hung and 10-12 on roof)

GearBoss II with Integrated Garment Bar and three Shoulder Pad Stackers and one Free Standing Shoulder Pad Stacker. (18 - 25 pads per stacker) 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 32

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

GearBoss® Shelving

This is the affordable, flexible, durable solution for shelving storage and workspace needs. It works great for athletic, music and marching band storage; and theatre garment and prop storage. The cantilever design optimizes overhead space and keeps the floor free from supports for extra room. The system is so versatile it can be configured to your specific needs to make sure you get the maximum storage space.

Performance Requirements • Cantilever design keeps the floor open for carts and flexible use • Holes at 1" (25 mm) increments provide easy adjustability • Shelves are adjustable by hand – no tools required • Each bay is load-rated at 1,000 lb (450 kg) (if installation instructions are strictly followed) • Spans doors and windows, if necessary • Easy to install and relocate • Uprights and mounting brackets are zinc-plated to avoid rust

Construction • Available in bays 4'w x 8'h (1219 x 2438 mm) Custom heights are available • Shelf supports are 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) square tube-steel with silver powder-coat paint finish • Aluminum shelf fronts feature a 3/8" (10 mm) lip to retain a hardboard insert or work surface option • Ten-year warranty 4' (

121

8' (2438 mm)

4' (

Starter Bay

Add-On Bay

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 33

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information Accessories Shelves, 30-1/2" and 17-1/2" • 30-1/2" (775 mm) cantilevered shelf with 4 support tubes spaced 5-1/4" (133 mm) • 17-1/2" (445 mm) cantilevered shelf with 2 support tubes spaced 5-1/4" (133 mm) • Shelves can be mounted and adjusted in 1" (25 mm) increments without tools • Both shelves fronted with a contoured aluminum extrusion with a 3/8" (10 mm) lip to retain a hardboard insert • Each shelf is rated for 250 lb (113 kg) evenly distributed, not to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg) per bay • All steel parts have a durable silver powder-coat paint finish • Shelf brackets are formed 12-gauge steel • Shelf support are 14-gauge 7/8" (22 mm) steel tubes Work Surface Panel • 29-1/4" (743 mm) x 45-3/4" (1162 mm) panel lays directly inside a 30-1/2" shelf • 1-1/8" (29 mm) graphite polyester laminated particle board with PVC edgebanding - black only Drawer • Mounts to underside of a work surface panel accessory for a 30-1/2" shelf • 14-gauge steel construction • Durable black powder-coat paint finish • Rated for 100 lb (45 kg) evenly distributed Garment Bar/Hanging Bar • 48" (1219 mm) x 14-gauge x 1-1/2" (40 mm) round steel tube 17-1/2" Shelf • All steel parts have a durable black 30-1/2" powder-coat paint finish Shelf Garment • Durable black powder-coat paint finish Bar • Mounts to underside of shelves without tools • Rated for 100 lb (45 kg) evenly distributed • Interchangeable companion products: Work Surface Football helmet hanger, Panel Shoulder pad hanger - long, Shoulder pad hanger - short Lock Box • Door is hinged at the bottom so it can drop and stay open for easy access Lock • Sides, top and bottom panels are 16-gauge steel Box • Features upper and lower contoured aluminum extrusions Drawer • Laminated wood door with keyed lock • Door is 5/8" (16 mm) graphite pebble polyester laminated board with PVC edgebanding - black only • Rated for 100 lb (45 kg) evenly distributed • Mounted and adjustable without tools • Dimensions: 16" x 18" x 46" (406 x 457 x 1168 mm) Peg Board Back • Mounts directly onto existing shelf banks • Rated for 40 lb (18 kg) evenly distributed • The 1/4" thick peg board material is not supplied by Wenger and must be purchased separately 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 34

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss Sample Layouts

2' 6-5/16" (0.47 m)

GearBoss Carts and Shelving

15' 0" (4.57 m)

9' 1-3/8" (2.78 m)

GearBoss II

Shelving

30' 0" (9.14 m)

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 35

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss Sample Layouts (continued) 26' 8-7/8" (8.15 m)

2' 65/16" (0.47 m)

GearBoss Carts and Shelving (continued)

Shelving

20' 4" (6.2 m)

6'8" (2.03 m)

32" X-Cart 13' 8-7/8" (4.2 m)

Shelving

48" X-Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 36

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GearBoss Sample Layouts (continued) GearBoss Carts and Shelving (continued)

2' 6-5/16" (0.47 m)

32" T-Cart

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 37

48" X-Cart

5' 10-1/2" (1.79 m)

48" X-Cart

Shelving

48" X-Cart

Stools

32" T-Cart

TranSport Cart

Shelving

3' 11-3/16" (1.20 m)

48" X-Cart

SportCarts

4' 1" (1.24 m)

20' 6" (6.25 m)

48" X-Cart

56' 5" (17.20 m)

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

TranSport Cart GearBoss® Athletic Equipment Storage

The GearBoss TranSport Cart is another Wenger innovation designed specifically for the needs of athletic programs. The TranSPORT cart makes it easier than ever to move a variety of equipment through your facility and out to the field. And in just a few seconds it is easily transformed into a rock-solid table for use on the sidelines or anywhere in the facility. Practices. Games. Travel. The TranSort Cart goes everywhere your coaches and trainers go. Intended Use • • • •

Transport of gear within facility and outdoors to fields and points of use. Converts to table for use as work surface, sideline table or trainer's table. End braces fold for compact storage when not in use or when put in truck, trailer or plane. Intended for trailering behind slow-moving motorized vehicles such as Gators™ golf carts, lawn tractors, ATV's etc. Not to exceed 10 mph (16 km). 27" (686 mm)

Cart Specifications • 240A003 • Heavy-duty chassis construction. • Chassis is 1-1/4" (32 mm) 16-gauge tube steel+1-1/4" (32 mm) square tube cross sections. • Powdercoat paint and finish. • Aluminum deck finished in UV and chemical-resistant powdercoat. • Pneumatic 10" (254 mm) wheels, outdoor treads, sealed ball bearings. • Comfort-grip pull handle transitions to pin-hitch for motorized vehicle, 1-1/4" (32 mm) 14-gauge steel with wing nut and pivot joint. • Front wheels turn on central, permanently lubricated bearings and king-pin. • End braces fold flat to deck for storage and rotate under deck to function as table legs. Made of 1-1/4" (32 mm) 14-gauge powder-coated steel tube. • 15-1/2" (394 mm) storage height, 32" (813 mm) table height. • 30" wide x 66" long (762 x 1676 mm) deck. 71-1/2" (1816 mm) total length. • Dynamic maximum load rating 1,000 lbs (454 kg). • Total cart weight 150 lbs (68 kg). • Five-year warranty. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative.

44" (1118 mm)

8" ) -3/ 71 3 mm 1 (18

3 (80 1-1/2 0m " m)

" 66 mm) 76 6 (1

(76 30" 2m m)

32" (813 mm)

Accessories • Heavy-duty mesh cart wrap encloses loaded cart and quickly snaps on and off. Mesh Wrap

2018-09

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 38

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Mobile Kiosk GearBoss® Athletic Equipment Storage

The Mobile Kiosk is a self contained, mobile merchandising kiosk that allows you to follow your fans, wherever they go. All of your logo gear is neatly secured inside the enclosed unit while moving from venue to venue. Panels open up in seconds to create your kiosk. Eight removable bins allow different athletic programs, boosters or school clubs to keep inventory in their own bin. Move beyond candy sales and car washes to real revenue generation. Intended Use • • • •

58" (1473 mm)

Organize school spirit items for sale at multiple locations. Travels to the gym, field, parking lot, school hall. Move your fund raising efforts to a new level. This product is intended for indoor and outdoor use in normal ambient temperature and humidity conditions — Exposing the Mobile Kiosk to rain or excessive moisture could result in damage.

Specifications

119-

1/2"

(303

5 mm

)

90" (2286 mm)

• • • •

240A007.1 Heavy-duty chassis construction. Hand break for easy mobility. Chassis is 1-1/4" (32 mm) 16 gauge tube steel with 1-1/4” (32 mm) 42" square tube cross sections. (1067 mm) • Canopy – 0.10 inch thick aluminum attached to 18 gauge tube weldment. • Side Doors – 3/4" thermofused composite wood core. • Front Fold-Down Doors – 5/8" thermofused composite wood core. • 42" (1067 mm) counter height. • Pneumatic 10" (254 mm) wheels with outdoor treads and sealed ball bearings. • Closed dimensions - 72" long x 31" deep x 77" tall (1829 x 787 x 1956 mm). • Open dimensions - 119-1/2" long x 58" deep x 90" tall (3035 x 1473 x 2286 mm). • Bin measurements - 14-3/16" wide x 27-3/4 deep x 11-1/8" tall (360 x 705 x 283 mm) (eight bins per cart). • Display Panel Measurements - Side doors - 26-3/8" wide x 61" tall (670 x 1549 mm) - Back doors - 62-5/8" wide x 31-3/4" tall (1591 x 806 mm). • Slat Wall Starter Kit - one basket, two waterfalls, eighteen hooks • Slat wall is reinforced with aluminum channels to accept heavier loads and a wide variety of retail display hardware. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Weight (empty) - 550 lb (249.5 kg). • 800 lb (363 kg) maximum load tires. • Five-year warranty.

77" (1956 mm)

" (1

" 31 mm) 7

Accessories

(78

240A676 - Electric Kit contains a 2’ (610 mm) track light with two lights and a seven-outlet plug strip.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 39

2018-12

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information TECHNICAL SHEET

Workstation GearBoss® Workstation

The equipment room is a hub of activity. Helmets are assembled and decaled, equipment is inspected and repaired, hundreds of jerseys and garments are folded, lunch is eaten, meetings are held. If you are using folding tables, boxes or the floor to make it happen, it's time to step up to the GearBoss Workstation. Ergonomically perfect at 42" (1067 mm) high the Workstation features a tough 1" (25 mm) wood laminate surface. The entire Workstation rolls easily on casters keeping your space transitional to ever-changing activities. Built like a GearBoss Storage Cart, you can add optional, adjustable grille shelves and locking bypass doors. Intended Use • The GearBoss Workstation is intended for indoor use in normal ambient temperature and humidity conditions components must not be exposed to prolong outside weather conditions. • The heavy-duty commercial-grade swivel casters are intended for easy moving on hard surfaces such as concrete, gym floors, tile and low pile unpadded carpet • Roller guides follow the track and can be recesses into clip holder when the cart is being used for transport. Specifications • 241A050 Includes one bypass door set and one side closure 384 lbs (174 kg) 241A052 Includes two bypass door sets 388 lbs (176 kg) 241A053 No doors included 314 lbs (142 kg). • 32" wide x 78" long x 42" high (813 x 1981 x 1067 mm). • Welded chassis made from 16-gauge, 14-gauge and 12-gauge components. • Upright support tubes constructed from large 2" (51 mm) diameter, 16-gauge steel tubing. • Resistant welded heavy-duty steel wire grill end frames with 1" (25 mm) grid openings. • Durable powder-coat paint finishes. • Includes one adjustable steel wire grille shelf finished in black powder-coat paint. Additional shelves are available. • Optional locking bypass doors are constructed from solid 5/8" wood composite with graphite polyester laminate finish and black heavy-duty PVC edge banding. Padlock is not supplied. • Heavy-duty 6" swivel casters with polyurethane non-marring outer. • Top panel constructed from solid 5/8" thermofused composite ) mm wood core with aluminum extrusions and topped with 81 (19 a 1" (25 mm) graphite laminate work surface " 78 rated for a 150 lbs. (68 kg) load. • UL GREENGUARD Certified - Product certified for low chemical emissions: ul.com/gg - UL 2818. • Environmental attributes and LEED compliance for this product can be found at www.wengercorp.com/GREEN or by contacting your Wenger representative. • Shipped fully assembled. • Five-year warranty.

" (8

)

42" (1067 mm)

Workstation shown with locking bypass doors.

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 40

2017-12

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information

EQUIPMENT STORAGE AND LOCKERS ENGINEERED FOR ATHLETICS 800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 41

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information HIGH-DENSITY

STORAGE

Smart Storage Solutions for Your Valuable Equipment

4 SMART, ORGANIZED STORAGE

Storage of sports equipment in most facilities is still in the stone age – wood shelves, plastic bins and piles on the floor. Rugged GearBoss® carts and shelving take storage and transport of your valuable gear to the next level. You’ll be able to free up space, keep better track of equipment, roll it where you need it, secure it from theft and improve sanitation. Our experts can help you design a system that meets your space and storage needs so you always know your gear is organized, protected and accounted for.

4 BUILT FOR ATHLETIC GEAR

TranSport™ Cart

Mobile Kiosk

Adjustable Shelving

X-Carts™ and Team Carts™

4 INCREDIBLY DURABLE 4 ROLL WHERE YOU NEED IT 4 IMPROVE SANITATION 4 5-YEAR WARRANTY 4 CHOOSE THE CARTS, SHELVES

AND COMPONENTS YOU NEED

SportCart™

Workstation

GearBoss II

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 42

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information WOOD & METAL GRID

LOCKERS

Lockers for Any Sport, Any Level and Any Budget

4 WOOD & METAL GRID DESIGNS

The team room has evolved to be so much more than a locker room. Dented and rusty metal lockers or chipped and broken wooden lockers are being replaced by today’s functional, clean and very impressive options from GearBoss®. Our lockers are built for today’s equipment needs and can be configured to fit your program and budget. Designs are available for every level with optional features like video displays, power outlets, data ports, LED lighting, lockable cubbies, ventilation fans and more. Contact our experts to start planning your new team room today.

4 BUILT TOUGH FOR ATHLETES 4 PROVEN QUALITY 4 STANDARD & CUSTOM DESIGNS 4 QUICK-DRY VENTILATION 4 10-YEAR WARRANTY* 4 COLORS AND FINISHES

TO MATCH YOUR TEAM *5-year warranty on Rival wood lockers

AirPro® Metal Grid Lockers

Rival™ Wood Lockers

Elite™ Wood Lockers

Custom Wood Lockers

Coaches Cabinet

Day-Use & PassThrough Lockers

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 43

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE Application Information GEARBOSS® BENEFITS: SPACE & ORGANIZATION GearBoss delivers a unique solution that increases the storage capacity of your rooms by as much as 50 - 75%, while greatly improving organization, efficiency and access.

FLEXIBILITY GearBoss equipment is designed to adjust as your programs change. Carts can be moved, reorganized and shuffled within your storage space as sports and seasons change.

MOBILITY The ability to get equipment closer to where it is needed – from the storage room to the gym to the field or even away games – is critical to your organization, effort and time savings.

SANITATION MRSA, mold, mildew, bacteria, and staph issues can be a burden on your athletes and your program. GearBoss products gets equipment out of piles, off the floor and into well-ventilated spaces. Plus, lockers are treated with an antimicrobial finish.

SECURITY The average school or professional team has thousands of pieces of athletic equipment to organize, store and protect from loss or theft. GearBoss carts let individual teams secure their equipment, even in an unlocked room.

PRIDE The organization and cleanliness of your GearBoss equipment covered with your team colors and logos will make a positive impact on everyone who comes in contact with your athletic program.

FREE PLANNING EXPERTISE: GearBoss brings you the expertise of our involvement in thousands of new construction and renovation projects around the world. We have strategic insights into the unique requirements of athletic spaces including equipment rooms, laundry facilities, coaches offices and locker rooms. We have a wide array of literature including planning guides, space and cost comparisons and case studies to assist you in not just planning, but securing approval on your project. Call on the GearBoss team as soon as a project is on the horizon. Getting started early is one key to success.

CALL 1.800.493.6467 for our free literature today Visit www.gearboss.com/architects.php for more information.

Registered AIA/CES provider

WENGER CORPORATION

JR CLANCY

Phone 800.836.1885 Worldwide +1.315.451.3440 | jrclancy.com | 7041 Interstate Island Road | Syracuse | NY 13209-9713

GEARBOSS

800.4WENGER (493-6437) | Worldwide +1.507.455.4100 | wengercorp.com Interiors Binder | 04.a. 44